Wiley MBA Catalogue 2013 by Wiley India

W i l e y M B A C ata l o g u e 2 0 13

Get your free electronic inspection copy today! All of Wileyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s key textbooks are now available to lecturers as e-Comps through CourseSmart, the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s number one provider of eTextbooks and digital course material. Wiley, along with other educational publishers, provide an impressive and growing catalogue of key texts in your teaching area. CourseSmart enables anytime, anywhere access to textbooks at the click of a mouse, from your web browser or from any web enabled device.

Simply go to the CourseSmart website to sign-up for your free electronic inspection copies:

http://instructors.coursesmart.co.uk/ Explore our entire catalogue in your area of interest at wiley.com

Ta b l e o f C o n T e n T s

Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Decision-Making and Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Entrepreneurship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 HR Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 International Business . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Leadership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Management and OB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Marketing, Advertising and Consumer Behaviour . . . . . . . . . 68 Operations and IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Social Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Sustainability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Other and Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Most titles available in e-book format.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

aCCounTing

neW

FOURTH EDITION

Accounting for Managers Interpreting Accounting Information for Decision-Making

accounting for Managers: interpreting accounting information for Decision Making, Third edition Paul M. Collier 978-1-119-97967-8 • 580pp • Paperback • 2012

Emphasizing the interpretation rather than the construction of accounting information, Accounting for Managers encourages a critical, rather than an unthinking acceptance of accounting techniques. Whilst immensely valuable for planning, decision-making and control, users of accounting information need to recognize the assumptions behind, and the limitations of particular accounting techniques. As in the previous editions, Accounting for Managers links theory with practical examples and case studies drawn from real business situations across a wide range of manufacturing, retail and service industries. Paul M. Collier

financial accounting: a global Perspective Rod Monger 978-0-470-51840-3 • 800pp • Paperback • 2009

Financial Accounting: A Global Approach presents accounting in a form familiar to major markets in the U.S., U.K., Japan, China, France and other countries, while unifying the material through international standards. The general framework for discussion starts with international issues based on the work of the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). neW

Audit and

Assurance Essentials for Professional Accountancy exams with website

audit and assurance essentials: for Professional accountancy exams Katharine Bagshaw, ICAEW 978-1-1199-6879-5 • 496pp • Paperback February 2013

Audit and assurance is a basic and vital aspect of the financial world and a key element of all professional accountancy programs. Whereas professional training on the topic frequently immerses students in too much detail while glossing the basics, this book begins with the fundamentals and expands to cover the details in a more measured way. With practical examples and end-of-chapter examples, External Audit and Assurance Essentials breaks down a difficult and challenging field of professional accounting. Katharine Bagshaw

MBA Catalogue 2013

Managerial accounting, fourth edition James Jiambalvo, University of Washington 978-0-470-50595-3 • 600pp • Paperback • 2009

Managerial Accounting focuses attention on decision making through incremental analysis and performance measurement. Students are motivated to learn managerial accounting by connecting concepts and techniques to the real world; using real cases and real manager’s comments on real company issues. Students and instructors alike have praised this text’s clear and concise writing style, to-the-point discussions, illustrated ideas, and examples that are presented to make ideas concrete.

Creative accounting, fraud and international accounting scandals Michael Jones, Bristol University 978-0-470-05765-0 • 576pp • Hardcover • 2010

Business scandals are always with us from the South Sea Bubble to Enron and Parmalat. As accounting forms a central element of any business success or failure, the role of accounting is crucial in understanding business scandals. This book aims to explore the role of accounting, particularly creative accounting and fraud, in business scandals. The book is divided into three parts. In Part A the background and context of creative accounting and fraud is explored. Part B looks at a series of international accounting scandals and Part C draws some themes and implications from the country studies.

neW

ifRs essentials Dieter Christian, Vienna University, Norbert Lüdenbach, BDO Germany 978-1-1184-9471-4 • 656pp • Paperback November 2012

IFRS Essentials is 60% example based, and this approach makes the book unique and facilitates the quick understanding of the rules of IFRS. By contrast, most other books only include a small(er) number of examples and consequently do not illustrate the application of the rules in practice effectively. The book aims at capturing problems and their solutions by using explanations which are short, simple and easy to understand. Obscure language and incomplete illustrations are avoided, and the book strikes a balance between explaining the underlying theories and practical illustration of principles.

aCCounTing

neW

financial accounting, ifRs second edition

benford’s law: applications for forensic accounting, auditing, and fraud Detection

Jerry Weygandt, Paul Kimmel, and Donald Kieso 978-1-1182-8590-9 • 735pp • Hardcover • 2012

The highly anticipated 2nd edition of Financial Accounting: IFRS retains each of the key features on which users of Weygandt Financial have come to rely, while putting the focus on international companies and IFRS.

Financial 2e

Includes

neW

SOFTWARE DEMO

auditor’s guide to iT auditing, + software Demo, second edition Richard Cascarino

AUDITOR’S GUIDE TO IT AUDITING

978-1-118-14761-0 • 430pp • Hardcover • 2012

Many auditors are unfamiliar with the techniques they need to know to efficiently Second Edition and effectively determine whether information systems are adequately protected. Now RICHARD E. CASCARINO in a Second Edition, Auditor’s Guide to IT Auditing provides step-by-step guidance for auditors that can be applied to all computing environments.

BENFORD’S L AW

Mark Nigrini, The College of New Jersey, and Joseph T. Wells 978-1-118-15285-0 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2012

Applications for Forensic Accounting, Auditing, and Fraud Detection

A powerful new tool for all forensic accountants, or anyone who analyzes data that may MARK J. NIGRINI, P H D have been altered, Bendford’s Law has 250 figures and uses 50 interesting authentic and fraudulent real-world data sets to explain both theory and practice, and concludes with an agenda and directions for future research. F O R E W O R D B Y J O S E P H T. W E L L S

neW Third EdiTion

Accounting

accounting, Third edition Michael Jones 9781119977186 • 764pp • Paperback • 2012

Accounting, 3rd Edition provides a very accessible and easy-to-follow introduction and is aimed at students studying accounting for the first time. The book introduces concepts Michael Jones in an engaging and easy-to-follow manner, and examples are tried and tested with many graded questions and answers.

neW

Financial Forensics Body of Knowledge with WEBSITE

DARRELL D. DORRELL GREGORY A. GADAWSKI

financial forensics body of Knowledge, + Website Darrell D. Dorrell and Gregory A. Gadawski 978-0-470-88085-2 • 541pp • Hardcover • 2012

Financial Forensics Body of Knowledge is a comprehensive and practical overview of civil and criminal forensic accounting methodology. The book defines the profession of forensic accounting and includes practical forensic accounting tips, tools, and techniques.

neW

international gaaP 2013: generally accepted accounting Principles under international financial Reporting standards Ernst & Young 978-1-1184-8401-2 • 4800pp • Paperback December 2012

IFRSs, the standards set by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), are complex and sometimes obscure. International GAAP® 2013 is the only globally focused work on IFRSs. It is not constrained by any individual country’s legislation or financial reporting regulations, and it ensures an international consistency of approach unavailable elsewhere. It shows how difficult practical issues should be approached in the complex, global world of international financial reporting, where IFRSs have become the accepted financial reporting system in more than 100 countries. This integrated approach provides a unique level of authoritative material for anyone involved in preparing, interpreting or auditing company accounts, for regulators, academic researchers and for all students of accountancy.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

aCCounTing

neW

tly A sk ed Fr equen on s Question

IFRS

llings Steven Co

frequently asked Questions on ifRs Steven Collings, Leavitt Walmsley Associates 978-1-1199-9897-6 • 296pp • Paperback March 2013

In a handy, easy-to-navigate Q&A format, Frequently Asked Questions on IFRS provides accounting and finance p rofessionals with the answers to some of the most commonly asked questions on the new standards. Covering the often complicated areas of accounting for financial instruments, tangible and intangible assets, provisions, and revenue recognition, the book also contains a valuable overview of the standards and the thinking behind them.

MBA Catalogue 2013

financial Reporting under ifRs: a Topic based approach Wolfgang Dick, ESSEC Business School, Paris, France, Franck MissonierPiera, EMLyon Business School 978-0-470-68831-1 • 360pp • Paperback • 2010

This book offers a global perspective on IFRS by presenting the prescribed rationale and principles and illustrating them through numerous examples from large international companies. It aims to develop the fundamental skills necessary to read and use the information contained in all types of financial statements, through examples, activities, questions and answers. Financial Reporting under IFRS is ideally suited to the needs of students of accounting and financial reporting, but all users of financial statements, from creditors and investors to suppliers, customers, employees and governments will benefit from its concise, topic-based approach.

C o M M u n i C aT i o n s

revised And updAted

T he

L e a der’s G u i de to S torytelling Ma sterinG the art and discipLine

The leader’s guide to storytelling: Mastering the art and Discipline of business narrative, Revised and updated

the IABC the handbook of handbook of organizational organizational communication communication

Stephen Denning

o f B u s i n e ss n a r r at i v e

978-0-470-54867-7 • 368pp • Hardcover • 2011

A Leader’s Guide to Storytelling shows how storytelling is one of the few available ways to handle the principal and most difficult challenges of leadership: sparking action, getting people to work together, and leading people into the future. Using tons of examples and how-to techniques, Denning explains how you can learn to tell the right story at the right time.

stephen

denninG A u t h o r o f Squirrel Inc.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE ROLE OF STORY IN ORGANIZATIONS. PART II: EIGHT NARRATIVE PATTERNS. PART III: PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER.

Second Edition

A Guide to Internal Communication ommunication,, Publ blic ic Relations, Mar ark keting, and and Lea ead ders ersh hip E D I TO R

The iabC Handbook of organizational Communication: a guide to internal Communication, Public Relations, Marketing, and leadership, second edition Tamara Gillis, Elizabethtown College, PA, and IABC 978-0-470-89406-4 • 480pp • Hardcover • 2011

This new edition of The IABC Handbook of Organizational Communica Communication contains a comprehensive collection of practical knowledge about successful corporate communication and its effect on an organization as a whole. Thoroughly revised and updated to meet the realities of today’s organizational environment, the Second Edition of this vital resource includes fresh case studies and original chapters. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION. PART II: MANAGING COMMUNICATION. PART III: INTERNAL COMMUNICATION. PART IV: PUBLIC RELATIONS. PART V: MARKETING COMMUNICATION.

neW Presenting Financials and Other Numbers So People Will Understand You

PAINTING NUMBERS WITH

Painting with numbers: Presenting financials and other numbers so People Will understand You Randall Bolten 978-1-118-17257-5 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2012

Author Randall Bolten shares his decades of experience as a senior finance executive R ANDALL BOLTEN distilling complicated information into Foreword by Tom Campbell clear presentations to help you make your numerical information more comprehensible, meaningful, and accessible. Painting with Numbers is brimming with hands-on advice, techniques, tools, rules, and guidelines for producing clear, attractive, and effective quantation (the word the author has coined for the skill of presenting numbers). BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE RULES. PART II: THE TOOLS. PART III: REAL MASTERY. PART IV: WRAP-UP.

Management Communication, Third edition Arthur H. Bell, PhD, University of San Francisco, and Dayle M. Smith, University of San Francisco 978-0-470-08445-8 • 608pp • Paperback • 2010

Finally business professionals will be able to learn how to communicate effectively. Management Communication builds the essential writing, speaking, and listening skills needed to succeed succeed. The authors follow a four-part approach to communication instruction: explain it, try it, evaluate it, and perfect it. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: PILLARS OF MANAGEMENT COMMUNICATION. PART II: LETTERS, MEMOS, AND E-MAIL. PART III: REPORTS AND PROPOSALS. PART IV: CAREER COMMUNICATION. PART V: COMMUNICATION ISSUES FOR MANAGEMENT SUCCESS.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

C o M M u n i C aT i o n s

neW

talk

strangers

How Everyday, Random Encounters Can Expand Your Business, Career, Income, and Life

Talk to strangers: How everyday, Random encounters Can expand Your business, Career, income, and life

World Class Communication: How great Ceo’s win with the public, shareholders, employees, and the media

David Topus

Virgil Scudder

978-1-118-20347-7 • 208pp • Hardcover • 2012

978-1-1182-3005-3 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2012

Connect to the world around you and realize the enormous potential in talking to strangers. Talk to Strangers explains how to stand David Topus out and tap the potential of others by taking notice of who is standing alongside you on the bank line, the latte pickup point, or the ticket counter at the airport. David Topus’ life-changing message is that we should “always connect,” which means going beyond online relationships and engaging in the random, real-life interactions that have unlimited potential to supercharge businesses, accelerate careers, and enrich your life. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: CREATING YOUR FUTURE THROUGH THE PEOPLE YOU HAVEN’T EVEN MET . . . YET. PART II: TURNING RANDOM ENCOUNTERS INTO MUTUALLY BENEFICIAL RELATIONSHIPS. PART III: LEVERAGING THE CONNECTION. PART IV: GENDER- NEUTRAL RANDOM CONNECTING. PART V: MASTERY INSIGHTS AND THE TALK TO STRANGERS MASTERY PROGRAM.

MBA Catalogue 2013

neW

World Class Communication equips you with crisis lessons, procedures, and examples that could help your company save millions of dollars through proper preparation and response. The must-have book is packed with examples of good and bad handling of countless situations and expert instruction on how to manage them without breaking into a sweat. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE ESSENTIALS OF SUCCESSFUL COMMUNICATION. PART II: VITAL CONSTITUENCIES. PART IV: PUBLIC APPEARANCES. PART V: THE WORLD OUTSIDE.

D e C i s i o n - M a K i n g a n D s TaT i s T i C s

Handbook of Decision Making Paul C. Nutt, Ohio State University, and David C. Wilson, Warwick Business School 978-1-4051-6135-0 • 720pp • Hardcover • 2010

Handbook of Decision Making is a vital reference text for all students and professionals of management, organization and decision making. Drawing evidence and authors from North America, Canada and Europe, the handbook offers a wide range of theoretical and empirical approaches to the understanding of organizational and strategic decisions. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION. PART II: KEY THEORETICAL PERSPECTIVES. PART III: CONCEPTUALIZING STRATEGIC DECISION MAKING. PART IV: FACTORS AND CONSIDERATIONS THAT IMPINGE ON DECISION MAKING. PART V: RECENT EMPIRICAL FINDINGS THAT SUPPORT THEORIES AND VIEWS. PART VI: METHODOLOGY FOR THE STUDY OF DECISION MAKING. PART VII: DIRECTIONS AND PERSPECTIVES.

CHR IS J. LLOYD

Data-Driven Business Decisions

An Introduction to

Bootstrap Methods with Applications to R Michael R. Chernick • Robert A. LaBudde

978-0-470-61960-5 • 520pp • Hardcover • 2010

Providing a framework for the development of sound judgment and the ability to utilize quantitative and qualitative approaches, Data Driven Business Decisions introduces students to the important role that data plays in understanding business outcomes. This valuable guide addresses four general areas that managers need to know about: data handling and Microsoft Excel, uncertainty, the relationship between inputs and outputs, and complex decisions with trade-offs and uncertainty. STATISTICS IN PR ACTICE

INCLUDES CD-ROM

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: How are we doing: Data driven views of business performance . CHAPTER 2: What stands out and why? Who Wins? Data driven views of performance dynamics . CHAPTER 3: Dealing with uncertainty and chance . CHAPTER 4: Let the data change you views: Bayes Method . CHAPTER 5: Valuing an uncertain payoff . CHAPTER 6: Business problems that depends on knowing “how many” . CHAPTER 7: Business problems that depends on knowing “how much” . CHAPTER 8: Making complex decisions with trees . CHAPTER 9: Data, estimation and statistical reliability . CHAPTER 10: Managing mean performance . CHAPTER 11: Are these customers different? Did the intervention work? Looking at changes in mean performance . CHAPTER 12: What is my brand recognition? Will it sell? Analysing counts and proportions . CHAPTER 13: Using the relationship between shares to build a portfolio . CHAPTER 14: Investigating relationship between business variables . CHAPTER 15: Describing the effect of a business input: Linear regression . CHAPTER 16: The reliability of regression based decisions . CHAPTER 17: Multi-causal relationship and multiple regression . CHAPTER 18: Product features, non-linear relationships and market segments . CHAPTER 19: Analysing data that is collected regularly over time . CHAPTER 20: Extending regression models – the sky is the limit .

Michael R. Chernick and Robert A. LaBudde 978-0-470-46704-6 • 240pp • Hardcover • 2011

An Introduction to Bootstrap Methods provides both an elementary and a modern introduction to the bootstrap for students who do not have an extensive background in advanced mathematics. It offers reliable, hands-on coverage of the bootstrap’s considerable advantages, as well as its drawbacks. The book outpaces the competition by skillfully presenting results on improved confidence set estimation, estimation of error rates in discriminant analysis, and applications to a wide variety of hypothesis testing and estimation problems. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Estimation . CHAPTER 3: Confidence intervals . CHAPTER 4: Hypothesis testing . CHAPTER 5: Time series . CHAPTER 6: Bootstrap variants . CHAPTER 7: Pecial topics . CHAPTER 8: When the bootstrap is inconsistent and how to remedy it .

Data Driven business Decisions Chris J. Lloyd, The University of Melbourne

an introduction to bootstrap Methods with applications to R

Multilevel Statistical Models 4th Edition

Multilevel statistical Models, fourth edition Harvey Goldstein, University of Bristol 978-0-470-74865-7 • 382pp • Hardcover • 2010

Multilevel Statistical Models provides a clear introduction to this important area of statistics. The author provides coverage of different kinds of multilevel models, and how to Harvey Goldstein interpret different statistical methodologies and algorithms applied to such models. This Fourth Edition reflects the growth and interest in this area and is updated to include new chapters on multilevel models with mixed response types, smoothing and multilevel data, models with correlated random effects and modeling with variance. WILEY SERIES IN PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: An introduction to multilevel models . CHAPTER 2: The 2-level model . CHAPTER 3: Three level models and more complex hierarchical structures . CHAPTER 4: Multilevel Models for discrete response data . CHAPTER 5: Models for repeated measures data . CHAPTER 6: Multivariate multilevel data . CHAPTER 7: Latent normal models for multivariate data . CHAPTER 8: Multilevel factor analysis, structural equation and mixture models . CHAPTER 9: Nonlinear multilevel models . CHAPTER 10: Multilevel modelling in sample surveys . CHAPTER 11: Multilevel event history and survival models . CHAPTER 12: Cross classified data structures . CHAPTER 13: Multiple membership models . CHAPTER 14: Measurement errors in multilevel models . CHAPTER 15: Smoothing models for multilevel data . CHAPTER 16: Missing data, partially observed data and multiple imputation . CHAPTER 17: Multilevel models with correlated random effects . CHAPTER 18: Software for multilevel modelling .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

D e C i s i o n - M a K i n g a n D s TaT i s T i C s

An Introduction to

Critical Thinking and

Creativity

an introduction to Critical Thinking and Creativity: Think More, Think better J. Y. F. Lau, The University of Hong Kong

Think More, Think Better

Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics

Optimal Learning

An Introduction to Critical Thinking and Creativity focuses on the basic principles that underlie critical thinking and creativity. The majority of the content is on critical thinking since more topics are naturally involved and since they can be discussed readily and systematically. The last few chapters are devoted to creativity and research methodology. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Thinking and writing clearly . CHAPTER 3: Definitions . CHAPTER 4: Necessary and sufficient conditions . CHAPTER 5: Linguistic pitfalls . CHAPTER 6: Truth . CHAPTER 7: Basic logic . CHAPTER 8: Identifying arguments . CHAPTER 9: Valid and sound arguments . CHAPTER 10: Inductive reasoning . CHAPTER 11: Argument mapping . CHAPTER 12: Argument analysis . CHAPTER 13: Scientific reasoning . CHAPTER 14: Mill’s methods . CHAPTER 15: Reasoning about causation . CHAPTER 16: Diagrams of causal processes . CHAPTER 17: Statistics and probability . CHAPTER 18: Thinking about values . CHAPTER 19: Fallacies . CHAPTER 20: Cognitive biases . CHAPTER 21: Analogical reasoning . CHAPTER 22: Making rational decisions . CHAPTER 23: What is creativity? CHAPTER 24: Creative thinking habits .

A SHORT COURSE

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The challenges of learning . CHAPTER 2: Adaptive learning . CHAPTER 3: The economics of information . CHAPTER 4: Ranking and selection . CHAPTER 5: The knowledge gradient . CHAPTER 6: Bandit problems . CHAPTER 7: Elements of a learning problem . CHAPTER 8: Linear belief models . CHAPTER 9: Subset selection problems . CHAPTER 10: Optimizing a scalar function . CHAPTER 11: Optimal bidding . CHAPTER 12: Stopping problems . CHAPTER 13: Active learning in statistics . CHAPTER 14: Simulation optimization . CHAPTER 15: Learning in mathematical programming . CHAPTER 16: Optimizing over continuous measurements . CHAPTER 17: Learning with a physical state .

NATHAN YAU

statistical inference: a short Course Michael J . Panik, PhD, University of Hartford 978-1-118-22940-8 • 440pp • Hardcover • 2012

Michael J. Panik

Statistical Inference: A Short Course is ideal for undergraduates and first-year graduates majoring in the natural sciences, the social sciences, or in business. The book offers sufficient material for a one-semester course without overwhelming students with “too fast a pace” or “too many” topics.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Nature of Statistics . CHAPTER 2: Analyzing Quantitative Data . CHAPTER 3: Descriptive Characteristics of Quantitative Data . CHAPTER 4: Essentials of Probability . CHAPTER 5: Discrete Probability Distributions and Their Properties . CHAPTER 6: The Normal Distribution . CHAPTER 7: Simple Random Sampling and the Sampling Distribution of the Mean . CHAPTER 8: Confidence Interval Estimation of ? . CHAPTER 9: The Sampling Distribution of a Proportion and its Confidence Interval Estimation . CHAPTER 10: Testing Statistical Hypotheses . CHAPTER 11: Comparing Two Population Means and Two Population Proportions . CHAPTER 12: Bivariate Regression and Correlation . CHAPTER 13: An Assortment of Additional Statistical Tests .

MBA Catalogue 2013

Warren B. Powell, PhD, Princeton University, and Ilya O. Ryzhov, PhD, University of Maryland

Learn the science of collecting information to make effective decisions. Optimal Warren B. Powell Learning develops the needed principles for Ilya O. Ryzhov gathering information to make decisions, especially when collecting information is time-consuming and expensive. Designed for readers with an elementary background in probability and statistics, the book presents effective and practical policies illustrated in a wide range of applications, from energy, homeland security, and transportation to engineering, health, and business.

neW

Statistical Inference

optimal learning

978-0-470-59669-2 • 404pp • Hardcover • 2012

978-0-470-19509-3 • 272pp • Paperback • 2011

Joe Y. F. Lau

neW

VISUALIZE THIS

Visualize This: The flowingData guide to Design, Visualization, and statistics Nathan Yau, UCLA

The FlowingData Guide to Design, Visualization, and Statistics

978-0-470-94488-2 • 384pp • Paperback • 2011

Data must be presented in a way that can be interpreted, analyzed, and applied and one of the best ways to do this is through data visualization. With this full-color book, Nathan Yau offers innovative step-by-step tutorials and techniques that he pioneered to tell stories with data in a creative and visual way. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Telling Stories with Data . CHAPTER 2: Handling Data . CHAPTER 3: Choosing Tools to Visualize Data . CHAPTER 4: Visualizing Patterns over Time . CHAPTER 5: Visualizing Proportions . CHAPTER 6: Visualizing Relationships . CHAPTER 7: Spotting Differences . CHAPTER 8: Visualizing Spatial Relationships . CHAPTER 9: Designing with a Purpose .

D e C i s i o n - M a K i n g a n D s TaT i s T i C s

essentials of Quality with Cases and experiential exercises, Premier edition

Essentials of

uality

V. E. Sower

STEPHEN G.

POWELL

KENNETH R.

BAKER

MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

The ART of MODELING with SPREADSHEETS

978-0-470-50959-3 • 416pp • Paperback • 2010

While most books on quality management are much too complex, Essentials of Quality follows a new approach that is more accessible and engaging for business managers. Victor E. Sower This new book presents unique coverage of hot topics and integrates more relevant examples. Case studies help build handson experience while CHAPTER exercises increase understanding of the concepts.

834

5.5%

.5%

54%

236

752

2255.370882

.5%

234%

0.23

457

21.78

.5%

2.3 83 789 9% 3

5 7.8 4556 8

Measurement Madness: avoiding Performance Management Pitfalls

0.73 0 66 6 .6788 4566 990 7 3245 . .88 6 5 0.934 567 438 3 4 0.15 2

629

910

neW

35.67088

25%

12345678

789

10.5%

MeasureMent Madness avoiding PerforMance ManageMent Pitfalls dina gray / Pietro Micheli / andrey Pavlov

Dina Gray, Cranfield University, Veronica Martinez, Cranfield University, Pietro Micheli, Cranfield University, Andrey Pavlov Cranfield University, and Monica Franco, Cranfield University

978-1-119-97070-5 • 192pp • Hardcover • September 2013

Measuring people, processes and organisations often leads to unintended consequences. This book reveals to managers the more outrageous outcome of measurement on behaviour and then teaches them how to avoid these pitfalls. Giving real life examples of where measurement has led to unexpected consequences, each chapter reviews the true stories told, explains how the particular behaviour highlighted could have been foretold, and demonstrates what a manager needs to consider when creating measures and performance measurement systems.

Stephen G. Powell, Dartmouth College, and Kenneth R. Baker, Dartmouth College 978-0-470-53067-2 • 528pp • Hardcover • 2010

with cases and experiential exercises

Management science: The art of Modeling with spreadsheets, Third edition

Now in its third edition, Powell and Baker’s Management Science provides students and business analysts with the technical knowledge and skill needed to develop real expertise in business modeling. The authors cover spreadsheet engineering, management science, and the modeling craft. THIRD EDITION

Compatible with Excel 2010

Featuring Risk Solver Platform

Judgment in Managerial Decision Making, eighth edition Max H. Bazerman, Harvard University, and Don A . Moore, Carnegie Mellon University 978-1-118-06570-9 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2012

Judgment in Managerial Decision Making empowers readers to quickly learn how to overcome biases to make better managerial decisions. The book examines judgment in a variety of organizational contexts, and provides practical strategies for changing and improving decision-making processes so that they become part of one’s permanent behavior.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

D e C i s i o n - M a K i n g a n D s TaT i s T i C s

neW

Second Edition

neW WILEY SERIES IN PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS

statistical Thinking: improving business Performance, second edition

Statistical

Thinking

Roger W. Hoerl and Ronald D. Snee 978-1-1180-9477-8 • 511pp • Hardcover • 2012

Straightforward and insightful, Statistical Improving Business Thinking: Improving Business Performance, Per formance prepares students for business leadership by developing their capacity to apply statistiROGER HOERL RON SNEE cal thinking to improve business processes. Unique and compelling, this Second Edition shows them how to derive actionable conclusions from data analysis, solve real problems, and improve real processes. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: STATISTICAL THINKING CONCEPTS. PART II: STATISTICAL ENGINEERING: FRAMEWORKS AND BASIC TOOLS. PART III: FORMAL STATISTICAL METHODS.

neW

applied Regression

APPLIED REGRESSION Modeling, second edition MODELING Iain Pardoe SECOND EDITION

Methods of Multivariate analysis, Third edition

Methods of Multivariate Analysis

Alvin C. Rencher 978-0-470-17896-6 • 800pp • Hardcover • 2012

Third Edition

Methods of Multivariate Analysis, now with a co-author, offers a complete and up-to-date examination of the field. The authors have Alvin C. Rencher William F. Christensen streamlined previously tedious topics, such as multivariate regression and MANOVA techniques, to add newer, more timely content. The Third Edition also presents several expanded topics in Kronecker product; prediction errors; maxi maximum likelihood estimation; and selective key, but accessible proofs. This resource meets the needs of both statistics majors and those of students and professionals in other fields. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Matrix Algebra . CHAPTER 3: Characterizing and Displaying Multivariate Data . CHAPTER 4: The Multivariate Normal Distribution . CHAPTER 5: Tests on One or Two Mean Vectors . CHAPTER 6: Multivariate Analysis of Variance . CHAPTER 7: Tests on Covariance Matrices . CHAPTER 8: Discriminant Analysis: Description of Group Separation . CHAPTER 9: Classification Analysis: Allocation of Observations to Groups . CHAPTER 10: Multivariate Regression . CHAPTER 11: Canonical Correlation . CHAPTER 12: Principal Component Analysis . CHAPTER 13: Exploratory Factor Analysis . CHAPTER 14: Confirmatory Factor Analysis . CHAPTER 15: Cluster Analysis . CHAPTER 16: Graphical Procedures .

978-1-1180-9728-1 • 346pp • Hardcover • 2012

Applied Regression Modeling offers a practical, concise introduction to regression analysis for upper-level undergraduate students of diverse disciplines including, but not IAIN PARDOE limited to statistics, the social and behavioral sciences, MBA, and vocational studies. The Second Edition’s overall approach is strongly based on an abundant use of illustrations, examples, case studies, and graphics. It emphasizes major statistical software packages, including SPSS, Minitab, SAS, R, and R/S-PLUS.

neW Wiley

Series

Probabilit y

and

Statistic s

LOSS MODELS FRO M DATA TO D EC I S I O N S Fourth Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Foundations . CHAPTER 2: Simple linear regression . CHAPTER 3: Multiple linear regression . CHAPTER 4: Regression model building I . CHAPTER 5: Regression model building II . CHAPTER 6: Case studies . CHAPTER 7: Extensions .

STUART A. KLUGMAN • HARRY H. PANJER • GORDON E. WILLMOT

loss Models: from Data to Decisions, fourth edition Stuart A. Klugman, Harry H. Panjer, and Gordon E. Willmot 978-1-1183-1532-3 • 544pp • Hardcover • 2012

This set contains 978-0-4703-8571-5 Loss Models: From Data to Decisions, Solutions Manual, 3rd Edition and 978-0-4703-08578 ExamPrep Online for Loss Models: From Data to Decisions, Online, 3rd Edition.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION. PART II: ACTUARIAL MODELS. PART III: CONSTRUCTION OF EMPIRICAL MODELS. PART IV: PARAMETRIC STATISTICAL METHODS. PART V: CREDIBILITY. PART VI: SIMULATION.

MBA Catalogue 2013

D e C i s i o n - M a K i n g a n D s TaT i s T i C s

neW

Categorical Data analysis, Third edition

an introduction to analysis of financial Data with R

Alan Agresti

Ruey S. Tsay

978-0-470-46363-5 • 768pp • Hardcover • 2012

978-0-470-89081-3 • 416pp • Hardcover • 2012

A classic in its own right, Categorical Data Analysis continues to provide an introduction to modern generalized linear models for categorical variables. The text emphasizes methods that are most commonly used in practical application, such as classical inferences for two- and three-way contingency tables, logistic regression, loglinear models, models for multinomial (nominal and ordinal) responses, and methods for repeated measurement and other forms of clustered, correlated response data.

An Introduction to Analysis of Financial Data with R provides a systematic and mathematically accessible introduction to financial econometric models and their applications in modeling and predicting financial time series data. It emphasizes empirical financial data and focuses on real-world examples. Following this approach, readers will master key aspects of financial time series, including volatility modeling, neural network applications, market microstructure, and high-frequency financial data.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Introduction: Distributions and Inference for Categorical Data . CHAPTER 2: Describing Contingency Tables . CHAPTER 3: Inference for Two-Way Contingency Tables . CHAPTER 4: Introduction to Generalized Linear Models . CHAPTER 5: Logistic Regression . CHAPTER 6: Building, Checking, and Applying Logistic Regression Models . CHAPTER 7: Alternative Modeling of Binary Response Data . CHAPTER 8: Models for Multinomial Responses . CHAPTER 9: Loglinear Models for Contingency Tables . CHAPTER 10: Building and Extending Loglinear Models . CHAPTER 11: Models for Matched Pairs . CHAPTER 12: Clustered Categorical Data: Marginal and Transitional Models . CHAPTER 13: Clustered Categorical Data: Random Effects Models . CHAPTER 14: Other Mixture Models for Discrete Data . CHAPTER 15: Non-Model-Based Classification and Clustering . CHAPTER 16: Large- and Small-Sample Theory for Parametric Models . CHAPTER 17: Historical Tour of Categorical Data Analysis .

CHAPTER 1: Financial Data and Their Properties . CHAPTER 2: Linear Models for Financial Times Series . CHAPTER 3: Case Studies of Linear Time Series . CHAPTER 4: Volatility models . CHAPTER 5: Applications of Volatility Models . CHAPTER 6: High-Frequency Financial Data . CHAPTER 7: Value at Risk .

neW F i rs t E u ro p Ea n E d i t i o n

statistics for business and economics Carlos Cortinhas 978-1-119-99366-7 • 864pp • Paperback • 2012

s tat i s t i C s F o r Business and eConomiCs

Every business area relies on an understanding of statistics to succeed. Statistics for Business and Economics by Carlos Cortinhas and Ken Black shows students that the proper C a r l o s C or t inh a s a nd K en Bl aC K application of statistics in the business world goes hand-in-hand with good decision making. Every statistical tool presented in this book has a business application set in a global context and the many learning features and easy to use structure will engage and reassure each business statistic student.

Decision analysis for Management Judgement, fourth edition

Decision

Analysis

Paul Goodwin and George Wright

for

Management

Judgment

978-0-470-71439-3 • 468pp • Paperback • 2009

Decision Analysis for Management Judgement is unique in its breadth of coverage of decision analysis methods. It covers both the psychological problems that are associated Paul Goodwin & George Wright with unaided managerial decision making and the decision analysis methods designed to overcome them. It is presented and explained in a clear, straightforward manner without using mathematical notation. '0635) &%*5*0/

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: How people make decisions involving multiple objectives . CHAPTER 3: Decisions involving multiple objectives: SMART . CHAPTER 4: Decisions involving multiple objectives: Alternatives to SMART . CHAPTER 5: Introduction to probability . CHAPTER 6: Decision making under uncertainty . CHAPTER 7: Decision trees and influence diagrams . CHAPTER 8: Applying simulation to decision problems . CHAPTER 9: Revising judgments in the light of new information . CHAPTER 10: Heuristics and biases in probability assessment . CHAPTER 11: Methods for eliciting probabilities . CHAPTER 12: Risk and uncertainty management . CHAPTER 13: Decisions involving groups of individuals . CHAPTER 14: Resource allocation and negotiation problems . CHAPTER 15: Decision framing and cognitive inertia . CHAPTER 16: Scenario planning: an alternative way of dealing with uncertainty . CHAPTER 17: Alternative decision-support systems and conclusions

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

eConoMiCs

neW

The end of Progress: How Modern economics Has failed us

Author of International Bestseller The Dollar Crisis

The

New Depression THE BREAKDOWN OF THE PA P E R M O N E Y E C O N O M Y

The new Depression: The breakdown of the Paper Money economy

Graeme Maxton

Richard Duncan

978-0-470-82998-1 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2011

978-1-118-15779-4 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2012

Thought-provoking, lively and entertaining, The End of Progress: takes a cold, hard look at how modern economics has failed us and what we can do to get ourselves back on track. The End of Progress presents a chilling look at our current financial system along with a compelling argument for what we need to do to change.

The New Depression thoroughly explains why the global economy is teetering on the brink of falling into a deep and protracted depression, and how we can restore stabilRichard Duncan ity. Duncan introduces an important new analytical framework, The Quantity Theory of Credit, that covers all aspects of the calamity now unfolding: its causes, the rationale for the government’s policy response to the crisis, what is likely to happen next and how those developments will affect asset prices and investment portfolios. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: How Credit Slipped Its Leash . CHAPTER 2: The Global Money Glut . CHAPTER 3: Creditopia . CHAPTER 4: The Quantity Theory of Credit . CHAPTER 5: The Policy Response: Perpetuating the Boom . CHAPTER 6: Where Are We Now? CHAPTER 7: How It Plays Out . CHAPTER 8: Disaster Scenarios . CHAPTER 9: The Policy Options . CHAPTER 10: Fire and Ice, Inflation and Deflation .

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: It’s About You—You Are Responsible Too . CHAPTER 2: Too Much Choice, Too Little Restraint . CHAPTER 3: A Broken Financial System . CHAPTER 4: Squandering Our World . CHAPTER 5: The Damaging Power of Me . CHAPTER 6: Can You Read Kant? CHAPTER 7: Who Is in Charge? CHAPTER 8: China’s Rising Influence Will Not Help . CHAPTER 9: We Will Become Financially Poorer . CHAPTER 10: Our Way of Life Will Change . CHAPTER 11: We Will Become Less Healthy . CHAPTER 12: We Need to Diffuse the Threats of Conflict . CHAPTER 13: We Need to Change . CHAPTER 14: Other Options Need Debate . CHAPTER 15: You . You Have a Role Now Too .

neW

third edition

Macroeconomics, Third edition

essential Mathematics for economics and business

David Miles, Andrew Scott, and Francis Breedon

Teresa Bradley

978-1-1199-9571-5 • 622pp • Paperback • 2012

Macroeconomics: Understanding the Global Economy, 3rd Edition is to help students – U n d e r sta n d i n g t h e g lo ba l eco n o m y and indeed anyone – understand contemporary and past economic events that shape the world we live in, and at a sophisticated level. But it does so without focusing on mathematical techniques and models for their own sake. Theory is taken seriously – so much so that the authors go to pains to understand the key aspects of theories in a way that will not put people off before they see how theories are useful to analyse issues. The authors believe that theories are essential to better understand the world, thus the book includes a wealth of historic and current episodes and data to both see how theories can help interpret the world and also to judge their validity.

MacroeconoMics D av i D M i l e s • a n D r e w s c o t t • F r a n c i s B r e e D o n

MBA Catalogue 2013

essential mathematics

9781118358290 • 704pp • Paperback January 2013

Now 4 colour and includes an outstanding resources suite! Essential Mathematics for Economics and Business is established as one of the leading introductory textbooks for non maths specialists taking economics and business degrees. The fundamental mathematical concepts are explained as simply and briefly as possible, using a wide selection of worked examples, graphs and real-world applications. It combines a non-rigorous approach to mathematics with applications in economics and business. for economics and business

Teresa Bradley

Fourth Edition

enTRePReneuRsHiP

arter of 1965

ng. Executive ally different

the expense productivity,

luminating. isn’t merely

ve Denning, ent thinking. ur own peril.

and effective t text for any

DERSHIP

5.95 Canada

R adical

Management REINVENTING the WORKPL ACE

Radical Management

gement

T he

e productive

L E A DER’S G U I DE

L E A DER’S G U I DE to

f traditional different way

T he

STEPHEN

become an

DENNING

IONS

for the 21ST CENTURY

How to Inspire Continuous Innovation, Deep Job Satisfaction & Client Delight

STEPHEN

DENNING The Secret Language of Leadership The Leader’s Guide to Storytelling

The leader’s guide to Radical Management: L G to R adical Reinventing the Workplace for the 21st Century Management T he

E A DER’S

U I DE

Stephen Denning “This is a book about a radically different

way of managing. . . . It leads to workplaces that are more productive and more fun. These workplaces feel different.”

978-0-470-54868-4 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2010

—FROM THE INTRODUCTION

n this provocative book, Stephen Denning introduces the seven principles of radical management, along with more than seventy

Based on research conducted over several years with hundreds of high-performance teams, The Leader’s Guide to Radical Management simultaneously inspires high productivity, continuous innovation, deep job satisfaction and client delight. Awardwinning author Stephen Denning puts forward a fundamentally different approach to management, with seven inter-locking principles of continuous innovation. supporting practices. Radical management focuses the entire organization on the goal of constantly increasing the value of what it offers to its clients, not merely producing goods or services or making money for shareholders. The seven interlocking principles comprise a new mental model of management: focusing the entire organization on delighting clients; working in self-organizing teams; operating in short clientdriven iterations; delivering value to clients with

each iteration; fostering radical transparency; nurturing continuous self-improvement; and communicating interactively. The principles and practices simultaneously inspire high productivity, continuous innovation, and deep job satisfaction, and result in surpassing client expectations. Rather than offering a quick fix for today’s complex workplace problems, radical

TABLE OF CONTENTS: management rethinks the nature and purpose of management. It addresses the questions: “What is good? Who is it good for? Is it good

CHAPTER 1: Management Today . CHAPTER 2: A Brief History of Management . CHAPTER 3: What Radical Management Means . PART I: THE SEVEN PRINCIPLES CONTINUOUS INNOVATION. CHAPTER 4: Principle #1: Delighting Clients . CHAPTER 5: Principle #2: Self-Organizing Teams . Iterations . CHAPTER 7: Principle #4: Delivering Value to Clients in Each Iteration . CHAPTER 8: Principle #5: Radical Teams CHAPTER 6: Principle #3: Client-Driven Iterations Transparency . CHAPTER 9: Principle #6: Continuous Self-Improvement . CHAPTER 10: Principle #7: Interactive Communication . PART II: IMPLEMENTATION. CHAPTER 11: A River of Cascading Conversations . CHAPTER 12: Epilogue . Appendix: Summary of Radical Management Practices . AUTHOR OF AND

(Continued on back flap)

entrepreneurship, second edition William D. Bygrave, Babson College, and Andrew Zacharakis, Babson College 978-0-470-45037-6 • 632pp • Paperback • 2010

ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Entrepreneurship, Second Edition combines concepts and cases while presenting the latest theories of entrepreneurship. The concepts cover what “would-be entrepreneurs” need to know to start and grow their businesses. Additionally, the cases illustrate how real entrepreneurs have gone out and succeeded.

SECOND EDITION

TABLE OF CONTENTS: William Bygrave & Andrew Zacharakis

CHAPTER 1: The Power of Entrepreneurship . CHAPTER 2: The Entrepreneurial Process . CHAPTER 3: Opportunity Recognition, Shaping, and Reshaping . CHAPTER 4: Understanding Your Business Model and Developing Your Strategy . CHAPTER 5: Entrepreneurial Marketing . CHAPTER 6: Building the Founding Team . Team CHAPTER 7: The Business Planning Process . CHAPTER 8: Building Your Pro-Forma Financial Statements . CHAPTER 9: Financing Entrepreneurial Ventures Worldwide . CHAPTER 10: Raising Money for Starting and Growing Businesses . CHAPTER 11: Debt and Other Forms of Financing . CHAPTER 12: Legal and Tax Issues . CHAPTER 13: Intellectual Property . CHAPTER 14: Entrepreneurial Growth . CHAPTER 15: Social Entrepreneurship: An Overview .

Patterns of entrepreneurship Management, fourth edition Jack M. Kaplan, Columbia Business School, and Anthony Warren, Pennsylvania State University 978-1-118-35853-5 • 432pp • Paperback • 2012 3DWWHUQV RI

Entrepreneurship Management )2857+ (',7,21

Jack M. Kaplan Anthony C. Warren

Patterns of Entrepreneurship Management is the essential road-map for anyone interested in starting a new business. The Fourth Edition clearly and methodically outlines the key issues, current thinking, problems, and solutions students will face throughout the course of their careers including developing an idea and business plan, finding financing, maintaining high profits, going public, and everything in between. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: GETTING STARTED AS AN ENTREPRENEUR. PART II: MONEY SOURCES – FINDING AND MANAGING THE PROCESS. PART III: IMPLEMENTATION. PART IV: COMMUNICATING AND EXITING.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

enTRePReneuRsHiP

neW

innovation and entrepreneurship innovation and entrepreneurship, second edition SECOND EDITION

John Bessant and Joe Tidd 978-0-470-71144-6 • 604pp • Paperback • 2012

The book features contemporary applications such as services (public and private), innovation for sustainability, social entrepreneurship, innovation for development, and creating and capturing value from innovation and entrepreneurship. In this JOHN BESSANT AND JOE TIDD second edition, the authors develop an explicit process model of entrepreneurship with clearer links between innovation and entrepreneurship.The book also features an extensive collection of web-based materials, including: tools to support innovation and entrepreneurship, audio and video cases, solutions manual, testbank, additional case studies and image archive. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: ENTREPRENEURIAL GOALS AND CONTEXT. CHAPTER 1: The Innovation Imperative . CHAPTER 2: Social Entrepreneurship and Innovation . CHAPTER 3: Globalisation, Development and Sustainability . PART 2: RECOGNISING THE OPPORTUNITY. CHAPTER 4: Individual and Organisational Characteristics . CHAPTER 5: Sources of Innovation . CHAPTER 6: Searching for Opportunities . PART 3: FINDING THE RESOURCES. CHAPTER 7: Building the Case . CHAPTER 8: Exploiting Networks . PART 4: DEVELOPING THE VENTURE. CHAPTER 9: Developing New Products and Services . CHAPTER 10: Creating New Ventures . PART 5: CREATING VALUE. CHAPTER 11: Exploiting Knowledge and Intellectual Property . CHAPTER 12: Creating Value and Growing Ventures . CHAPTER 13: Learning to Manage Innovation .

neW

enterprise in action: a guide To entrepreneurship Peter Lawrence, Loughborough University 978-1-119-94528-4 • 320pp • Paperback • 2013

Based on a study of 80 companies, this welcome new guide to the world of entrepreneurship offers invaluable lessons for the student and the practical entrepreneur alike. For the student it breathes fresh life into the standard curriculum topics, analyzing them in the context of a wide range of current real-world examples. For business practitioners it shows how practical success is influenced by factors such as industry dynamics, entry barriers, reconfiguration, and core competence. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Patterns in Entrepreneurial, Opportunity, Something New, Reconfiguration, Riding Trends, Biography and Capability, Take Off to Cruising Altitude, Entry Barriers, A New Life, A Longer Life, Industry Dynamics, Patterns of Development, Chain Reactions.

MBA Catalogue 2013

R T EV S HE E L R

finanCe

Reversing the slide: a strategic guide to Turnarounds and Corporate Renewal

O O U IC G R R E P ND UI N O D R S A E E W A T A TE ND O L

978-0-470-93324-4 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2011

Pascal Quiry, Yann Le Fur, Antonio Salvi, Maurizio Dallochio, and Pierre Vernimmen

James B . Shein, Northwestern’s Kellogg School of Management

Drawn from the author’s decades of experience advising, purchasing, and reviving distressed companies across industries, geographies, and sizes, Reversing the Slide is designed to help executives, managers, and employees revitalize downtrodden companies. A

Corporate finance: Theory and Practice, Third edition

978-1-1199-7558-8 • 1024pp • Hardcover • 2011

Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice covers the theory and practice of Corporate Finance from a truly European perspective. The Third Edition shows how to use financial theory to solve practical problems and is written for students of corporate finance and financial analysis and practising corporate financiers.

financial economics Dr. Frank J. Fabozzi, CFA, Yale University, Edwin H. Neave, and Guofu Zhou 978-0-470-59620-3 • 652pp • Hardcover • 2011

Introduction to Financial Economics presents an introduction to basic financial ideas through a strong grounding in microeconomic theory. This calculus based text explores the theoretical framework for analyzing the decisions by individuals and managers of firms, an area which is common to both the financial economics and microeconomics. It also explores the interplay of these decisions on the prices of financial assets.

Financial Economics

.ZIVS 2 .IJWbbQ d -L_QV 0 6MI^M d /]WN] BPW]

applied Corporate finance, Third edition APPLIED CORPORATE FINANCE 3RD EDITION

Aswath Damodaran, Stern School of Business, New York University 978-0-470-38464-0 • 752pp • Paperback • 2010

Unlike other books in the field, Applied Corporate Finance provides finance professionals with practical and succinct advice on how to do corporate finance rather than debate theory. The Third Edition updates the three case studies integrated throughout the book to reflect the latest information. A S W A T H

D A M O D A R A N

neW

Multinational finance: evaluating opportunities, Costs, and Risks of operations, fifth edition Kirt C. Butler, Michigan State University 978-1-1182-7012-7 • 681pp • Paperback October 2012

Multinational Finance, Fifth Edition assumes the viewpoint of the financial manager of a multinational corporation with investment or financial operations in more than one country. This book provides a framework for evaluating the many opportunities, costs, and risks of multinational operations in a manner that allows readers to see beyond the math and terminology surrounding this field to realize the general principles of multinational financial management. If you’re looking for the best way to gain a firm understanding of multinational finance, look no further than the fifth edition of this classic text.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

FOUNDATIONS OF BANKING RISK

AN OVERVIEW OF BANKING, BANKING RISKS AND RISK-BASED BANKING REGULATION

RICHARD APOSTOLIK

foundations of banking Risk: an overview of banking, banking Risks, and Riskbased banking Regulation

investment banking: Valuation, leveraged buyouts, and Mergers and acquisitions

GARP (Global Association of Risk Professionals)

Joshua Rosenbaum, Joshua Pearl, and Joseph R. Perella (Foreword by)

978-0-470-44219-7 • 264pp • Paperback • 2009

978-0-470-44220-3 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2009

CHRISTOPHER DONOHUE

GARP’s Foundations of Banking Risk and Regulation introduces risk professionals to the advanced components and terminology in banking risk and regulation globally. It helps them develop an understanding of the methods for the measurement and management of credit risk and operational risk, and the regulation of minimum capital requirements. The book is GARP’s required text used by risk professionals looking to obtain their International Certification in Banking Risk and Regulation. PETER WENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Functions and Forms of Banking . CHAPTER 2: Managing Banks . CHAPTER 3: Banking Regulation . CHAPTER 4: Credit Risk . CHAPTER 5: The Credit Process and Credit Risk Management . CHAPTER 6: Market Risk . CHAPTER 7: Operational Risk . CHAPTER 8: Regulatory Capital and Supervision Under Basel II .

DERIVATIVES Pricing and Risk Management

financial Derivatives: Pricing and Risk Management Robert Kolb (Editor), Loyola University, and James A. Overdahl (Editor) 978-0-470-49910-8 • 600pp • Hardcover • 2009

Financial Derivatives provides essential insights on the various aspects of financial derivatives. An invaluable guide, the text offers a broad overview of the different types of derivatives-futures, options, swaps, and Robert W. Kolb, James A. Overdahl, Editors structured products-while focusing on the principles that determine market prices. This resource also provides a thorough introduction to financial derivatives and their importance to risk management in a corporate setting. KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: OVERVIEW OF FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES. PART II: TYPES OF FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES. PART III: THE STRUCTURE OF DERIVATIVES MARKETS AND INSTITUTIONS. PART IV: PRICING OF DERIVATIVES: ESSENTIAL CONCEPTS. PART V: ADVANCED PRICING TECHNIQUES. PART VI: USING FINANCIAL DERIVATIVES.

MBA Catalogue 2013

Investment Banking: Valuation, Leveraged Buyouts, and Mergers & Acquisitions is a highly accessible and authoritative book that focuses on the primary valuation methodologies currently used on Wall Street - comparable companies, precedent transactions, DCF, and LBO analysis. Using a step-by-step how-to approach for each methodology, the authors build a chronological knowledge base and define key terms, financial concepts, and processes throughout the book. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: VALUATION. CHAPTER 1: Comparable Companies Analysis . CHAPTER 2: Precedent Transactions Analysis . CHAPTER 3: Discounted Cash Flow Analysis . PART II: LEVERAGED BUYOUTS. CHAPTER 4: Leveraged Buyouts . CHAPTER 5: LBO Analysis . PART III: MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS. CHAPTER 6: M&A Sale Process .

finanCe

financial analysis and Modeling using excel and Vba, second edition Chandan Sengupta, Fordham University

ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT

Today’s Leading Research and Best Practices for Tomorrow’s Executives

enterprise Risk Management: Today’s leading Research and best Practices for Tomorrow’s executives John Fraser (Editor), and Betty Simkins (Editor), Oklahoma State University

978-0-470-27560-3 • 793pp • Paperback • 2009

978-0-470-49908-5 • 600pp • Hardcover • 2010

Financial Analysis and Modeling Using Excel and VBA, Second Edition presents a comprehensive approach to analyzing financial problems and developing simple to sophisticated financial models in all major areas of finance using Excel 2007 and VBA (as well as earlier versions of both). This expanded and fully updated guide reviews all the necessary financial theory and concepts, and walks you through a wide range of real-world financial problems and models that you can learn from, use for practice, and easily adapt for work and classroom use.

Enterprise Risk Management unlocks the incredible potential of enterprise risk manJohn Fraser and Betty J. Simkins, agement. Through in-depth insights into KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE what practitioners of this evolving business practice are actually doing, as well as anticipating what needs to be taught on this topic, John Fraser and Betty Simkins have sought out the leading experts in this field to clearly explain what enterprise risk management is and how you can teach, learn and implement these leading practices within the context of business activities.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: EXCEL FOR FINANCIAL ANALYSIS AND MODELING. PART II: FINANCIAL MODELING USING EXCEL. PART III: VBA FOR FINANCIAL MODELING. PART IV: FINANCIAL MODELING USING VBA.

PART I: OVERVIEW. PART II: ERM MANAGEMENT, CULTURE AND CONTROL. PART III: ERM TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES. PART IV: TYPES OF RISK. PART V: SURVEY EVIDENCE AND ACADEMIC RESEARCH. PART VI: SPECIAL TOPICS AND CASE STUDIES.

Editors

Essential Perspectives

equity asset Valuation, second edition John D. Stowe, PhD, CFA, University of Missouri-Columbia, Jerald E. Pinto, CFA, CFA Institute, Elaine Henry, CFA, CFA Institute, Thomas R. Robinson, CFA, CFA Institute, and Abby Cohen, CFA (Foreword by)

I NV EST M E NT

S E R I ES

EQUITY ASSET VALUATION

WORKBOOK S E C O N D

E D I T I O N

978-0-470-57143-9 • 464pp • Hardcover • 2010

equity asset Valuation Workbook, second edition Jerald E. Pinto, CFA, CFA Institute, Elaine Henry, PhD, CFA, University of Miami, Thomas R. Robinson, CFA, CFA Institute, and John D. Stowe, CFA, CFA Institute 978-0-470-39521-9 • 128pp • Paperback • 2010

Unlike alternative works in this field, Equity Asset Valuation, Second Edition clearly integrates finance and accounting concepts into the discussion-providing the evenness of subject matter treatment, consistency of notation, and continuity of topic coverage that is so critical to the learning process. The authors provide readers with detailed learning outcome statements at the outset, illustrative in-chapter problems with solutions, and extensive end-of-chapter questions and problems with complete solutions.

This engaging and accessible companion workbook for the Second Edition of Equity Asset Valuation offers a wealth of practical information and exercises that will further enhance students’ understanding of this discipline. The Workbook integrates both accounting and finance concepts to deliver a collection of valuation models, as well as challenging readers to determine which models are most appropriate for specific companies and situations.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Equity Valuation: Applications and Processes . CHAPTER 2: Return Concepts . CHAPTER 3: Discount ed Dividend Valuation . CHAPTER 4: Free Cash Flow Valuation . CHAPTER 5: Residual Income Valuation . CHAPTER 6: MarketBased Valuation: Price and Enterprise Value Multiples . CHAPTER 7: Private Company Valuation .

PART I: LEARNING OUTCOMES, SUMMARY OVERVIEW, AND PROBLEMS. PART II: SOLUTIONS.

Jerald E. Pinto, CFA/Elaine Henry, CFA/Thomas R. Robinson, CFA/John B. Stowe, CFA

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

Credit Risk

Measurement In and Out of the Financial Crisis New Approaches to Value at Risk and Other Paradigms THIRD EDITION

Credit Risk Measurement in and out of the financial Crisis: new approaches to Value at Risk and other Paradigms, Third edition Dr. Anthony Saunders, New York University, and Dr. Linda Allen, Baruch College 978-0-470-47834-9 • 380pp • Hardcover • 2010

Credit Risk Management In and Out of the Financial Crisis dissects the 2007-2008 Credit Crisis and provide solutions for professionals looking to better manage risk through modeling and new technology. The book is completely updated to reflect new regulation stemming from the crisis. The authors provide everything from the implications of new regulation to how the new rules will change everyday activity in the finance industry. ANTHONY SAUNDERS LINDA ALLEN

SECOND EDITION

MODELING RISK+DVD

Applying Monte Carlo Risk Simulation, Strategic Real Options, Stochastic Forecasting, and Portfolio Optimization

Modeling Risk: applying Monte Carlo Risk simulation, strategic Real options, stochastic forecasting, and Portfolio optimization, + DVD, second edition Johnathan Mun 978-0-470-59221-2 • 1024pp • Hardcover • 2010

DVD Contains: ROV Risk Simulator and Real Options SLS trial software plus case studies, models, and training videos

Filled with in-depth insights and practical advice, this reliable resource covers all of Johnathan Mun the essential tools and techniques that risk managers need to successfully conduct risk analysis. Modeling Risk, Second Edition provides students with a comprehensive guide on such key concepts as risk and return, the fundamentals of model building, Monte Carlo simulation, forecasting, time-series and regression analysis, optimization, real options, and more.

The endowment Model of investing: Return, Risk, and Diversification

TheEndowment Model of Investing Return, Risk, and Diversification

Martin L. Leibowitz MORGAN STANLEY

Anthony Bova MORGAN STANLEY

P. Brett Hammond TIAA-CREF ASSET MANAGEMENT

method of investing.

VENTURE CAPITAL

Investment Strategies, Structures, and Policies

Martin L. Leibowitz, Anthony Bova, and P. Brett Hammond 978-0-470-48176-9 • 334pp • Hardcover • 2010

The Endowment Model of Investing takes a cutting-edge look at the endowment model with customary research sophistication and attention to detail. Throughout the book, they examine how the model provides truly outstanding real returns, while keeping a close eye on the risks associated with this

Venture Capital: investment strategies, structures, and Policies Douglas Cumming (Editor), PhD, CFA, Schulich School of Business, York University. 978-0-470-49914-6 • 592pp • Hardcover • 2010

An essential guide, Venture Capital is a collection of the latest research, theory, Douglas Cumming, Editor and practice on venture capital strategies, structures, and policies from industry experts. Issues addressed include sources of capital-such as angel investment, corporate funds, and government fundsfinancial contracts and monitoring, and the efficiency implications of VC investment, to name a few. KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

FINANCE ETHICS

Critical Issues in Financial Theory and Practice

finance ethics: Critical issues in Theory and Practice John R. Boatright, Loyola University 978-0-470-49916-0 • 592pp • Hardcover • 2010

Corporate Risk Management, second edition Tony Merna, Faisal F. Al-Thani, Anadarko Petroleum Corporation 978-0-470-51833-5 • 440pp • Hardcover • 2008

Fully updated from the first edition, this book compares and contrasts tools and techniques used in risk management, showing readers how to implement a generic risk management mechanism. Including up-to-date guidance on new regulations in corporate governance, including updates on the Turnbull and Sarbanes Oxley acts, the Higgs report and European legislation, the book presents a fully updated and expanded model framework for analysing risk at corporate, strategic business and project levels. 20

MBA Catalogue 2013

A groundbreaking exploration of the critical ethic al issues in financial theory and practice, Finance Ethics skillfully explains the need for ethics in the personal conduct of finance professionals and the operation of fiJohn R. Boatright, Editor nancial markets and institutions. Beginning with examples of scandals that have shaken public confidence over history, this volume - part of the Kolb Series in Finance - explains the need for ethics given the conduct of finance professionals while they interact in the complex financial markets. KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: OVERVIEW. PART II: FINANCE THEORY. PART III: FINANCIAL MARKETS. PART IV: FINANCIAL SERVICES. PART V: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT.

finanCe

T H E

B E S T S E L L I N G

C O R P O R A T E

G U I D E

T O

VA L U A T I O N

VALUAT I O N U N I V E RS IT Y

E D IT IO N

Mea suring and Ma na ging the Va l u e of C o m p a n i e s and

Updated Rev ised

New Insig with Business hts into Strategy and Inve stor Behavior

Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies, university edition, fifth edition McKinsey & Company Inc., Tim Koller, Marc Goedhart, and David Wessels 978-0-470-42470-4 • 847pp • Paperback • 2010

University Edition of Valuation, offers students and professors the most comprehensive university edition the series has seen yet. In addition to all of the revisions of the cloth edition, the university edition will include end of chapter questions. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: FOUNDATIONS OF VALUE. CHAPTER 1: WhyValueValue? CHAPTER 2: Fundamental Principles of Value Creation . CHAPTER 3: The Expectations Treadmill . CHAPTER 4: Return on Invested Capital . CHAPTER 5: Growth . PART II: TWO CORE VALUATION TECHNIQUES. McK I NSE Y & C OM PA N Y CHAPTER 6: Frameworks for Valuation . CHAPTER 7: Reorganizing the Financial Statements . CHAPTER 8: Analyzing Performance and Competitive Position . CHAPTER 9: Forecasting Performance . CHAPTER 10: Estimating Continuing Value . CHAPTER 11: Estimating the Cost of Capital . CHAPTER 12: Moving from Enterprise Value to Value per Share . CHAPTER 13: Calculating and Interpreting Results . CHAPTER 14: Using Multiples to Triangulate Results . PART III: INTRINSIC VALUE AND THE STOCK MARKET. CHAPTER 15: Market Value Tracks Return on Invested Capital and Growth . CHAPTER 16: Markets Value Substance, Not Form . CHAPTER 17: Emotions and Mispricing in the Market . CHAPTER 18: Investors and Managers in Efficient Markets . PART IV: MANAGING FOR VALUE. CHAPTER 19: Corporate Portfolio Strategy . CHAPTER 20: Performance Management . CHAPTER 21: Mergers and Acquisitions . CHAPTER 22: Creating Value through Divestitures . CHAPTER 23: Capital Structure . CHAPTER 24: Investor Communications . PART V: ADVANCED VALUATION ISSUES. CHAPTER 25: Taxes . CHAPTER 26: Nonoperating Expenses, One-Time Charges, Reserves, and Provisions . CHAPTER 27: Leases, Pen sions, and Other Obligations . CHAPTER 28: Capitalized Expenses . CHAPTER 29: Inflation . CHAPTER 30: Foreign Currency . CHAPTER 31: Case Study: Heineken . PART VI: SPECIAL SITUATIONS. CHAPTER 32: Valuing Flexibility . CHAPTER 33: Valuation in Emerging Markets . CHAPTER 34: Valuing High-Growth Companies . CHAPTER 35: Valuing Cyclical Companies . CHAPTER 36: Valuing Banks . Appendix A: Economic Profit and the Key Value Driver Formula . Appendix B: Discounted Economic Profit Equals Discounted Free Cash Flow . Appendix C: Derivation of Free Cash Flow,Weighted Average Cost of Capital, and Adjusted Present Value . Appendix D: Levering and Unlevering the Cost of Equity . Appendix E: Leverage and the Price-to-Earnings Multiple . T I M K O L L E R • M A R C G O E D H A R T • D AV I D W E S S E L S

C O M P A N I O N

T O

T H E

C O R P O R A T E

B E S T S E L L I N G

G U I D E

T O

VA L U A T I O N Fully Rev ised with New Content and Feature s

VALUAT I ON WO R K B OO K Step-by-Step Exercises a n d Te s t s t o H e l p Yo u M a s t e r Va l u a t i o n

T I M K O L L E R • M A R C G O E D H A R T • D AV I D W E S S E L S • E R I K B E N R U D

McK I NSE Y & C OM PA N Y

Bond

Evaluation, Selection and Management

Valuation Workbook: step-by-step exercises and Tests to Help You Master Valuation, fifth edition McKinsey & Company Inc., Dr . Erik Benrud, CFA, FRM 978-0-470-42464-3 • 264pp • Paperback • 2011

The Workbook to Valuation, complements the comprehensive knowledge found in the cloth edition. Along with a complete answer key, the Fifth Edition also covers such essentials as what drives value creation, value metrics, M&A and joint ventures, valuation frameworks, how to analyze historical information, estimating the cost of capital and continuing value, forecasting performance, and calculating results. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: QUESTIONS. PART II: ANSWERS.

bond evaluation, selection, and Management, + Website, second edition R. Stafford Johnson, Williams College of Business, Xavier University 978-0-470-47835-6 • 881pp • Hardcover • 2010

The essential guide to the bonds money market, Bond Evaluation, Selection, and ManSECOND EDITION agement combines fundamental and advanced topics in the field, offering comprehensive R. Stafford Johnson coverage of bond and debt management. Fully updated and revised, the Second Edition focuses on essential concepts, models, and numerical examples, providprovid ing all of the tools needed to effectively select, evaluate, and manage bonds. Plus Web-Based Software

FIFTH EDITION

MERGERS,

ACQUISITIONS, AND

CORPORATE

RESTRUCTURINGS PAT R I C K A . G A U G H A N

Mergers, acquisitions, and Corporate Restructurings, fifth edition Dr. Patrick A. Gaughan 978-0-470-56196-6 • 672pp • Hardcover • 2010

Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Restructurings, Fifth Edition carefully analyzes the strategies and motives that inspire M&As, the laws and rules that govern the field, as well as the offensive and defensive techniques of hostile acquisitions.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: BOND EVALUATION. PART II: DEBT MARKETS. PART III: BOND STRATEGIES AND THE EVALUATION OF BONDS WITH EMBEDDED OPTIONS. PART IV: DEBT DERIVATIVES: FUTURES AND OPTIONS. PART V: SWAPS.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

REGULATING

the dodd-frank act and The NEW ARCHITECTURE of global finance

Regulating Wall street: The Dodd-frank act and the new architecture of global finance

MYRON SCHOLES,

A Synthesis of Theory, Research, and Practice

H . Kent Baker (Editor), the Kogod School of Business at American University, and Ronald Anderson (Editor), the Kogod School of Business at American University

978-0-470-76877-8 • 573pp • Hardcover • 2010

978-0-470-49913-9 • 676pp • Hardcover • 2010

19 9 7 N O B E L P R I Z E L A U R E A T E I N E C O N O M I C S

V IRAL V. A CHARYA l T HOMAS F. C OOLEY l M ATTHEW P. R ICHARDSON l I NGO W ALTER EDITORS

The definitive guide to the theory, research, and practice of one of Wall Street’s most important topics, Corporate Governance: A Synthesis of Theory, Research, and Practice brings with it an esteemed group of contributors including professional and academic practitioners, as well as researchers. H. Kent Baker, Ronald Anderson, Editors KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

neW

governance, Risk Management, financial Regulation and Compliance An Integrated Approach

Too many existing texts are heavily focussed on the nuances of specific, mainly quantitative, tools and techniques. While discussing regulation and governance, other books expound theories (such as a blind belief in the efficiency of markets or self-regulation) that have now been broadly discredited by the realities of the financial crisis. In this book, practitioner and academic Deepa Govindarajan provides anadvanced real-world guide to understanding and tackling the strategic, risk, regulatory and compliance challenges of the financial sector.

investment ethics

978-0-470-49911-5 • 757pp • Hardcover • 2010

This reliable resource provides a comprehensive view of behavioral finance and its psychological foundations, as well as its applications to finance. Comprising contributed chapters written by distinguished authors from some of the most influential firms and universities in the world, Behavioral Finance provides a synthesis of the most essential elements of this discipline, including psychological concepts and behavioral biases, the behavioral aspects of asset pricing, asset allocation, and market prices, as well as investor behavior, corporate managerial behavior, and social influences.

EIGHTH EDITION

Sarah Peck 978-0-470-43453-6 • 304pp • Paperback • 2010

Sarah W. Peck’s Investment Ethics is an applied and uniquely focused textbook that provides students with the tools, examples, and exercises they need to understand ethical concepts and consequences in the practice of finance; especially regarding investments. This text serves not only as a key tool in the classroom, but also a longstanding guide for examining the ethical practices of companies and organizations. S A R A H

H . Kent Baker (Editor), the Kogod School of Business at American University, and John R . Nofsinger (Editor), Washington State University

Deepa Govindarajan, University of Reading

DEEPA GOVINDARAJAN

behavioral finance: investors, Corporations, and Markets

governance, Risk Management, financial Regulation and Compliance: an integrated approach

978-1-118-39136-5 • 224pp • Hardcover June 2013

INVESTMENT

P E C K

MBA Catalogue 2013

Corporate governance: a synthesis of Theory, Research, and Practice

Viral V. Acharya, Thomas F. Cooley, New York University, Matthew P. Richardson, New York University, Ingo Walter, and Myron Scholes (Foreword by)

In Regulating Wall Street: The New Architecture of Global Finance, an impressive group of the Stern School’s top authorities on finance combine their expertise in capital markets, risk management, banking, and derivatives to assess the strengths and weaknesses of new regulations in response to the recent global financial crisis. FO REWO RD BY

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis

Modern Portfolio Theory and investment analysis, eighth edition Edwin Elton 978-0-470-50584-7 • 752pp • Paperback • 2010

A comprehensive guide to asset allocation, portfolio optimization, asset pricing models, and securities analysis, with an emphasis on practical, empirical methodology and | | technique. The 8th edition of Modern International Student Version Portfolio Theory has been updated with new developments in behavioral finance and choice theory, recent results in asset pricing models, new research on hedge funds and mutual funds, and novel approaches to optimization, including the liability framework and simulation methods for investment decision making and risk analysis. Edwin J. Elton

Stephen J. Brown

Martin J. Grube

William N. Goetzmann

finanCe

financial Risk Manager Handbook + Test bank: fRM Part i / Part ii, sixth edition

investments Workbook: Principles of Portfolio and INVESTMENTS equity analysis (Cfa institute investment series) WORKBOOK Michael G. McMillan, PhD, CFA, CPA, I NV ESTM ENT

S ER I ES

principles of portfolio and equity analysis

Philippe Jorion, University of California, and GARP (Global Association of Risk Professionals)

CFA Institute, Jerald E. Pinto, PhD, CFA, CFA Institute, Wendy Pirie, CFA, CFA Institute, and Gerhard Van de Venter, CFA, CFA Institute

978-0-470-90401-5 • 800pp • Hardcover • 2011

The core reference text for those taking GARP’s FRM® Exam and other risk professionals looking to stay current on best practices in risk management, Financial Risk Manager Handbook is filled with in-depth insights and practical advice. Presented in a clear and consistent fashion, this completely updated Sixth Edition mirrors recent updates to the new two-level Financial Risk Manager (FRM) exam, and is fully supported by GARP as the trusted way to prepare for the rigorous and renowned FRM certification.

Investments: Principles of Portfolio and Equity Analysis provides the broad-based knowledge professionals and students of the markets need to manage money and maximize return. This companion Workbook, also edited by experts from the CFA Institute, allows busy professionals to gain a stronger understanding of core investment topics.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: FOUNDATIONS OF RISK MANAGEMENT. II: QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS. PART III: FINANCIAL MARKETS AND PRODUCTS. PART IV: VALUATION AND RISK MODELS. PART V: MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT. PART VI: CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT. PART VII: OPERATIONAL AND INTEGRATED RISK MANAGEMENT. PART VIII: INVESTMENT RISK MANAGEMENT.

PART I: LEARNING OUTCOMES, SUMMARY OVERVIEW, AND PROBLEMS. CHAPTER 1: Market Organization and Structure . CHAPTER 2: Security Market Indices . CHAPTER 3: Market Efficiency . CHAPTER 4: Portfolio Management: An Overview . CHAPTER 5: Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I . CHAPTER 6: Portfolio Risk and Return: PART II. CHAPTER 7: Basics of Portfolio Planning and Construction . CHAPTER 8: Overview of Equity Securities . CHAPTER 9: Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis . CHAPTER 10: Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools . CHAPTER 11: Equity Market Valuation . CHAPTER 12: Technical Analysis . PART II: SOLUTIONS. CHAPTER 1: Market Organization and Structure . CHAPTER 2: Security Market Indices . CHAPTER 3: Market Efficiency . CHAPTER 4: Portfolio Management: An Overview . CHAPTER 5: Portfolio Risk and Return: PART III. CHAPTER 6: Portfolio Risk and Return: Part II . CHAPTER 7: Basics of Portfolio Planning and Construction . CHAPTER 8: Overview of Equity Securities . CHAPTER 9: Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis . CHAPTER 10: Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools . CHAPTER 11: Equity Market Valuation . CHAPTER 12: Technical Analysis .

THE FRANK J. FABOZZI SERIES

FINANCIAL MODELS WITH ´ PROCESSES LEVY AND VOLATILITY CLUSTERING

financial Models with levy Processes and Volatility Clustering Svetlozar T. Rachev, University of California, Young Shin Kim, Michele L. Bianchi and Frank J. Fabozzi, CFA, Yale University

978-0-470-91582-0 • 134pp • Paperback • 2011 Michael G. McMillan, CFA/ Jerald E. Pinto, CFA/ Wendy L. Pirie, CFA/ Gerhard Van de Venter, CFA

978-0-470-48235-3 • 392pp • Hardcover • 2011

An in-depth guide to understanding probability distributions and financial modeling for the purposes of investment management, Financial Models with Lévy Processes and Volatility Clustering provides a framework to model the behavior of stock returns in both a univariate and a multivariate setting, providing you with practical applications to option pricing and portfolio management. The expert author team also explains the reasons for working with non-normal distribution in financial modeling and the best methodologies for employing it.

fundamentals of actuarial Mathematics, second edition

SVETZOLAR T. RACHEV, YOUNG SHIM KIM, MICHELE LEONARDO BIANCHI, FRANK J. FABOZZI

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Probability distributions . CHAPTER 3: Stable and tempered stable distributions . CHAPTER 4: Stochastic Processes in Continuous Time . CHAPTER 5: Conditional Expectation and Change of Measure . CHAPTER 6: Exponential Lévy Models . CHAPTER 7: Option Pricing in Exponential Lévy Models . CHAPTER 8: Simulation . CHAPTER 9: Multi-Tail t-distribution . CHAPTER 10: Non-Gaussian portfolio allocation . CHAPTER 11: Normal GARCH models . CHAPTER 12: Smoothly truncated stable GARCH models . CHAPTER 13: Infinitely divisible GARCH models . CHAPTER 14: Option Pricing with Monte Carlo Methods . CHAPTER 15: American Option Pricing with Monte Carlo Methods .

Fundamentals of Actuarial Mathematics Second Edition S. David Promislow

S . David Promislow, York University, Toronto, Canada 978-0-470-68411-5 • 466pp • Hardcover • 2011

An ideal text for students planning for a professional career as actuaries, Fundamentals of Actuarial Mathematics provides a comprehensive introduction to actuarial mathematics, covering both deterministic and stochastic models of life contingencies, as well as more advanced topics such as risk theory, credibility theory and multi-state models. The Second Edition includes additional material on credibility theory, continuous time multi-state models, more complex types of contingent insurances, flexible contracts such as universal life, the risk measures VaR and TVaR. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE DETERMINISTIC MODEL. PART II: THE STOCHASTIC MODEL. PART III: RISK THEORY.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

SOVEREIGN DEBT

sovereign Debt: from safety to Default Robert W. Kolb (Editor), Loyola University

FINANCIAL CONTAGION The Viral Threat to the Wealth of Nations

Loyola University

978-0-470-92239-2 • 449pp • Hardcover • 2011

978-0-470-92238-5 • 410pp • Hardcover • 2011

As sovereign debt grows internationally at a terrifying rate, understanding this dilemma is now more important than ever, that’s why Robert Kolb compiled Sovereign Debt. This Robert W. Kolb, Editor essential guide offers a better perspective on KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE the essential issues surrounding sovereign debt and default through discussions of national defaults, systemic risk, associated costs, and much more.

Financial Contagion provides the latest insights on financial contagion and how both nations and investors can effectively Robert W. Kolb, Editor deal with it. Today’s leading practitioners, academics, and researchers provide contributions, discussing the dangers of financial contagion - the risks, the costs, the consequences.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: THE POLITICAL ECONOMY OF SOVEREIGN DEBT. PART II: MAKING SOVEREIGN DEBT WORK. PART III: SOVEREIGN DEFAULTS, RESTRUCTURINGS, AND THE RESUMPTION OF BORROWING. PART IV: LEGAL AND CONTRACTUAL DIMENSIONS OF RESTRUCTURINGS AND DEFAULTS. PART V: HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES. PART VI: SOVEREIGN DEBT IN EMERGING MARKETS. PART VII: SOVEREIGN DEBT AND FINANCIAL CRISES.

PART I: CONTAGION: THEORY AND IDENTIFICATION. PART II: CONTAGION AND THE ASIAN FINANCIAL CRISIS. PART III: CONTAGION AND EMERGING MARKETS. PART IV: CONTAGION IN THE FINANCIAL CRISIS OF 2007–2009. PART V: REGIONAL CONTAGION. PART VI: CONTAGION WITHIN AN ECONOMY.

Essential Perspectives

Portfolio Design

Richard C. Marston 978-0-470-93123-3 • 368pp • Hardcover • 2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Asset Allocation . CHAPTER 2: Long-Run Returns on Stocks and Bonds . CHAPTER 3: Small-Cap Stocks . CHAPTER 4: Value and Growth Investing . CHAPTER 5: Foreign Stocks . CHAPTER 6: Emerging Markets . CHAPTER 7: Bonds . CHAPTER 8: Strategic Asset Allocation . CHAPTER 9: Hedge Funds . CHAPTER 10: Venture Capital and Private Equity . CHAPTER 11: Real Assets—Real Estate . CHAPTER 12: Real Assets—Commodities . CHAPTER 13: Asset Allocation with Alternative Investments . CHAPTER 14: Investing and Spending by Foundations . CHAPTER 15: Investing and Spending in Retirement . CHAPTER 16: The Discipline of Asset Allocation—Rebalancing .

MBA Catalogue 2013

KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

global securities Markets: navigating the World’s exchanges and oTC Markets

Portfolio Design: a Modern approach to asset allocation

An in-depth look at the role of asset allocation in today’s investment environment, A Modern Approach to Asset Allocation Portfolio Design shows you how to jump back into the market with the reminder that the key to investing is to do it for the longRichard Marston run. This guide examines how returns on stocks, bonds, international equities, hedge funds, real estate, commodities, and the like all increase, and are of added value to a portfolio when they are strategically allocated.

financial Contagion: The Viral Threat to the Wealth of nations Robert W. Kolb (Editor),

GLOBAL SECURITIES MARKETS

George W. Arnett 978-1-118-02771-4 • 192pp • Hardcover • 2011

Inve sting in the global securities markets poses challenges far beyond simply choosing a security that’s likely to provide a decent Navigating The World’s return. Global Securities Markets provides Exchanges and OTC Markets a framework for navigating through these highly diverse and complex markets, coverGEORGE W. ARNETT III ing all the basics of global investing. Packed with tables and listings to help investors of all types easily locate the information they need to make the right choices, the book is an indispensable index for working the securities markets to their fullest extent. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Fundamental Concepts . CHAPTER 2: The Growth of Exchanges around the Globe and the Development of Screen Based Trading . CHAPTER 3: The Paper Crunch and Development of New Institutions . CHAPTER 4: Central Counterparties and Depositories . CHAPTER 5: Major Worldwide Exchanges and their Associated Depositories, and Practical Tips on Execution, Clearance, and Custody in Various Regions Around the Globe . CHAPTER 6: Legal Framework of the World Markets . CHAPTER 7: Transfer of Securities and Perfection of Collateral . CHAPTER 8: Margin . CHAPTER 9: Short Selling and Stock Loans . CHAPTER 10: Derivatives . CHAPTER 11: Prime Brokerage . CHAPTER 12: Managed Accounts . CHAPTER 13: International Compliance . CHAPTER 14: Money Laundering . CHAPTER 15: SIPC and Other Investment Protection Schemes around the World . CHAPTER 16: Risk Management .

finanCe

S I D D H A R T H A

J H A

INTEREST R ATE

MARKETS

interest Rate Markets: a Practical approach to fixed income Siddhartha Jha 978-0-470-93220-9 • 368pp • Hardcover • 2011

Interest Rate Markets helps students to understand the structural nature of the rates markets and to develop a framework for thinking about these markets intuitively, rather than focusing on mathematical models. The book discusses the typical quantitative tools used to analyze rates markets such as regression, looks at the range of fixed income markets on the cash side, analyzes interest rate movements, and delves into derivatives side of the business. PR ACTICA L A PPROACH TO

FIXED INCOME

+ WEBSITE

Features a companion website with step-by-step calculations of the trading strategies described in the book

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Tools of the Trade . CHAPTER 2: Introduction to Bonds . CHAPTER 3: Overview of Fixed Income Markets . CHAPTER 4: Introduction to Futures Markets . CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Swaps . CHAPTER 6: Understanding Drivers of Interest Rates . CHAPTER 7: Carry and Relative Value Trades . CHAPTER 8: Hedging Risks in Interest Rate Products . CHAPTER 9: Trading Swap Spreads . CHAPTER 10: Interest Rate Options and Trading Volatility . CHAPTER 11: Treasury futures basis and rolls . CHAPTER 12: Conditional Trades .

CAPITAL STRUCTURE and CORPORATE FINANCING DECISIONS Theory, Evidence, and Practice

Capital structure and Corporate financing Decisions: Theory, evidence, and Practice H. Kent Baker, Kogod School of Business at American University, and Gerald S. Martin, Kogod School of Business at American University

Implementing models of financial derivatives

Object Orientated Applications with VBA

A comprehensive guide to making better KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives capital structure and corporate financing decisions in today’s dynamic business environment, Capital Structure and Corporate Financing Decisions provides an in-depth examination of critical capital structure topics, including discussions of basic capital structure components, key theories and practices, and practical application in an increasingly complex corporate world. The book emphasizes how a sound capital structure simultaneously minimizes the firm’s cost of capital and maximizes the value to shareholders. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE ELEMENTS OF CAPITAL STRUCTURE. PART II: CAPITAL STRUCTURE CHOICE. PART III: RAISING CAPITAL. PART IV: SPECIAL TOPICS.

Nick Webber, Warwick Business School 978-0-470-71220-7 • 696pp • Hardcover • 2011

Implementing Models of Financial Derivatives is a comprehensive treatment of advanced NICK WEBBER implementation techniques in VBA for models of financial derivatives. Aimed at students who are already familiar with the basics of VBA, it emphasizes a fully object oriented approach to valuation applications, chiefly in the context of Monte Carlo simulation but also more broadly for lattice and PDE methods. Its unique approach to valuation, emphasizing effective implementation from both the numerical and the computational perspectives makes it an invaluable resource. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: A PROCEDURAL MONTE CARLO METHOD IN VBA. PART II: OBJECTS AND POLYMORPHISM. PART III: USING FILES WITH VBA. PART IV: POLYMORPHIC FACTORIES IN VBA. PART V: PERFORMANCE ISSUES IN VBA. PART VI: VARIANCE REDUCTION IN THE MONTE CARLO METHOD. PART VII: THE MONTE CARLO METHOD: CONVERGENCE AND BIAS. PART VIII: VALUING AMERICAN OPTIONS BY SIMULATION.

I NV ESTM ENT

S ER I ES

THE NEW WEALTH MANAGEMENT The FINANCIAL ADVISOR’S GUIDE TO MANAGING AND INVESTING CLIENT ASSETS

978-0-470-56952-8 • 492pp • Hardcover • 2011 H. Kent Baker, Gerald S. Martin, Editors

implementing Models of financial Derivatives: object oriented applications with Vba, with CD-RoM

The new Wealth Management: The financial advisors guide to Managing and investing Client assets Harold Evensky, CFP, Stephen M. Horan, Thomas R Robinson, CFA, and Roger Ibbotson (Foreword by) 978-0-470-62400-5 • 458pp • Hardcover • 2011

In today’s new investment landscaped, this update to the classic reference is more important than ever. The New Wealth Management outlines a wealth management program that begins with client education and risk tolerance evaluation. The book covers investment theory and then provides guidelines to determining the clients optimal investment policy and developing an investment program based on individual goals, current and future resources, and personal constraints instead of using simplistic model portfolios (such as lifecycle models) or black box solutions. Harold Evensky, CFP • Stephen M. Horan, CFA • Thomas R. Robinson, CFA Foreword by Roger Ibbotson

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Wealth Management Process . CHAPTER 2: Fiduciary and Professional Standards . CHAPTER 3: Client Goals and Constraints . CHAPTER 4: Risk Is a Four-Letter Word . CHAPTER 5: Data Gathering and Analysis . CHAPTER 6: Client Education . CHAPTER 7: Mathematics of Investing . CHAPTER 8: Investment Theory . CHAPTER 9: Asset Allocation . CHAPTER 10: Portfolio Optimization . CHAPTER 11: Taxes . CHAPTER 12: Retirement Planning . CHAPTER 13: Investment Policy Statement . CHAPTER 14: Portfolio Management . CHAPTER 15: Performance Appraisal and Evaluation . CHAPTER 16: Selecting Investment Managers . CHAPTER 17: Philosophy, Process, and People .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

Securitization and structured finance post credit crunch

securitization and structured finance Post Credit Crunch: a best Practice Deal lifecycle guide

Option Pricing and Estimation of Financial Models with R

option Pricing and estimation of financial Models with R

Markus Krebsz

Stefano M. Iacus

978-0-470-74584-7 • 472pp • Hardcover • 2011

978-0-470-71391-4 • 480pp • Hardcover • 2011

A best practice deal lifecycle guide

Markus Krebsz draws on his years of experience in the global finance markets to MARKUS KREBSZ provide a jargon-free guide to the entire lifecycle of securitization and structured finance deals. This unique, holistic and pragmatic insight into all deal life cycle stages makes Securitization and Structured Finance Post Credit Crunch an invaluable reference for all market participants in their efforts to get this important and, if used properly, hugely beneficial part of the capital markets back up and running.

financial engineering: The evolution of a Profession Tanya S. Beder, and Cara M. Marshall, Queens College of the City University of New York

A practical guide, Option Pricing and Estimation of Financial Models with R presents inference and simulation of stochastic process in the field of model calibration for financial times series modeled with continuous time processes and numerical option pricing. The text introduces the basis of probability theory and goes on to explain how to model financial times series with continuous models, how to calibrate them and covers option pricing with one or more underlying assets based on these models.

THE ART OF CAPITAL RESTRUCTURING

Creating Shareholder Value Through Mergers and Acquisitions

fixed-income securities: Valuation, Risk Management and Portfolio strategies Lionel Martellini, University of Southern California, Philippe Priaulet, HSBC, Stéphane Priaulet, AXA Investment Managers 978-0-470-85277-4 • 662pp • Paperback • 2003

The text offers an accessible and detailed account of interest rates and risk management in bond markets. It develops insights into different bond portfolio strategies, and illustrates how various types of derivative securities can be used to shift the risks associated with investing in fixedincome securities. It also provides extensive coverage on all sectors of the bond market, and the techniques for valuing bonds.

MBA Catalogue 2013

The art of Capital Restructuring: Creating shareholder Value through Mergers and acquisitions H. Kent Baker (Editor), Kogod School of Business at American University. and Halil Kiymaz (Editor)

978-0-470-45581-4 • 616pp • Hardcover • 2011

This book provides a comprehensive view of financial engineering by describing the current state of financial research and practices, including cutting-edge theory and application.

Stefano M. Iacus, University of Milan

978-0-470-56951-1 • 590pp • Hardcover • 2011

The Art of Capital Restructuring is the essential and most up-to-date guide to mergers and acquisitions, with 50 different practitioners and academics contributing to the volume. The text is designed to provide a fresh look at the current state of mergers, acquisitions, and corporate restructuring around the world. It considers several different forms of physical restructuring, and explains not only the financial aspects of these transactions but also legal, regulatory, tax, ethical, social, and behavioral considerations. H. Kent Baker, Halil Kiymaz, Editors KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

finanCe

FINANCIAL SERIES

INVESTING IN

investing in energy: a Primer on the economics of the energy industry Gianna Bern 978-1-57660-375-8 • 217pp • Hardcover • 2011

EN E RGY

From major players in the energy industry, such as big oil, to the emerging cap-andtrade market, no other book offers a more complete overview of the energy industry, specifically its economic and financial intricacies, than Investing in Energy: A Primer on the Economics of the Energy Industry. Author Gianna Bern identifies the four major sectors as oil, natural gas, power, and the emerging green industry. A

P R I M E R O F

O N

T H E

bond Math: The Theory behind the formulas

BOND

978-1-57660-306-2 • 272pp • Hardcover • 2011

MATH THEORY

THE

BEHIND

THE FORMULAS

ECONOMICS

ENERGY

Donald J. Smith, Boston University

INDUSTRY

G I A N N A

B E R N

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION AND FINANCIAL CONSIDERATIONS. PART II: CRUDE OIL AND NATURAL GAS. PART III: THE POWER SECTOR. PART IV: GREEN ENERGY. PART V: SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION.

CAPITAL BUDGETING VALUATION

Financial Analysis for Today’s Investment Projects

Capital budgeting Valuation: financial analysis for Today’s investment Projects H. Kent Baker (Editor), Kogod School of Business at American University. and Philip English (Editor), Kogod School of Business at American University. 978-0-470-56950-4 • 518pp • Hardcover • 2011

Comprised of contributed chapters from both experienced professionals and academics, Capital Budgeting Valuation offers a variety of perspectives and a rich interplay of ideas related to this important financial discipline. The coverage extends from discussing basic concepts, principles, and techniques to their application to increasingly complex and real-world situations. H. Kent Baker, Philip English, Editors KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Essential Perspectives

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATION AND KEY CONCEPTS. PART II: CAPITAL INVESTMENT CHOICE. PART III: PROJECT CASH FLOWS AND INFLATION. PART IV: RISK AND INVESTMENT CHOICE. PART V: REAL OPTIONS AND PROJECT ANALYSIS. PART VI: ESTIMATING THE PROJECT COST OF CAPITAL. PART VII: SPECIAL TOPICS.

Bond Math explores the ideas and assumptions behind commonly used statistics on risk and return for individual bonds and on fixed income portfolios. This quick and easy resource will put the intricacies of bond calculations into a clear and logical order.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: MoneyMarket Interest Rates . CHAPTER 2: Zero-Coupon Bonds . CHAPTER 3: Prices and Yields on Coupon Bonds . CHAPTER 4: Bond Taxation . CHAPTER 5: Yield Curves . CHAPTER 6: Duration and Convexity . CHAPTER 7: Floaters and Linkers . CHAPTER 8: Interest Rate Swaps . CHAPTER 9: Bond Portfolios . CHAPTER 10: Bond Strategies .

FO U RT H E D I T I O N

Financial Statement

Analysis

financial statement analysis: a Practitioner’s guide, fourth edition Martin S. Fridson, CFA, and Fernando Alvarez, PhD, Columbia University 978-0-470-63560-5 • 378pp • Hardcover • 2011

In Financial Statement Analysis, Fourth Edition, leading investment authority Martin Fridson returns with Fernando Alvarez to provide the analytical framework you need to scrutinize financial statements, whether you’re evaluating a company’s stock price or determining valuations for a merger or acquisition. Filled with real-life examples and expert advice, the Fourth Edition provides a firm understanding of the techniques needed to interpret financial statements, which are designed to conceal more than reveal.

A Practitioner’s Guide MARTIN FRIDSON FERNANDO ALVAREZ

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: READING BETWEEN THE LINES. CHAPTER 1: The Adversarial Nature of Financial Reporting . PART II: THE BASIC FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. CHAPTER 2: The Balance Sheet . CHAPTER 3: The Income Statement . CHAPTER 4: The Statement of Cash Flows . PART III: A CLOSER LOOK AT PROFITS. CHAPTER 5: What Is Profit? CHAPTER 6: Revenue Recognition . CHAPTER 7: Expense Recognition . CHAPTER 8: The Applications and Limitations of EBITDA . CHAPTER 9: The Reliability of Disclosure and Audits . CHAPTER 10: Mergers-and-Acquisitions Accounting . CHAPTER 11: Is Fraud Detectable? PART IV: FORECASTS AND SECURITY ANALYSIS. CHAPTER 12: Forecasting Financial Statements . CHAPTER 13: Credit Analysis . CHAPTER 14: Equity Analysis . APPENDIX: Explanation of Pro Forma Adjustments for Hertz Global Holdings, Inc ./DTG .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

Dynamic

Economic

Decision Making

Dynamic economic Decision Making: strategies for financial Risk, Capital Markets, and Monetary Policy John Silvia 978-0-470-92051-0 • 381pp • Hardcover • 2011

Strategies for Financial Risk, Capital Markets, and Monetary Policy

In Dynamic Economic Decision Making, famed Wells Fargo economist John Silvia offers a comprehensive look at the macJ O H N E . S I LV I A roeconomic and financial forces that have been altering our economic landscape and provides real world strategy and analysis. Chief Economist, Wells Fargo

Financial

Markets and Trading

financial Markets and Trading: an introduction to Market Microstructure and Trading strategies Anatoly B. Schmidt 978-0-470-92412-9 • 194pp • Hardcover • 2011

Financial Markets and Trading Strategies covers three main parts: Market organization and microstructure theory, which will contain an overview of modern financial Anatoly B. Schmidt markets for equities, FX, and fixed income. The book skillfully provides an informative overview of modern financial markets as well as an engaging assessment of the methods used in deriving and back-testing trading strategies. An Introduction to Market Microstructure and Trading Strategies

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Dynamic Decision Making . CHAPTER 2: Measuring Economic Benchmarks . CHAPTER 3: Cyclical and Structural Change . CHAPTER 4: Economic Dynamism: Growth and Overcoming the Limits of Geography . CHAPTER 5: Information: Competitive Edge in the Twenty-First Century . CHAPTER 6: Risk Modeling and Assessment . CHAPTER 7: Money, Interest Rates, and Financial Markets . CHAPTER 8: Strategy, Risk, Uncertainty, and the Role of Information . CHAPTER 9: Capital Markets: Financing Operations and Growth . CHAPTER 10: Financial Ratios: The InterPart of Economics and Finance . CHAPTER 11: Fiscal Policy as Agent of Change . CHAPTER 12: Global Capital Flows: Financing Growth, Creating Risk and Opportunity . CHAPTER 13: Innovation and Its Role in Economics and Decision Making .

Options

on Foreign Exchange THIRD EDITION

David F. DeRosa

options on foreign exchange, Third edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: MARKET MICROSTRUCTURE. CHAPTER 1: Financial Markets: Traders, Orders, and Systems . CHAPTER 2: Modern Financial Markets . CHAPTER 3: Inventory Models . CHAPTER 4: Market Microstructure: Information-Based Models . CHAPTER 5: Models of the Limit-Order Markets . CHAPTER 6: Empirical Market Microstructure . PART II: MARKET DYNAMICS. CHAPTER 7: Statistical Distributions and Dynamics of Returns . CHAPTER 8: Volatility . CHAPTER 9: Agent-Based Modeling of Financial Markets . PART III: TRADING STRATEGIES. CHAPTER 10: Technical Trading Strategies . CHAPTER 11: Arbitrage Trading Strategies . CHAPTER 12: Back-Testing of Trading Strategies . CHAPTER 13: Execution Strategies . APPENDIX A: Probability Distributions . APPENDIX B: Elements of Time Series Analysis .

WALL STREET JOURNAL BESTSELLER Foreword by Dick Costolo, Twitter CEO

David F. DeRosa

Brad Feld, Jason Mendelson, and Dick Costolo (Foreword by)

978-0-470-23977-3 • 267pp • Hardcover • 2011

Written by a practitioner with real-world experience in this field, the Third Edition of Options on Foreign Exchange opens with a substantive discussion of the spot and forward foreign exchange market and the mechanics of trading currency options. The Black-Scholes-Merton option-pricing model as applied to currency options is also covered, along with an examination of currency futures options.

Venture Deals: be smarter Than Your lawyer and Venture Capitalist

978-0-470-92982-7 • 219pp • Hardcover • 2011

Venture Deals discusses the history of the Venture Capital Term Sheet and the participants of the process. Written by two bloggers who have a following in new ventures space, the text delivers a breakdown analysis brad feld jason mendelson of the mechanics of a term sheet and the tactics needed to negotiate. There is also a demonstration of the stages of starting and seeing a venture through from the idea “seed” to the late stage “continual growth.” be sm martter than y our lawyer and venturre c apitalisst st

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Foreign Exchange Basics . CHAPTER 2: Trading Currency Options . CHAPTER 3: Valuation of European Currency Options . CHAPTER 4: European Currency Option Analytics . CHAPTER 5: Volatility . CHAPTER 6: American Exercise Currency Options . CHAPTER 7: Currency Futures Options . CHAPTER 8: Barrier and Binary Currency Options . CHAPTER 9: Advanced Option Models . CHAPTER 10: Non-Barrier Exotic Currency Options .

MBA Catalogue 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS: Introduction: The Art of the Term Sheet . CHAPTER 1: The Players . CHAPTER 2: How to Raise Money . CHAPTER 3: Overview of the Term Sheet . CHAPTER 4: Economic Terms of the Term Sheet . CHAPTER 5: Control Terms of the Term Sheet . CHAPTER 6: Other Terms of the Term Sheet . CHAPTER 7: The Capitalization Table . CHAPTER 8: How Venture Capital Funds Work . CHAPTER 9: Negotiation Tactics . CHAPTER 10: Raising Money the Right Way . CHAPTER 11: Issues at Different Financing Stages . CHAPTER 12: Letters of Intent—The Other Term Sheet . CHAPTER 13: Legal Things Every Entrepreneur Should Know . Appendix A: Sample Term Sheet . Appendix B: Sample Letter of Intent .

finanCe

THE FRANK J. FABOZZI SERIES

Complying with the global investment Performance standards (giPs) Bruce J. Feibel and Karyn D. Vincent 978-0-470-40092-0 • 252pp • Hardcover • 2011

COMPLYING with the GLOBAL INVESTMENT PERFORMANCE STANDARDS (GIPS ) ®

BRUCE J. FEIBEL • KARYN D. VINCENT

The first and only comprehensive explanation of GIPS, including how to comply with and implement them, Complying with the Global Investment Performance Standards covers how to calculate, present, and interpret investment performance conforming to standards that are currently used in over thirty countries worldwide.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: EXPLANATION OF THE GIPS STANDARDS. CHAPTER 1: Fundamentals of Compliance . CHAPTER 2: Defining the Firm and Composites . PART II: THE METHODOLOGY FOR CALCULATING RETURNS. CHAPTER 3: Portfolio Return Measurement . CHAPTER 4: Composite Return Measurement . CHAPTER 5: Dispersion and Risk Measurement . PART III: REPORTING AND MAINTAINING COMPLIANCE WITH THE GIPS STANDARDS. CHAPTER 6: Disclosing and Advertising Composite Performance . CHAPTER 7: Wrap-Fee/SMA, Private Equity, and Real Estate . CHAPTER 8: Maintaining Compliance with the GIPS Standards . CHAPTER 9: Verification .

WATER FINANCE Public Responsibilities and Private Opportunities

NEIL S. GRIGG

Benton E. Gup 978-0-470-87947-4 • 357pp • Hardcover • 2011

Opening with a detailed discussion of the causes of the recent financial crisis, as well as a look at some lessons we can learn from it and other crises, this reliable resource quickly moves on to put modern banking in perspective. Filled with in-depth insights and expert advice, Banking and Financial Institutions examines the essential aspects of this discipline and shows you what it takes to make the most informed decisions possible, whether you’re a bank director, investor, or borrower. A Guide for Directors, Investors, and Counterparties BENTON E. GUP

978-0-470-76755-9 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2011

Organized around the idea that the water business is about all aspects of handling water, from the global environment to your tap, Water Finance contains the information you need to succeed in this dynamic field.

PART I: STRUCTURE OF THE WATER BUSINESS. PART II: DRIVING FORCES AND ISSUES IN THE WATER INDUSTRY. PART III: WATER INDUSTRY BUSINESSES, CAREERS, AND INVESTMENTS.

FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS An Introduction to

Bankingand Financial Institutions

Neil S. Grigg, Colorado State University

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Stocks, Bonds, Foreign Exchange, and Derivatives

banking and financial institutions: a guide for Directors, investors, and borrowers

Water finance: Public Responsibilities and Private opportunities

fundamentals of financial instruments: an introduction to stocks, bonds, foreign exchange, and Derivatives Dr. Sunil Parameswaran, SDM-IMD 978-0-470-82490-0 • 500pp • Hardcover • 2011

Fundamentals of Financial Instruments deals with the global financial markets and the instruments in which they trade. While most books on fi nance tend to be heavily SUNIL PARAMESWARAN mathematical, this book emphasizes the concepts in a logical, sequential fashion, introducing mathematical concepts only at the relevant times. As a result, the reader gains conceptual clarity reinforced by just the right level of technical detail to ensure a comprehensive exposure to the skills needed in the financial world. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: An Introduction to Financial Institutions, Instruments, and Markets . CHAPTER 2: Mathematics of Finance . CHAPTER 3: Equity Shares, Preferred Shares, and Stock Market Indexes . CHAPTER 4: Bonds . CHAPTER 5: Money Markets . CHAPTER 6: Forward and Futures Contracts . CHAPTER 7: Options Contracts . CHAPTER 8: Foreign Exchange . CHAPTER 9: Mortgages and Mortgage-Backed Securities . CHAPTER 10: Swaps .

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Lessons Learned from Banking Crises . CHAPTER 2: The Economic Role of Financial Intermediaries . CHAPTER 3: The Evolving Legal Environment . CHAPTER 4: Asset/Liability Management . CHAPTER 5: Hedging and Risk Management . CHAPTER 6: Commercial and Industrial Loans . CHAPTER 7: Real Estate and Consumer Lending . CHAPTER 8: Bank Capital: Capital Adequacy . CHAPTER 9: Evaluating Bank Performance . CHAPTER 10: Payments Systems . CHAPTER 11: Other Financial Services . CHAPTER 12: A Guide to Islamic Banking . CHAPTER 13: The View from the Top: Recommendations from a Superintendent of Banks .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

THE

RISK

PREMIUM FACTOR +

The Risk Premium factor: a new Model for understanding the Volatile forces that Drive stock Prices, + Website Stephen D. Hassett 978-1-118-09905-6 • 182pp • Hardcover • 2011

The Risk Premium Factor presents and proves a radical new theory that explains the stock market, offering a quantitative explanaStephen D. Hassett tion for all the booms, busts, bubbles, and multiple expansions and contractions of the market we have experienced over the past half-century. The book convincconvinc ingly demonstrates that the equity risk premium is proportional to longterm Treasury yields, establishing a connection to loss aversion theory. Website

A New Model for Understanding the Volatile Forces That Drive Stock Prices

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: EXPLORING THE RISK PREMIUM FACTOR VALUATION MODEL. PART II: APPLYING THE RISK PREMIUM FACTOR VALUATION MODEL.

Financial

RISK Management

Models, History, and Institutions

ALLAN M. MALZ

financial Risk Management: Models, History, and institutions

THE FRANK J. FABOZZI SERIES

MORTGAGE-BACKED

SECURITIES SECOND EDITION

Frank J. Fabozzi, PhD, CFA, CPA, Yale University, Anand K. Bhattacharya, PhD, Arizona State University, and William S. Berliner 978-1-118-00469-2 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2011

Products, Structuring, and Analytical Techniques

Filled with in-depth insights and expert advice, Mortgage-Backed Securities, offers a realistic assessment of this field and outlines the products, structures, and analytical techniques you need to know about in this evolving arena. This timely Second Edition skillfully addresses the investment characteristics, creation, and analysis of mortgage-backed securities. FRANK J. FABOZZI, ANAND K. BHATTACHARYA, WILLIAM S. BERLINER

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION TO MORTGAGE AND MBS MARKETS. PART II: PREPAYMENT AND DEFAULT METRICS AND BEHAVIOR. PART III: STRUCTURING. PART IV: VALUATION AND ANALYSIS.

THE FRANK J. FABOZZI SERIES

Allan M. Malz, Columbia University

equity Valuation and Portfolio Management Frank J. Fabozzi, PH.D., CFA, CPA, Yale University, Harry M. Markowitz, PhD

978-0-470-48180-6 • 722pp • Hardcover • 2011

Financial Risk Management is equally suitable for firm risk managers, economists, and policy makers seeking grounding in the subject. This timely guide skillfully surveys the landscape of financial risk and the financial developments of recent decades that culminated in the crisis.

Mortgage-backed securities: Products, structuring, and analytical Techniques, second edition

EQUITY VALUATION and PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

978-0-470-92991-9 • 550pp • Hardcover • 2011

In Equity Valuation and Portfolio Management Frank J. Fabozzi and Harry M. Markowitz explain the process of equity valuation, provide the necessary mathematical background, and discuss classic and new portfolio strategies for investment managers. Divided into two comprehensive parts, this reliable resource focuses on valuation and portfolio strategies related to equities. FRANK J. FABOZZI • HARRY M. MARKOWITZ, EDITORS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Financial Risk in a Crisis-Prone World . CHAPTER 2: Market Risk Basics . CHAPTER 3: Value-at-Risk . CHAPTER 4: Nonlinear Risks and the Treatment of Bonds and Options . CHAPTER 5: Portfolio VaR for Market Risk . CHAPTER 6: Credit and Counterparty Risk . CHAPTER 7: Spread Risk and Default Intensity Models . CHAPTER 8: Portfolio Credit Risk . CHAPTER 9: Structured Credit Risk . CHAPTER 10: Alternatives to the Standard Market Risk Model . CHAPTER 11: Assessing the Quality of Risk Measures . CHAPTER 12: Liquidity and Leverage . CHAPTER 13: Risk Control and Mitigation . CHAPTER 14: Financial Crises . CHAPTER 15: Financial Regulation . APPENDIX A: Technical Notes . APPENDIX B: Abbreviations . APPENDIX C: References .

MBA Catalogue 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: An Introduction to Quantitative Equity Investing . CHAPTER 2: Equity Analysis Using Traditional and Value-Based Metrics. CHAPTER 3: A Franchise Factor Approach to Modeling P/E Orbits. CHAPTER 4: Relative Valuation Methods for Equity Analysis . CHAPTER 5: Valuation over the Cycle and the Distribution of Returns. CHAPTER 6: An Architecture for Equity Portfolio Management . CHAPTER 7: Equity Analysis in a Complex Market . CHAPTER 8: Survey Studies of the Use of Quantitative Equity Management . CHAPTER 9: Implementable Quantitative Equity Research. CHAPTER 10: Tracking Error and Common Stock Portfolio Management. CHAPTER 11: Factor-Based Equity Portfolio Construction and Analysis. CHAPTER 12: Cross-Partal Factor-Based Models and Trading Strategies . CHAPTER 13: Multifactor Equity Risk Models and Their Applications. CHAPTER 14: Dynamic Factor Approaches to Equity Portfolio Management. CHAPTER 15: A Factor Competition Approach to Stock Selection . CHAPTER 16: Avoiding Unintended Country Bets in Global Equity Portfolios . CHAPTER 17: Modeling Market Impact Costs . CHAPTER 18: Equity Portfolio Selection in Practice . CHAPTER 19: Portfolio Construction and Extreme Risk . CHAPTER 20: Working with High-Frequency Data . CHAPTER 21: Statistical Arbitrage .

finanCe

financial simulation Modeling in excel: a step-by-step guide, + Website

Financial Simulation Modeling in Excel + Website

Keith Allman, Josh Laurito, CFA, and Michael Loh 978-0-470-93122-6 • 193pp • Paperback • 2011

Financial Simulation Modeling in Excel contains a practical, hands-on approach to learning complex financial simulation methodologies using Excel and VBA as a medium. Filled with in-depth insights and expert advice, each chapter takes you through the theory behind a simulation topic and the implementation of that same topic in Excel/VBA in a step-by-step manner.

A Step-by-Step Guide

Keith A. Allman Josh Laurito Michael Loh

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Random Numbers, Distributions, and Basic Simulation Setup . CHAPTER 3: Correlation . CHAPTER 4: Option Pricing . CHAPTER 5: Corporate Default Simulation . CHAPTER 6: Simulating Pools of Assets . CHAPTER 7: Dealing with Data Deficiencies and Other Issues . CHAPTER 8: Advanced Topics and Further Reading . APPENDIX A: Partial Differential Equations . APPENDIX B: Newton-Raphson Method .

Pension finance: Putting the Risks and Costs of Defined benefit Plans back under Your Control M. Barton Waring and Robert C. Merton (Foreword by) 978-1-118-10636-5 • 298pp • Hardcover • 2011

PENSION FINANCE Putting the Risks and Costs of Deﬁned Beneﬁt Plans Back under Your Control With a Foreword by

Pension Finance walks the student through the conventional actuarial and accounting approaches to financing pension benefits and investing plan assets, showing that the problems described happen as a natural consequence of the dated methods still in use. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Robert C. Merton

CHAPTER 1: Achieving Long Term Health for Pension Plans Using Improved Managerial Accounting Tools . CHAPTER 2: Today’s Conventional Pension Finance Practices . CHAPTER 3: Measuring Meaningful Present Values . CHAPTER 4: The Full Economic Liability: The Off-Book Starting Point for Management of Pension Costs . CHAPTER 5: Core Principles of Pension Accounting: The Full Economic Liability Meets Accrual Accounting and Normal Costs . CHAPTER 6: Credit Risk and the Discount Rate . CHAPTER 7: Paying for the Plan . CHAPTER 8: Investment Strategy I: Liability-Relative Optimization . CHAPTER 9: Investment Strategy II: Managing Risks to the Plan’s Surplus, to Pension Expense, and to Contributions Using the Liability-Matching Asset Portfolio . CHAPTER 10: Investment Strategy III: Risk Tolerance and the Decision to Hold Risky Assets Over and Above the Liability-Matching Asset Portfolio . CHAPTER 11: Investment Strategy IV: Asset/Liability Studies—The Conventional Approach . CHAPTER 12: A Retirement Party for the Required Rate of Return . CHAPTER 13: The Fully Generalized Pension Budget Identity . CHAPTER 14: Tough Love: Saving the Underfunded Pension Plan . CHAPTER 15: Public Policy Suggestions— Revising Accounting and Actuarial Standards for Pensions . CHAPTER 16: Beyond the Crisis: Making Better Management Decisions and Managing Plans at Lower Risk . APPENDIX A: Variables and Terms Used in the Book . APPENDIX B: Implicit Options in the Pension Plan . APPENDIX C: Use of Protective Put Options in the Investment Strategy .

M. Barton Waring

University Edition

Fixed Income

Securities Tools for Today’s Markets

fixed income securities: Tools for Today’s Markets, Third edition, university edition Bruce Tuckman, PhD and Angel Serrat, PhD 978-0-470-90403-9 • 634pp • Paperback • 2011

Fixed Income Securities, Third Edition is full of examples, applications, and case studies. Practically every quantitative concept is illustrated through real market data. This practice-oriented approach makes the book particularly useful for the working professional. This University Edition includes problems which students can use to test and enhance their understanding of the text.

THIRD EDITION

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE RELATIVE PRICING OF SECURITIES WITH FIXED CASH FLOWS. CHAPTER 1: Prices, Discount Factors, and Arbitrage . CHAPTER 2: Spot, Forward, and Par Rates . CHAPTER 3: Returns, Spreads, and Yields . PART II: MEASURES OF INTEREST RATE RISK AND HEDGING. CHAPTER 4: One-Factor Risk Metrics and Hedges . CHAPTER 5: Multi-Factor Risk Metrics and Hedges . CHAPTER 6: Empirical Approaches to Risk Metrics and Hedging . PART III: TERM STRUCTURE MODELS. CHAPTER 7: The Science of Term Structure Models . CHAPTER 8: The Evolution of Short Rates and the Shape of the Term Structure . CHAPTER 9: The Art of Term Structure Models: Drift . CHAPTER 10: The Art of Term Structure Models: Volatility and Distribution . CHAPTER 11: The Gauss+ and LIBOR Market Models . PART IV: SELECTED SECURITIES AND TOPICS. CHAPTER 12: Repurchase Agreements and Financing . CHAPTER 13: Forwards and Futures: Preliminaries . CHAPTER 14: Note and Bond Futures . CHAPTER 15: Short-Term Rates and Their Derivatives . CHAPTER 16: Swaps . CHAPTER 17: Arbitrage with Financing and Two-Curve Discounting . CHAPTER 18: Fixed Income Options . CHAPTER 19: Corporate Bonds and Credit Default Swaps . CHAPTER 20: Mortgages and Mortgage-Backed Securities . CHAPTER 21: Curve Construction . BRUCE TUCKMAN ANGEL SERRAT

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

Fixed Income

Securities Tools for Today’s Markets THIRD EDITION

BRUCE TUCKMAN ANGEL SERRAT

fixed income securities: Tools for Today’s Markets, Third edition Bruce Tuckman, PhD and Angel Serrat, PhD

GLOBAL HOUSING MARKETS

Crises, Policies, and Institutions

978-0-470-89169-8 • 620pp • Hardcover • 2011

Fixed Income Securities, Third Edition is full of examples, applications, and case studies. Practically every quantitative concept is illustrated through real market data.

PART I: THE RELATIVE PRICING OF SECURITIES WITH FIXED CASH FLOWS. CHAPTER 1: Prices, Discount Factors, and Arbitrage . CHAPTER 2: Spot, Forward, and Par Rates . CHAPTER 3: Returns, Spreads, and Yields . PART II: MEASURES OF INTEREST RATE RISK AND HEDGING. CHAPTER 4: One-Factor Risk Metrics and Hedges . CHAPTER 5: Multi-Factor Risk Metrics and Hedges . CHAPTER 6: Empirical Approaches to Risk Metrics and Hedging . PART III: TERM STRUCTURE MODELS. CHAPTER 7: The Science of Term Structure Models . CHAPTER 8: The Evolution of Short Rates and the Shape of the Term Structure . CHAPTER 9: The Art of Term Structure Models: Drift . CHAPTER 10: The Art of Term Structure Models: Volatility and Distribution . CHAPTER 11: The Gauss+ and LIBOR Market Models . PART IV: SELECTED SECURITIES AND TOPICS. CHAPTER 12: Repurchase Agreements and Financing . CHAPTER 13: Forwards and Futures: Preliminaries . CHAPTER 14: Note and Bond Futures . CHAPTER 15: Short-Term Rates and Their Derivatives . CHAPTER 16: Swaps . CHAPTER 17: Arbitrage with Financing and Two-Curve Discounting . CHAPTER 18: Fixed Income Options . CHAPTER 19: Corporate Bonds and Credit Default Swaps . CHAPTER 20: Mortgages and MortgageBacked Securities . CHAPTER 21: Curve Construction .

978-0-470-64714-1 • 564pp • Hardcover • 2011

Unlike other books on the global crisis, this guide deals with the housing sector in KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE addition to the financial sector of individual economies. Global Housing Markets discusses the history and evolution of the recent crisis as local to each contributor’s part of the world, and examines its distinctive and common features with that of the U.S., the trajectory of its evolution, and the similarities and differences in policy response. Ashok Bardhan, Robert H. Edelstein, Cynthia A. Kroll, Editors

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE UNITED STATES LEADS THE HOUSING BUBBLE’S RISE AND COLLAPSE. PART II: THE EUROPEAN UNION—ONE CONTINENT, MANY MARKETS: A GAUGE OF GOVERNMENT INSTITUTIONS AND INTERVENTIONS. PART III: EASTERN EUROPE: EUROPEAN EMERGING MA RKETS RIDE THE WAVES. PART IV: ASIA HOUSING BUBBLES PAST, PRESENT, AND FUTURE: CONTRASTS AMONG ASIAN ECONOMIC GIANTS. PART V: MANAGING HOUSING BUBBLES AND HOUSING MARKETS IN DIVERSE ASIAN ECONOMIES. PART VI: AVOIDING CONTAGION IN OTHER MARKETS.

S I X T H

E D I T I O N

The Fundamentals of

An Inside Look at Strategies, Players, and Practices

Ashok Bardhan (Editor), Robert Edelstein (Editor), University of California Berkeley , and Cynthia Kroll (Editor)

Essential Perspectives

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

INSTITUTIONAL MONEY MANAGEMENT

global Housing Markets: Crises, Policies, and institutions

institutional Money Management: an inside look at strategies, Players, and Practices David M. Smith (Editor), PhD, University at Albany, and Hany A. Shawky (Editor), PhD, University at Albany 978-0-470-61014-5 • 404pp • Hardcover • 2011

MUNICIPAL

BONDS Securities Industry & Financial Markets Association

The fundamentals of Municipal bonds, sixth edition SIFMA 978-0-470-90338-4 • 297pp • Hardcover • 2011

The Fundamentals of Municipal Bonds, Sixth Edition explains the bond contract and recent changes in this market, providing investors with the information and tools they need to make bonds reliable parts of their portfolios. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

David M. Smith and Hany A. Shawky, Editors

Part of the Robert W. Kolb Series in KOLB SERIES IN FINANCE Finance, Institutional Money Management showcases contributed chapters from experts working in and teaching on banks, insurance companies, and mutual, pension, and endowment funds. Essential Perspectives

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATIONS: MARKET REGULATION AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION AND REPORTING. PART II: KEY INDIVIDUALS TO THE INVESTMENT PROCESS. PART III: MAJOR INVESTMENT APPROACHES. PART IV: TYPES OF INSTITUTIONAL INVESTORS.

MBA Catalogue 2013

CHAPTER 1: Overview of the Municipal Bond Market . CHAPTER 2: The Basics of Municipal Securities . CHAPTER 3: The Issuers . CHAPTER 4: The Primary Market . CHAPTER 5: The Secondary Market . CHAPTER 6: Investing in Bonds . CHAPTER 7: Credit Analysis . CHAPTER 8: Understanding Interest Rates . CHAPTER 9: Regulatory and Disclosure Requirements . CHAPTER 10: Financial Products .

finanCe

THE FRANK J. FABOZZI SERIES

QUANTITATIVE CREDIT PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT Practical Innovations for Measuring and Controlling Liquidity, Spread, and Issuer Concentration Risk

Quantitative Credit Portfolio Management: Practical innovations for Measuring and Controlling liquidity, spread, and issuer Concentration Risk Arik Ben Dor, Lev Dynkin, Jay Hyman, and Bruce D. Phelps 978-1-118-11769-9 • 388pp • Hardcover • 2011

A targeted volume in the area of credit, this reliable resource contains some of the most recent and original research in this field, which addresses among other things important questions raised by the credit crisis of 2008-2009. Divided into two comprehensive parts, Quantitative Credit Portfolio Management offers essential insights into understanding the risks of corporate bonds—spread, liquidity, and Treasury yield curve rise, as well as managing corporate bond portfolios. ARIK BEN DOR • LEV DYNKIN • JAY HYMAN • BRUCE D. PHELPS

neW

Behavioral Finance and Wealth

Management

behavioral finance and Wealth Management: How to build optimal Portfolios That account for investor biases, second edition Michael Pompian, MBA, CFA, CFP 978-1-118-01432-5 • 324pp • Hardcover • 2012

How to Build Investment Strategies That Account for Investor Biases second edition

The book that applies behavioral finance to the real world, Behavioral Finance and MICHAEL M. POMPIAN Wealth Management takes a practical approach to the growing science of behavioral finance, and puts it to use for real investors. In this Second Edition, Michael Pompian applies knowledge of 20 of the most prominent individual investor biases into “behaviorally-modified” asset allocation decisions.

neW neW

Frontiers of Modern Frontiers of Modern

frontiers of Modern asset allocation

Asset Allocation

Paul D. Kaplan (Editor), Laurence B. Siegel (Foreword by) 978-1-118-11506-0 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2012

Building on more than 15 years of assetallocation research, Paul D. Kaplan, tackles Paul D. Kaplan key challenges investor professionals face Foreword by Laurence B. Siegel when putting asset-allocation theory into practice. Throughout Frontiers of Modern Asset Allocation, Kaplan explains allocation theory, creates new strategies, and corrects common misconceptions, offering original insights and analysis.

The Post-Reform guide to Derivatives and futures Gordon F. Peery

The Post-Reform Guide to and

Derivatives Futures

Edited by

neW

How the Trading floor Really Works Terri Duhon, B&B Structured Finance Ltd 978-1-1199-6295-3 • 368pp • Hardcover September 2012

How The Trading Floor Really Works covers what most academic books don’t by focusing on key individuals on the trading floor and walking through some common financial markets transactions. It also clarifies the role of the trading floor itself and sheds light on the opaque terminology. In this book, Terri Duhon uses her personal experience of the trading floor to decipher and translate the world of financial markets.

Gordon F. Peery

978-0-470-55371-8 • 362pp • Hardcover • 2012

The financial crisis has changed the rules of Wall Street, especially when it comes to derivatives and futures. The Post-Reform Guide to Derivatives and Futures will help you navigate this evolving field and put you in a better position to make the most informed decisions within it.

The Trade lifecycle: behind the scenes of the Trading Process Robert P. Baker, Reoch Credit Partners 978-0-470-68591-4 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2010

The Trade Lifecycle: Behind the Scenes of the Trading Process is a guide to the trade lifecycle and it inherent risks and weaknesses. The book dissects a trade into its component parts, tracking it from pre-conception to maturity, and examines how the trade affects each business function of a financial institution. As well as illustrating each part of the trade process it highlights the legal, operational, liquidity, credit and market risks to which the trade is exposed. Readers will benefit from a full understanding of all parts of the trade process, including derivative and credit derivative trades and will also see, with examples where appropriate, how the mismanagement of these risks led to the recent financial crisis.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

neW INVESTMENT

INV EST ME NT

CORPORATE FINANCE A PRACTICAL APPROACH S E C O N D

Corporate finance: a Practical approach, second edition Michelle R. Clayman, CFA, Martin S. Fridson, CFA, George H. Troughton, CFA, and Matthew Scanlan (Foreword by)

E D I T I O N

978-1-118-10537-5 • 505pp • Hardcover • 2012

In today’s competitive business environment, companies must find innovative ways to enable rapid and sustainable growth not just to survive, but to thrive. Corporate Finance: A Practical Approach is designed to help financial analysts, executives, and investors achieve this goal with a practice-oriented distillation of the most important tools and concepts of corporate finance. Updated for a post-financial crisis environment, the Second Edition provides coverage of the most important issues surrounding modern corporate finance for the new global economy. Michelle R. Clayman, CFA • Martin S. Fridson, CFA • George H. Troughton, CFA Foreword by Matthew Scanlan, CFA

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Corporate Governance . CHAPTER 2: Capital Budgeting . CHAPTER 3: Cost of Capital . CHAPTER 4: Measures of Leverage . CHAPTER 5: Capital Structure . CHAPTER 6: Dividends and Share Repurchases: Basics . CHAPTER 7: Dividends and Share Repurchases: Analysis . CHAPTER 8: Working Capital Management . CHAPTER 9: Financial Statement Analysis . CHAPTER 10: Mergers and Acquisitions .

neW

INVESTMENT PHILOSOPHIES SECOND EDITION

Successful Strategies and the Investors Who Made Them Work

investment Philosophies: successful strategies and the investors Who Made Them Work, + Website, second edition Aswath Damodaran, New York University 978-1-118-01151-5 • 624pp • Hardcover • 2012

Investment Philosophies, Second Edition seeks to broaden the audience for the book, by making it more modular, online, and easy to access for investors who want to drill down on investment strategies that have stood the test of time. This vital resource covers a wealth of strategies including indexing, passive and activist value investing, growth investing, chart/technical analysis, market timing, arbitrage, and many more investment philosophies. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Upside, Downside: Understanding Risk . CHAPTER 3: Numbers Don’t Lie Or Do They? CHAPTER 4: Show Me the Money: The Basics of Valuation . CHAPTER 5: Many a Slip: Trading, Execution, and Taxes . CHAPTER 6: Too Good to Be True? Testing Investment Strategies . CHAPTER 7: Smoke and Mirrors? Price Patterns, Volume Charts and Technical Analysis . CHAPTER 8: Graham’s Disciples: Value Investing . CHAPTER 9: The Allure of Growth: Small Cap and Growth Investing . CHAPTER 10: Information Pays: Trading On News . CHAPTER 11: A Sure Profit: The Essence of Arbitrage . CHAPTER 12: The Impossible Dream? Timing the Market . CHAPTER 13: Ready to Give Up? The Allure of Indexing . CHAPTER 14: A Roadmap to Choosing an Investment Philosophy .

neW

SERIES

MBA Catalogue 2013

S E R IES

CORPORATE FINANCE A PRACTICAL APPROACH

WORKBOOK S E C O N D

Corporate finance Workbook: a Practical approach, second edition Michelle R. Clayman, CFA, Martin S. Fridson, CFA, and George H. Troughton, CFA

E D I T I O N

978-1-118-11197-0 • 131pp • Paperback • 2012

This is the Workbook accompanying the comprehensive work on Corporate Finance, Second Edition, from selecting, evaluating, and interpreting corporate financial data to the best practices, tools, and strategies employed in modern corporate financial management. Michelle R. Clayman, CFA • Martin S. Fridson, CFA • George H. Troughton, CFA

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: LEARNING OUTCOMES, SUMMARY OVERVIEW, AND PROBLEMS. PART II: SOLUTIONS.

n eW rd

Edition

INVESTMENT VALUATION Tools and Techniques for Determining the Value of Any Asset

investment Valuation: Tools and Techniques for Determining the Value of any asset, university edition, Third edition Aswath Damodaran, New York University 978-1-118-13073-5 • 992pp • Paperback • 2012

ASWATH DAMODARAN

This indispensable guide is a must read for students wishing to gain a better understanding of investment valuation and its methods. Investment Valuation comprehensively introduces students and investment professionals to the range of valuation models available and how to chose the right model for any given asset valuation scenario. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Valuation . CHAPTER 2: Approaches to Valuation . CHAPTER 3: Understanding Financial Statements . CHAPTER 4: The Basics of Risk . CHAPTER 5: Option Pricing Theory and Models . CHAPTER 6: Market Efficiency—Definition, Tests, and Evidence . CHAPTER 7: Riskless Rates and Risk Premiums . CHAPTER 8: Estimating Risk Parameters and Costs of Financing . CHAPTER 9: Measuring Earnings . CHAPTER 10: From Earnings to Cash Flows . CHAPTER 11: Estimating Growth . CHAPTER 12: Closure in Valuation: Estimating Terminal Value . CHAPTER 13: Dividend Discount Models . CHAPTER 14: Free Cash Flow to Equity Discount Models . CHAPTER 15: Firm Valuation: Cost of Capital and Adjusted Present Value Approaches . CHAPTER 16: Estimating Equity Value per Share . CHAPTER 17: Fundamental Principles of Relative Valuation . CHAPTER 18: Earnings Multiples . CHAPTER 19: Book Value Multiples . CHAPTER 20: Revenue Multiples and Sector-Specific Multiples . CHAPTER 21: Valuing Financial Service Firms . CHAPTER 22: Valuing Firms with Negative or Abnormal Earnings . CHAPTER 23: Valuing Young or Start-Up Firms . CHAPTER 24: Valuing Private Firms . CHAPTER 25: Aquisitions and Takeovers . CHAPTER 26: Valuing Real Estate . CHAPTER 27: Valuing Other Assets . CHAPTER 28: The Option to Delay and Valuation Implications . CHAPTER 29: The Options to Expand and to Abandon: Valuation Implications . CHAPTER 30: Valuing Equity in Distressed Firms . CHAPTER 31: Value Enhancement: A Discounted Cash Flow Valuation Framework . CHAPTER 32: Value Enhancement: Economic Value Added, Cash Flow Return on Investment, and Other Tools . CHAPTER 33: Probabilistic Approaches in Valuation: Scenario Analysis, Decision Trees, and Simulations . CHAPTER 34: Overview and Conclusion .

finanCe

neW

Risk Management and Financial Institutions

neW

Risk Management and financial institutions, + Web site, Third edition

The Principles of banking

John Hull, Joseph L. Rotman School of Management, University of Toronto

978-0-470-82521-1 • 350pp • Hardcover • 2012

978-1-118-26903-9 • 664pp • Paperback • 2012

Third Edition

A practical resource for financial professionals and students alike, Risk Management and Financial Institutions explains all aspects of financial JOH N C. H U L L risk as well as the way financial institutions are regulated, to help readers better understand financial markets and potential dangers. Fully revised and updated, this Third Edition features coverage of Basel 2.5, Basel III and Dodd-Frank as well as expanded Parts on counterparty credit risk, central clearing, and collateralization. + WEBSITE

Eli Talmor Florin Vasvari

Moorad Choudhry, London Metropolitan University The ultimate guide for bank senior management, graduates and post- graduate students in banking & finance, The Principles of Banking shows how to survive and thrive throughout the business cycle. Explaining the keys to success for all banks that bankers need to follow during good times in order to be prepared for the bad, this valuable resource provides in-depth technical analysis of exactly what constitutes good banking practice.

neW

international Private equity

international private equity

Eli Talmor and Florin Vasvari 978-0-470-97170-3 • 764pp • Hardcover • 2011

Much more than a simple case book, however, International Private Equity provides a valuable overview of the private equity industry and uses the studies to exemplify all stages of the deal process, and to illustrate such key topics as investing in emerging markets; each chapter guides the reader with an authoritative narrative on the topic treated. Covering all the main aspects of the private equity model, the book includes treatment of fund raising, fund structuring, fund performance measurement, private equity valuation, due diligence, modeling of leveraged buyout transactions, and harvesting of private equity investments.

CAlA LEVEL 1 An Introduction to Core Topics in Alternative Investments

SECOND EDITION

Caia level i: an introduction to Core Topics in alternative investments, second edition CAIA Association, Mark J. P. Anson, PhD, CFA, Donald R. Chambers, and Keith Black 978-1-118-25096-9 • 896pp • Hardcover • 2012

The official study text for the Level I Chartered Alternative Investment Analyst (CAIA) exam, CAIA Level I contains all material on alternative investments that a potential Level I candidate would need to know as they prepare for the exam. The information found here will help students build a solid foundation in both traditional and alternative investment markets. Mark J. P. Anson

with Donald R. Chambers, Keith H. Black, and Hossein Kazemi CAIA Knowledge Series

neW

Caia level ii: advanced Core Topics in alternative investments, second edition CAIA Association 978-1-1183-6975-3 • 716pp • Hardcover • October 2012

Written under the direction of the CAIA Association, with insights from many practicing and eminent professionals in this field, CAIA Level II: Advanced Core Topics in Alternative Investments, Second Edition contains virtually all the material on alternative investments a potential Level II candidate would need to know as they prepare for the exam—a multifaceted assembly of questions and problem-solving tasks. Since the tools and terms introduced in Level I provide the basis for the second level of this program, the information found here will continue to focus on the issues associated with the alternative investment arena, but in greater depth and in the context of risk management and asset allocation.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

neW I N V EST M E N T

S E R I ES

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS S E C O N D

international financial statement analysis (Cfa institute investment series), second edition Thomas R. Robinson, CFA, CFA Institute , Elaine Henry, CFA, University of Miami, Wendy L. Pirie, CFA, Michael A. Broihahn, CFA, Barry University, and Anthony T. Cope, CFA (Foreword by)

E D I T I O N

978-0-470-91662-9 • 1040pp • Hardcover • 2012

Thomas R. Robinson, CFA • Elaine Henry, CFA • Wendy L. Pirie, CFA • Michael A. Broihahn, CFA Foreword by Anthony T. Cope, CFA

Fully updated with new standards and methods for a post crisis world, this Second Edition of International Financial Statement Analysis covers the mechanics of the accounting process; the foundation for financial reporting; the differences and similarities in income statements, balance sheets, and cash flow statements around the world; examines the implications for securities valuation of any financial statement element or transaction, and shows how different financial statement analysis techniques can provide valuable clues into a company’s operations and risk characteristics.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Financial Statement Analysis: An Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Financial Reporting Mechanics . CHAPTER 3: Financial Reporting Standards . CHAPTER 4: Understanding Income Statements . CHAPTER 5: Understanding Balance Sheets . CHAPTER 6: Understanding Cash Flow Statements . CHAPTER 7: Financial Analysis Techniques . CHAPTER 8: Financial Statement Analysis: Applications . CHAPTER 9: Inventories . CHAPTER 10: Long-Lived Assets . CHAPTER 11: Income Taxes . CHAPTER 12: Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities . CHAPTER 13: Employee Compensation: Post-Employment and Share-Based . CHAPTER 14: Intercorporate Investments . CHAPTER 15: Multinational Operations . CHAPTER 16: Evaluating Financial Reporting Quality . CHAPTER 17: Integration of Financial Statement Analysis Techniques .

neW I N V EST M E N T

SE R I ES

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS

WORKBOOK S E C O N D

international financial statement analysis Workbook (Cfa institute investment series), second edition Thomas R. Robinson, CFA, CFA Institute , Elaine Henry, CFA, University of Miami, Wendy L. Pirie, CFA, Michael A. Broihahn, CFA, Barry University, and Anthony T. Cope, CFA (Foreword by)

E D I T I O N

978-0-470-91663-6 • 208pp • Paperback • 2012

The Workbook you need to test your understanding of financial statement analysis, from the seasoned experts at the CFA Institute. This companion to International Financial Statement Analysis, Second Edition is the essential guide to this important field, written by top experts at the CFA Institute. Thomas R. Robinson, CFA • Elaine Henry, CFA • Wendy L. Pirie, CFA • Michael A. Broihahn, CFA

neW

Modeling

Mortgage-Backed Securities Design, Structure, and Risk Analysis with Microsoft Excel

MBA Catalogue 2013

neW

| David Dranove | Mark Shanley | Scott Schaefer

Modeling Mortgage-backed securities: Design, structure, and Risk analysis with Microsoft excel John Banko, University of Florida 978-0-470-49912-2 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2012

Modeling Mortgage-Backed Securities + Website is an essential guide to mathematical finance and trading. This book covJOHN BANKO ers the latest developments for valuing mortgage-backed securities and measuring and controlling the interest rate risk of these securities. Topics included are: decomposition of mortgage spreads; MBS index replication strategies and market neutral strategies; Monte Carlo/OAS methodology; valuation of inverse floaters and ARMs; relative value analysis; hedging mortgage instruments against level risk and yield curve risk. + WEBSITE

David Besanko

economics of strategy, sixth edition David Besanko, David Dranove, Scott Schaefer, and Mark Shanley

ECONOMICS of STRATEGY

978-1-118-31918-5 • 624pp • Paperback • 2013

The sixth edition of Besanko’s Economics of Strategy uses economic theory to bring new International Student Version insights to popular topics in modern strategy. By presenting basic concepts of economic theory with ideas in modern strategy literature, this book provides readers with a logical framework for understanding the strategic activities within a firm. Sixth Edition

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: FIRM BOUNDARIES. PART 2: MARKET AND COMPETITIVE ANALYSIS. PART 3: STRATEGIC POSITION AND DYNAMICS. PART 4: STRATEGIC POSITION AND DYNAMICS.

finanCe

neW

Risk sharing in finance: The islamic finance alternative Dr. Zamir Iqbal, Abbas Mirakhor, Hossein Askari, George Washington University, and Noureddine Krichene

An Introduction to

Islamic Finance

an introduction to islamic finance: Theory and Practice, second edition Zamir Iqbal, Abbas Mirakhor 978-0-470-82808-3 • 350pp • Hardcover • 2011

Risk Sharing in Finance demonstrates how Islamic finance can successfully expand its array of risk sharing instruments including issuing government shares to finance development projects, and placing limits on short sales and leveraging. This text makes a compelling case for thinking outside the box to redevelop a vibrant stock market.

The first book to offer comprehensive coverage of Islamic Finance and banking and its Second Edition applications to the rest of the world, is now fully revised and updated. An Introduction to Islamic Finance: Theory and Practice, Zamir Iqbal Abbas Mirakhor Second Edition highlights the core principles of risk sharing in Islam, arguing that a risk-sharing financial system is exactly what we need to promote greater financial stability.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: THE HISTORY AND CAUSES OF FINANCIAL CRISES. CHAPTER 1: A Brief History of Financial Crises and Proposed Reforms . CHAPTER 2: Financialization and the Decoupling–Recoupling Hypotheses . PART II: RISK SHARING AND THE ISLAMIC PARADIGM. CHAPTER 3: A Brief History of Risk-Sharing Finance . CHAPTER 4: Risk Sharing and the Islamic Finance Paradigm . CHAPTER 5: Risk Sharing in the Islamic Financial System: The Building Blocks . CHAPTER 6: Risk Sharing and Vibrant Capital Markets in Islamic Finance . CHAPTER 7: Portfolio Theory and Asset Pricing . CHAPTER 8: Complementary Role of Intermediaries and Markets in Promoting Risk Sharing . PART III: MOVING FORWARD. CHAPTER 9: Enhanced Access to Finance, Social Welfare, and Economic Development under a Risk-Sharing System . CHAPTER 10: The Role of Institutions and Governance in Risk Sharing . CHAPTER 11: Gaps between the Theory and Practice of Islamic Finance . CHAPTER 12: Concluding Remarks .

CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: The Economic System . CHAPTER 3: Riba vs . Rate of Return . CHAPTER 4: Financial Instruments . CHAPTER 5: Risk Sharing as an Alternative to Debt . CHAPTER 6: The Islamic Financial System . CHAPTER 7: The Stability of the Islamic Financial System . CHAPTER 8: Islamic Financial Intermediation and Banking . CHAPTER 9: Capital Markets . CHAPTER 10: Nonbank Financial Intermediation . CHAPTER 11: Performance of Islamic Financial Services . CHAPTER 12: Financial Engineering . CHAPTER 13: Risk Management . CHAPTER 14: Regulation of Islamic Financial Institutions . CHAPTER 15: Corporate Governance . CHAPTER 16: Globalization and its Challenges . CHAPTER 17: Issues and Challenges .

978-0-470-82966-0 • 312pp • Hardcover • 2012

MOORAD CHOUDHRY

Risk Management in banking, Third edition Joël Bessis

AN INTRODUCTION TO

BANKING Liquidity Risk and Asset-Liability Management

978-0-470-01913-9 • 840pp • Paperback • 2010

Never before has risk management been so important. Now in its Third Edition, Risk Management in Banking has been fully restructured, featuring new material and discussions on new financial products, derivatives, Basel II, credit models based on time intensity models, implementing risk systems and intensity models of default. It also includes a section on Subprime that discusses the crisis mechanisms and makes numerous references throughout to the recent stressed financial conditions. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Foreword by Oldrich Masek Managing Director, JPMorgan

an introduction to banking: liquidity Risk and assetliability Management Moorad Choudhry and Oldrich Masek (Foreword by) 978-0-470-68725-3 • 384pp • Paperback • 2011

An Introduction to Banking introduces the key concepts of banking, concentrating on the application of robust risk management principles from a practitioner viewpoint, and how to incorporate these principles into bank strategy.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Bank Business and Capital . CHAPTER 2: The Money Markets . CHAPTER 3: The Yield Curve . CHAPTER 4: Introduction to Trading and Hedging . CHAPTER 5: Asset and Liability Management I . CHAPTER 6: Asset and Liability Management II . CHAPTER 7: Asset And Liability Management III: The Alco . CHAPTER 8: Bank Liquidity Risk Management . CHAPTER 9: A Sustainable Bank Business Model: Capital, Liquidity and Leverage . CHAPTER 10: Bank Regulatory Capital .

SECTION 1: The Financial Crisis . SECTION 2: Business Lines, Risks, and Risk Management . SECTION 3: Financial Products . SECTION 4: Valuation . SECTION 5: Risk Modeling . SECTION 6: Regulations . SECTION 7: Asset Liability Management (ALM) . SECTION 8: Funds Transfer Pricing Systems . SECTION 9: Dependencies and Portfolio Risk . SECTION 10: Market Risk . SECTION 11: Credit Risk: Standalone . SECTION 12: Credit Portfolio Risk . SECTION 14: Risk-adjusted Performance . SECTION 15: Credit Portfolio Management . SECTION 16: Conclusion and Financial Reforms .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

neW

Essential

Mathematics for market risk management SIMON HUBBERT

essential Mathematics for Market Risk Management Simon Hubbert 978-1-1199-7952-4 • 350pp • Hardcover • 2012

Essential Mathematics for Market Risk Management presents statistical theories and shows students how to put statistical tools into action to investigate areas such as the design of mathematical models for financial volatility or calculating the value at risk for an investment portfolio.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Applied Linear Algebra for Risk Managers . CHAPTER 3: Probability Theory for Risk Managers . CHAPTER 4: Optimization Tools . CHAPTER 5: Portfolio Theory I . CHAPTER 6: Portfolio Theory II . CHAPTER 7: The Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM) . CHAPTER 8: Risk Factor Modelling . CHAPTER 9: The Value at Risk Concept . CHAPTER 10: Value at Risk under a Normal Distribution . CHAPTER 11: Advanced Probability Theory for Risk Managers . CHAPTER 12: A Survey of Useful Distribution Functions . CHAPTER 13: A Crash Course on Financial Derivatives . CHAPTER 14: Non-linear Value at Risk . CHAPTER 15: Time Series Analysis . CHAPTER 16: Maximum Likelihood Estimation . CHAPTER 17: The Delta Method for Statistical Estimates . CHAPTER 18: Hypothesis Testing . CHAPTER 19: Statistical Properties of Financial Losses . CHAPTER 20: Modelling Volatility . CHAPTER 21: Extreme Value Theory . CHAPTER 22: Simulation Models . CHAPTER 23: Alternative Approaches to VaR . CHAPTER 24: Backtesting .

an introduction to bond Markets, fourth edition

MOORAD CHOUDHRY

Moorad Choudhry

AN INTRODUCTION TO

BOND MARKETS

978-0-470-68724-6 • 472pp • Paperback • 2010

The Fourth Edition of Professor Moorad Choudhry’s benchmark reference text An Introduction to Bond Markets brings students up to date with latest developments and market practice, including the impact of the financial crisis and issues of relevance for investors. This book offers a detailed yet accessible look at bond instruments, and is aimed specifically at newcomers to the market or those unfamiliar with modern fixed income products. FOURTH EDITION

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction To Bonds . CHAPTER 2: The Yield Curve, Spot And Forward Yields . CHAPTER 3: Bond Instruments And Interest-Rate Risk . CHAPTER 4: Floating-Rate Notes And Other Bond Instruments . CHAPTER 5: The Money Markets . CHAPTER 6: The Eurobond Market . CHAPTER 7: Convertible Bonds, Mtns And Warrants . CHAPTER 8: Credit Ratings . CHAPTER 9: Inflation-Linked Bonds . CHAPTER 10: An Introduction To Asset-Backed Securities . CHAPTER 11: Introduction To Derivative Instruments . CHAPTER 12: Introduction To Credit Derivatives . CHAPTER 13: Approaches To Government Bond Trading And Yield Analysis . CHAPTER 14: Risk Management And Value-At-Risk .

neW

an introduction to international Capital Markets: Products, strategies, Participants, second edition Andrew M. Chisholm 978-0-470-75898-4 • 448pp • Hardcover • 2009

Fully revised and updated from the hugely popular First Edition, An Introduction to International Capital Markets: Products, Strategies, Participants is an accessible and convenient one-volume introduction to international capital markets, ideal for those entering or planning to enter investment banking or asset management. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction: The Market Context . CHAPTER 2: The Money Markets . CHAPTER 3: The Foreign Exchange Market . CHAPTER 4: Major Government Bond Markets . CHAPTER 5: Bond Price Sensitivity . CHAPTER 6: The Yield Curve . CHAPTER 7: Credit Spreads and Securitization . CHAPTER 8: Equity Markets and Equity Investment . CHAPTER 9: Equity Fundamental Analysis . CHAPTER 10: Cash Flow Models in Equity Valuation . CHAPTER 11: Interest Rate Forwards and Futures . CHAPTER 12: Bond Futures . CHAPTER 13: Interest Rate Swaps . CHAPTER 14: Interest Rate Swap Valuation . CHAPTER 15: Equity Index Futures and Swaps . CHAPTER 16: Fundamentals of Options . CHAPTER 17: Option Valuation Models . CHAPTER 18: Option Pricing and Risks . CHAPTER 19: Option Strategies . CHAPTER 20: Additional Option Applications .

MBA Catalogue 2013

Simple Tools

and techniques for enterprise risk management Second Edition

ROBERT J. CHAPMAN

simple Tools and Techniques for enterprise Risk Management, second edition Robert J. Chapman 978-1-1199-8997-4 • 676pp • Hardcover • 2012

The Second Edition features up-to-date materials on new threats, lessons from the recent financial crisis, and how businesses need to protect themselves in terms of business interruption, security, project and reputational risk management.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT IN CONTEXT. PART II: THE RISK MANAGEMENT PROCESS. PART III: INTERNAL INFLUENCES – MICRO FACTORS. PART IV: EXTERNAL INFLUENCES – MACRO FACTORS.

finanCe

an introduction to bond: Market Risk analysis Carol Alexander, University of Sussex 978-0-470-99799-4 • 1568pp • 4 volume set in a hardback slip case • October 2008

Market Risk Analysis is the most comprehensive, rigorous and detailed resource available on risk in financial markets. Written as a series of four interlinked volumes each title is self-contained, although numerous crossreferences to other volumes enable readers to obtain further background knowledge and related information.

Also available as individual volumes… Volume i: Quantitative Methods in finance 9780470998007 • 320pp • Hardcover April 2008

Quantitative Methods in Finance covers the essential mathematical and financial background for subsequent volumes. Although many readers will already be familiar with this material, few competing texts contain such a complete and pedagogical exposition of all the basic quantitative concepts required for market risk analysis. There are six comprehensive chapters covering all the calculus, linear algebra, probability and statistics, numerical methods and portfolio mathematics that are necessary for market risk analysis. This is an ideal background text for a Masters course in finance.

Volume ii: Practical financial econometrics 9780470998014 • 432pp • Hardcover April 2008

Practical Financial Econometrics provides a detailed understanding of financial econometrics, with applications to asset pricing and fund management as well as to market risk analysis. It covers equity factor models, including a detailed analysis of the Barra model and tracking error, principal component analysis, volatility and correlation, GARCH, cointegration, copulas, Markov switching, quantile regression, discrete choice models, non-linear regression, forecasting and model evaluation.

Volume iii: Pricing, Hedging and Trading financial instruments 9780470997895 • 416pp • Hardcover May 2008

Pricing, Hedging and Trading Financial Instruments has five very long chapters on the pricing, hedging and trading of bonds and swaps, futures and forwards, options and volatility as well detailed descriptions of mapping portfolios of these financial instruments to their risk factors. There are numerous examples, all coded in interactive Excel spreadsheets, including many pricing formulae for exotic options but excluding the calibration of stochastic volatility models, for which Matlab code is provided. The chapters on options and volatility together constitute 50% of the book, the slightly longer chapter on volatility concentrating on the dynamic properties the two volatility surfaces (the implied and the local volatility surfaces) that accompany an option pricing model, with particular reference to hedging.

Volume iV: Value at Risk Models 9780470997888 • 450pp • Hardcover October 2008

Value at Risk Models builds on the three previous volumes to provide by far the most comprehensive and detailed treatment of market VaR models that is currently available in any textbook. The exposition starts at an elementary level but, as in all the other volumes, the pedagogical approach accompanied by numerous interactive Excel spreadsheets allows readers to experience the application of parametric linear, historical simulation and Monte Carlo VaR models to increasingly complex portfolios.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

finanCe

2012

The definitive guide to passing the CFA® Level I Exam with the experts

CFA LEVE L I ®

E XAM C O M PAN I O N

The 7city/Wiley study guide to getting the most out of the CFA Institute Curriculum

Cfa level i exam Companion

The 7city/Wiley study guide to getting the most out of the Cfa institute Curriculum 7city Learning To earn the CFA charter, candidates must successfully pass through the CFA Program, a graduate-level self-study program that combines a broad curriculum with professional conduct requirements, culminating in three sequential exams . With a foreword and introductions to the topics by one of the foremost global authorities on the CFA® Program, Pamela Drake, 7city and Wiley offer an invaluable self-study guide to passing one of the most sought-after designations in the finance industry . The CFA® Level I Exam Companion assists candidates in navigating through the wealth of CFA level I content, prioritising key areas of the official CFA texts .

INCLUDES: • Exam focus and guidance from 7city CFA® instructors • Exam style questions and worked examples demonstrating key concepts • Identification of critical Learning Outcome Statements • Direct references to the CFA Institute curriculum

MBA Catalogue 2013

Provides exam focus and guidance from CFA® instructors Worked examples demonstrating key concepts

Identification of learning outcome statements that are critical Directly references the CFA® curriculum

F O R E W O R D B Y P A M E L A P E T E R S O N D R A K E , P h . D . C FA

978-1-1183-6605-9 334pp Paperback August 2012

finanCe

introduction to economics: social issues and economic Thinking Wendy A. Stock 978-0-470-57478-2 • 416pp • Paperback • 2012

Introduction to Economics: Social Issues and Economic Thinking presents a realistic picture of current economic thought through an understanding of theory and the application of issues. It provides concepts in economics and how they relate to real issues in life. It delves into economics by looking at Crime, Labor Markets, Drug Use, Population etc, using the “tools” of economics.

Private banking: building a Culture of excellence Boris F. J. Collardi 978-0-470-82437-5 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2012

As the number of wealthy individuals around the world increases, private banking and wealth management companies have grown to keep pace. After the fast growth the long term success is predicated on both winning and keeping clients, making a client-centric model a must. Private Banking: Building a Culture of Excellence provides a clear, easy-to-follow guide to building a committed base, written by an industry expert. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Managing Risks in Commercial and Retail

Managing Risks in Commercial and Retail banking Amalendu Ghosh 978-1-118-10353-1 • 480pp • Hardcover • 2012

Managing Risks in Commercial and Retail Banking takes an in-depth, logical look at dealing with all aspects of risk manageAmalendu Ghosh ment within the banking sector. It presents complex processes in a simplified way by providing real-life situations and examples. The book examines all dimensions of the risks that banks face—both the financial risks— credit, market, and operational—and the non-financial risks—money laundering, information technology, business strategy, legal, and reputational.

Banking

CHAPTER 1: A Framework for Excellence in Private Banking . CHAPTER 2: What is Driving Private Banking? CHAPTER 3: Finding the Right Organisation and Operational Strategy . CHAPTER 4: Forces Shaping the Regulatory Environment . CHAPTER 5: Putting Clients at the Centre . CHAPTER 6: Beyond Products – Offering Tailored Solutions . CHAPTER 7: Why Brand Matters . CHAPTER 8: Delivering a Superior Client Experience . CHAPTER 9: Understanding Service Excellence . CHAPTER 10: Winning the War for Talent . CHAPTER 11: Defining and Growing Leadership and Culture . CHAPTER 12: Measuring and Managing Performance .

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: RISK MANAGEMENT APPROACHES AND SYSTEMS. PART 2: CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT. PART 3: MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT. PART 4: OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT. PART 5: RISK-BASED INTERNAL AUDIT. PART 6: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE. PART 7: LESSONS FROM THE ASIAN AND THE UNITED STATES’ FINANCIAL CRISES.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

HR ManageMenT

Transformative HR How Great Companies Use Evidence-Based Change for Sustainable Advantage

Transformative HR: How great Companies use evidence-based Change for sustainable advantage John Boudreau, Marshall School of Business, and Ravin Jesuthasan 978-1-118-03604-4 • 288pp • Hardcover • 2011

This groundbreaking book reveals a new approach to deliver sustainable change John W. Boudreau and Ravin Jesuthasan and business results. Transformative HR is enhanced with success stories from leading companies that engage leadership and involve employees in ways that make a lasting impact on their companies. WITH TOWERS WATSON

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE FIVE PRINCIPLES OF EVIDENCE-BASED CHANGE. CHAPTER 1: Information Overload or Persuasive Analytics? CHAPTER 2: Where Are Your Pivotal Talent Segments? CHAPTER 3: Risk: Is It Just a Four-Letter Word? CHAPTER 4: Your HR Portfolio: Is It Less Than the Sum of Its Parts? CHAPTER 5: “Spreading Peanut Butter” or Optimizing Investments? PART II: SIX IN-DEPTH CASES OF EVIDENCE-BASED CHANGE. CHAPTER 6: Royal Bank of Canada’s HR Partnership . CHAPTER 7: Coca-Cola Combines Passion and Rigor . CHAPTER 8: Khazanah Nasional’s Pursuit of Nation Building . CHAPTER 9: IBM’s Workforce Management Initiative . CHAPTER 10: Ameriprise Financial Reinvents Its HR Function . CHAPTER 11: Royal Bank of Scotland Proves People Matter .

The

CHIEF HR OFFICER DE F I NI N G T H E N EW ROL E OF HUM AN R ESOURCE L E ADE R S

The Chief HR officer: Defining the new Role of Human Resource leaders Patrick M. Wright, PhD, Cornell University, John Boudreau, David Pace, Libby Sartain, Paul McKinnon, and Richard Antoine 978-0-470-90534-0 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2011

EDITORS

PATRICK M. WRIGHT » JOHN W. BOUDREAU DAVID A. PACE » ELIZABETH “LIBBY” SARTAIN PAUL MCKINNON » RICHARD L. ANTOINE

The organization that awards the “Nobel prize of the HR world” brings together the elite leaders of the field to offer strategic insight in defining the new roles of the Chief Human Resource Officer.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: TODAY’S CHIEF HUMAN RESOURCE OFFICER. PART II: THE CHRO AS STRATEGIC ADVISOR AND TALENT ARCHITECT. PART III: THE CHRO AS COUNSELOR/CONFIDANTE/COACH. PART IV: THE CHRO AS LIAISON TO THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS. PART V: THE CHRO AS LEADER OF THE HR FUNCTION. PART VI: CHARACTERISTICS OF TODAY’S CHRO.

MBA Catalogue 2013

THIRD EDITION

RESOLVING CONFLICTS AT WORK

Resolving Conflicts at Work: Ten strategies for everyone on the Job, Third edition Kenneth Cloke and Joan Goldsmith 978-0-470-92224-8 • 400pp • Paperback • 2011

Resolving Conflicts at Work is a guide for preventing and resolving conflicts, miscommunications, and misunderstandings at work, T E N S T R AT E G I E S F O R E V E R YO N E O N T H E J O B including dozens of techniques for revealing how the inevitable disputes and divisions in the workplace are actually opportunities for greater creativity, productivity, enhanced morale, and personal growth. In the Third Edition of this text, all chapters are completely infused with additional content, updated examples, and new case studies. K E N N E T H C LO K E

J OA N G O L D S M I T H

F o r ew o r d by Wa r r e n B e n n i s

TABLE OF CONTENTS: Introduction: Ten Strategies for Everyone on the Job . Strategy 1: Understand the Culture and Dynamics of Conflict . Strategy 2: Listen Empathetically and Responsively . Strategy 3: Search Beneath the Surface for Hidden Meaning . Strategy 4: Acknowledge and Reframe Emotions . Strategy 5: Separate What Matters from What Gets in the Way . Strategy 6: Solve Problems Paradoxically and Creatively . Strategy 7: Learn from Difficult Behaviors . Strategy 8: Lead and Coach for Transformation . Strategy 9: Explore Resistance and Negotiate Collaboratively . Strategy 10: Mediate and Design Systems for Prevention .

MANAGEMENT

RESET ORGANIZING FOR

SUSTAIN AB L E EFFECTIVENESS

Management Reset: organizing for sustainable effectiveness Edward E. Lawler, III, University of Southern California and Christopher G. Worley, with David Creelman 978-0-470-63798-2 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2011

Lawler and Worley outline why and how the current practice of management must change in order for organizations to achieve sustained organizational effectiveness. Starting with a change in how success is measured and a more realistic view of risk, Management Reset takes us through how strategy, governance, organization structure and talent should be managed. The result is an organization that can reliable produce financial, social, and ecological results. RESET

EDWARD E. LAWLER III and CHRISTOPHER G. WORLEY Authors of Built to Change WITH DAVID CREELMAN

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Time for a Reset . CHAPTER 2: Sustainable Management . PART I: THE WAY VALUE IS CREATED. CHAPTER 3: Strategies for Sustainable Effectiveness . CHAPTER 4: Developing a Strategy . PART II: THE WAY WORK IS ORGANIZED. CHAPTER 5: Board Governance . CHAPTER 6: Structures for Sustainable Effectiveness . CHAPTER 7: Sustainable Work Systems . PART III: THE WAY PEOPLE ARE TREATED. CHAPTER 8: Managing Performance . CHAPTER 9: Reward Systems . CHAPTER 10: Managing Talent . PART IV: THE WAY BEHAVIOR IS GUIDED. CHAPTER 11: Leading, Managing, and Following . CHAPTER 12: Transforming to Sustainable Management .

HR ManageMenT

neW

THE

The Dynamics of Conflict:

D Y N A M I C S a guide to engagement and of

CONFLICT A GUIDE TO

neW Sandra M. Reed, SPHR, and Anne M. Bogardus

intervention, second edition Bernard Mayer, PhD, Creighton University

PHR/SPHR ®

Professional in Human Resources Certiﬁcation

STUDY GUIDE Fourth Edition

UPDATED FOR THE 2012 EXAMS

Includes Real-World Scenarios, In-Depth Discussion of Body of Knowledge, and Access to Exam Prep Software Featuring:

978-0-470-61353-5 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2012

+ Custom Test Engine + Over 200 Sample Questions

ENGAGEMENT

PHR / sPHR Professional in Human Resources Certification study guide, fourth edition Sandra M. Reed, PHR, SPHR, and Anne M. Bogardus

+ Electronic Flashcards

978-1-118-28917-4 • 672pp • Paperback • 2012

AND

The Dynamics of Conflict Resolution has become one of the seminal works in the conflict resolution field. In this Second Edition, B E R N A R D M AY E R the basic vision and overall organization will be maintained. However, in keeping with current trends and research, chapters will be reviewed and revised to re reflect four key concepts--interactional dynamics, system dynamics, culture and conflict, and conflict engagement.

This new edition of PHR/SPHR Professional in Human Resources Certification Study Guide is must-have preparation for those looking to take the PHR or SPHR certification exams in order to strengthen their resume. The Fourth Edition addresses key topics such as strategic management, workforce planning and employment, compensation and benefits, employee and labor relations, and Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: CONFLICT. CHAPTER 1: The Nature of Conflict . CHAPTER 2: How People Approach Conflict . CHAPTER 3: Power and Conflict . CHAPTER 4: Culture and Conflict . PART II: ENGAGEMENT AND INTERVENTION. CHAPTER 5: Resolving Conflict . CHAPTER 6: Engaging Conflict . CHAPTER 7: Communication . CHAPTER 8: Negotiation . CHAPTER 9: Working with Impasse . CHAPTER 10: Mediation . CHAPTER 11: Other Approaches to Conflict Intervention . CHAPTER 12: Why We Intervene in Conflict .

CHAPTER 1: Certifying Human Resource Professionals . CHAPTER 2: Core Knowledge Requirements for HR Professionals . CHAPTER 3: Business Management and Strategy . CHAPTER 4: Workforce Planning and Employment . CHAPTER 5: Human Resource Development . CHAPTER 6: Compensation and Benefits . CHAPTER 7: Employee and Labor Relations . CHAPTER 8: Risk Management

INTERVENTION

Second Edition

SERIOUS SKILLS.

neW

Human Resource Management, second edition Greg L. Stewart, University of Iowa, and Kenneth G. Brown, University of Iowa

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

E L E V E NT H E D I T I O N

David A. DeCenzo Stephen P. Robbins

978-0-470-53049-8 • 624pp • Hardcover • 2010

Stewart and Brown’s Human Resource Management: Linking Strategy to Practice is designed to help students understand traditional human resource concepts within a decision-making framework. Throughout the book, the authors emphasize how organizations excel when they have consistent human resource practices that align with their strategic direction. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SEEING PEOPLE AS A STRATEGIC RESOURCE. PART II: SECURING EFFECTIVE EMPLOYEES. PART II: IMPROVING EMPLOYEE PERFORMANCE. PART IV: MOTIVATING AND MANAGING EMPLOYEES.

Human Resource Management, eleventh edition international student Version Dr. David A. DeCenzo, Coastal Carolina University, and Stephen P. Robbins, San Diego State 9781118379714 • 433pp • Paperback • 2013

The authors provide a strong foundation of essential elements of Human Resource Management as well as a clear understanding of how Human Resource Management links with business strategy. Through practical applications, the authors illustrate the importance of employees on every level of the organization, helping students understand HRM elements such as recruitment, training, motivation, retention, safety, the legal environment, and how they support successful business strategies. International Student Version

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: UNDERSTANDING HRM. CHAPTER 1: HRM in a Changing Environment . CHAPTER 2: Introduction to HR Functions . PART 2: THE LEGAL AND ETHICAL CONTEXT OF HRM. CHAPTER 3: Employment Laws . CHAPTER 4: Employer and Employee Rights . PART 3: STAFFING THE ORGANIZATION. CHAPTER 5: Effective Job Analysis . CHAPTER 6: Employee Recruitment . CHAPTER 7: Selecting Employees . PART 4: TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT. CHAPTER 8: Training and Developing Employees . CHAPTER 9: Career Development . PART 5: MAINTAINING HIGH PERFORMANCE. CHAPTER 10: Performance Management . CHAPTER 11: Compensation . CHAPTER 12: Employee Benefits . CHAPTER 13: Health and Safety . PART 6: LABOR–MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENTS. CHAPTER 14: Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

HR ManageMenT

S T R AT E G I C E M P L OY E E S URV E YS EVIDENCE-BASED GUIDELINES for D R I V I N G O R G A N I Z AT I O N A L S U C C E S S

J A C K W. W I L E Y

strategic employee surveys: evidence-based guidelines for Driving organizational success Dr. Jack Wiley

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

The Trainer's Handbook of Leadership Development

978-0-470-88970-1 • 176pp • Hardcover • 2010

The Trainer’s Handbook of leadership Development: Tools, Techniques, and activities Dr. Karen Lawson 978-0-470-88603-8 • 280pp • Paperback • 2011

Tools, Techniques, and Activities

Strategic Employee Surveys, written by one of the world’s leading employee survey experts, explains both the reasons why organizations need to survey their employees and how to tie this strategic feedback vehicle to positive business results. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Employee Surveys as Warning Indicators . CHAPTER 3: Employee Surveys as Program Evaluation Measures . CHAPTER 4: Employee Surveys to Measure Employer of Choice . CHAPTER 5: Employee Surveys as Leading Indicators . CHAPTER 6: Merging “Employer of Choice” and “Leading Indicator” Survey Purposes . CHAPTER 7: An Overview of Survey Feedback and Action Planning . CHAPTER 8: Setting Goals for Improvements in Survey Results . CHAPTER 9: Sustaining Change . CHAPTER 10: Final Thoughts .

The Trainer’s Handbook of Leadership Development offers facilitators, human resource professionals, and consultants a wide-variety of tools and techniques for developing leadership competencies and char characteristics. Drawing on research from such giants in the leadership field as Warren Bennis, Ken Blanchard, James Kouzes, and Barry Posner, the book’s thought-provoking activities are designed to create real and lasting behavior change. KAREN LAWSON

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Leadership competencies and characteristics . CHAPTER 3: Designing a leadership development program . CHAPTER 4: Increasing awareness—self and others . CHAPTER 5: Communicating and influencing . CHAPTER 6: Motivating and engaging . CHAPTER 7: Developing and managing . CHAPTER 8: Increasing leadership effectiveness .

The employee benefits answer book: an indispensable guide for Managers and business owners

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

Rebecca Mazin THE

EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

ANSWER BOOK

An Indispensable Guide for Managers and Business Owners

REBECCA MAZIN

978-0-470-52515-9 • 272pp • Paperback • 2010

Clear, concise, and comprehensive, this essential resource will help any HR manager create coherent policies based on a clearer understanding of all employee benefits. The Employee Benefits Answer Book highlights specific practice examples that are “worth repeating,” or “better forgotten,” and includes a wide-variety of checklists and charts. The Employee Benefits Answer Book is organized by topic and arranged in a question and answer format making it easy to zero in on a particular subject. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: The Benefits Package: Why Should I Have a Plan? What Should it Include? CHAPTER 2: Paid Time Off: How Many Vacation Days Do I Have to Give? CHAPTER 3: Enrollment and Changes: How Do I Obtain Information and Communicate Value? CHAPTER 4: Medical Plan Basics: What’s the Difference Between a POS and an HSA? CHAPTER 5: Dental and Vision Plans: Are Checkups and Eye Exams Enough? CHAPTER 6: Choosing and Working With Brokers: How Do I Get the Most Out of the Broker Relationship? CHAPTER 7: Benefits That Save Payroll Taxes: What’s Involved in Flexible Spending Accounts, Transportation and Tuition Assistance Plans? CHAPTER 8: Retirement Plans: What Do I Need to Know About Pensions, 401(k) Plans, and Nonqualified Plans? CHAPTER 9: Benefits That Provide Economic Security: Do Employees Expect Life Insurance and Disability? CHAPTER 10: Benefits Buffet: From EAP to Concierge Services What Else Do Employees Want and What Should You Provide? CHAPTER 11: When Employees Leave: How Does Cobra Work and What Else Do I Need to Do? CHAPTER 12: Cost Control: What Can Employers Do to Rein in Benefits Costs?

MBA Catalogue 2013

HR ManageMenT

neW

hrm & Performance Achievements & Challenges

neW

HRM & Performance: achievements and Challenges David E. Guest, King’s College London, Jaap Paauwe, Tilburg University, Patrick Wright, Cornell University 978-1-4051-6833-5 • 272pp • Paperback • 2012

This book is distinctive in drawing together a number of leading academics to review Jaap Paauwe David E. Guest Patrick M. Wright progress to date and future prospects in the field of HRM with specific reference to performance and other outcomes. It covers the core issues in a comprehensive way. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: HRM and Performance: What Do We Know and Where Should We Go? CHAPTER 2: HRM, Well-Being and Performance: A Theoretical and Empirical Review . CHAPTER 3: Building Highly-performing Work Systems: Analysing HR Systems and Their Contribution to Performance . CHAPTER 4: Reconceptualizing Fit in Strategic Human Resource Management: ‘Lost in Translation?’ CHAPTER 5: HRM and Performance: The Role of Effective Implementation . CHAPTER 6: Strategic HRM and Organizational Behaviour: Integrating Multiple Levels of Analysis . CHAPTER 7: Measuring Human Capital: A Strategic Human Resource Management Perspective . CHAPTER 8: Measurement of Human Resource Practices: Issues Regarding Scale, Scope, Source and Substantive Content . CHAPTER 9: Research on Human Resources and Effectiveness: Some Methodological Challenges . CHAPTER 10: Progress and Prospects for HRM–Performance Research in Small and Medium-sized Business . CHAPTER 11: Progress and Prospects

Managing Human Resources: Resource Management in Transition, fifth edition

Fifth Edition

Managing Human Resources

Stephen Bach, King’s College London, Martin Edwards, King’s College London 978-1-119-99153-3 • 440pp • Paperback • 2013

Stephen Bach and Martin R. Edwards

This revised edition is a comprehensive, authoritative set of essays. It is more detailed and analytical than the mainstream treatments of HRM in rival books, whilst remaining accessible to a wide variety of audiences. As in previous editions, the aim of the book is to analyse HRM, the study of work and employment, using an integrated multi-disciplinary approach. The starting point is a recognition that HRM practice and firm performance are influenced by a variety of institutional arrangements that extend beyond the firm. The consequences of HRM need to incorporate analysis of employees and other stakeholders as well as the implications for organizational performance. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Human Resource Management in Transition . CHAPTER 2: Human Resource Management and Performance . CHAPTER 3: Legal Aspects of the Employment Relationship . CHAPTER 4: Corporate Governance and Human Resource Management . CHAPTER 5: The International Human Resource Function . CHAPTER 6: Customer Service Work, Employee Well-being and Performance . CHAPTER 7: Recruitment and Selection . CHAPTER 8: Work–Life Balance: The End of the ‘Overwork’ Culture? CHAPTER 9: Skills and Training . CHAPTER 10: HRM and Leadership . CHAPTER 11: Performance Management . CHAPTER 12: Remuneration Systems . CHAPTER 13: Employee Involvement and Voice . CHAPTER 14: Employee Representation . CHAPTER 15: Outsourcing and Human Resource Management . CHAPTER 16: Employee Engagement: An Evidence-based Review . CHAPTER 17: HRM and Employee Well-being . CHAPTER 18: Employer Branding: Developments and Challenges .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

i n T e R n aT i o n a l b u s i n e s s

neW

NAMED A BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR BY THE ECONOMIST

F O R E W O R D

Red Capitalism: The fragile financial foundation of China’s extraordinary Rise, Revised edition

REVISED AND

UPDATED

RED CAPITALISM

I N T R O D U C T I O N

I VA N

B Y

YA N G YO N GX I N

F RA N K-J Ü R G E N R IC H T E R

T S E L I C H T C H E V

Ivan Tselichtchev, Yang Yongxin (Foreword by), and Frank-Jürgen Richter (Introduction)

Carl Walter and Fraser Howie 978-1-118-25510-0 • 260pp • Hardcover • 2012

Indispensable reading, Red Capitalism is an essential resource for anyone considering China’s business strategies in today’s Carl E. Walter Fraser J. T. Howie extremely challenging global economy. Authors Carl Walter and Fraser Howie go deep inside the Chinese financial machine to illuminate the social and political consequences of the unique business model that propelled China to economic powerhouse status, and question whether this rapid ascension really lives up to its reputation. The Fragile Financial Foundation of China’s Extraordinary Rise

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Looking Back at the Policy of Reform and Opening . CHAPTER 2: China’s Fortress Banking System . CHAPTER 3: The Fragile Fortress . CHAPTER 4: China’s Captive Bond Market . CHAPTER 5: The Struggle over China’s Bond Markets . CHAPTER 6: Western Finance, SOE Reform, and China’s Stock Markets . CHAPTER 7: The National Team and China’s Government . . CHAPTER 8: The Forbidden City .

business leadership in China: How to blend best Western Practices with Chinese Wisdom, Revised edition

THE

G LO B A L P OW E R S H I FT OF THE

China Versus the West: The global Power shift of the 21st Century

2 1 ST CENTURY

978-0-470-82972-1 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2012

Ivan Tselichtchev,, a leading specialist on the international and Asian economy and business, presents the most comprehensive picture of the changing power balance between the emerging superpower China and the “old” developed economies of the West: mainly the US, Europe and Japan. Thoroughly analyzing and discussing a wide range of the key, often complicated issues which are now in the focus of the world’s attention, China Versus the West is written in the form of an unconstrained dialogue with the reader, containing a lot of the author’s on-the-spot impressions, interesting facts, remarks and quotations. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: CHINA AS THE WORLD’S LEADING PRODUCING, EXPORTING, AND FINANCIAL POWER: TO WHAT EXTENT, WHERE, AND WHY? PART II: THE GLOBAL DOWNTURN AND BEYOND: WESTERN CAPITALISM AND CHINESE CAPITALISM. PART III: THE CHINA-WEST ECONOMIC WARS: AND THE WINNER IS. . . .

Dr. Frank T. Gallo

How China’s leaders Think: The inside story of China’s Past, Current and future leaders, Revised Paperback

978-0-470-82730-7 • 280pp • Paperback • 2011

Dr. Robert Lawrence Kuhn

In this revised edition of Frank Gallo’s bestselling book, the author brings the story of leadership in China right up to date. With new material on Chinese leadership styles and the challenges of going global, Business Leadership in China is ideal for any international manager who wants to better understand how to blend the best practices of Western leadership with traditional Chinese wisdom. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UNDERSTANDING LEADERSHIP IN CHINA TODAY. PART II: MAKING IT WORK IN CHINA. PART III: WHAT DO WE DO NOW?

I=: >CH>9: HIDGN D; 8=>C6»H E6HI! 8JGG:CI 6C9 ;JIJG: A:69:GH

978-1-118-08590-5 • 576pp • Paperback • 2011

How China’s Leaders Think is based on exclusive access to just declassified Party material as well as unprecedented personal access to China’s upper echelons of power. This extraordinary book scrutinizes 30 years of reform as a backdrop for understanding China’s current and future leaders and for assessing what ongoing reform means for diverse sectors of China and what it portends for the future of China and the world. REVISED EDITION

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: GUIDING PRINCIPLES. PART II: THINKING REFORM. PART III: DOING REFORM. PART IV: REFORM’S FUTURE.

MBA Catalogue 2013

i n T e R n aT i o n a l b u s i n e s s

neW

asian Mergers and acquisitions: Riding the Wave Vikram Chakravarty and Soon Ghee Chua

ASIAN MERGERS & ACQUISITIONS

978-1-118-24709-9 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2012

From the regional fragmentation to public sector dominance to rapid cross-border activities, Asian Mergers and Acquisitions Riding the Wave gives you the reasons why increasing M&A V IK R A M C H A K R AVA RT Y with Asian companies is a trend that is here C H UA S O O N G H EE to stay and how to take advantage of it. Real life case studies take you through everything from the Chinese sea freight sector to the Indian razor blade market, showing what it takes to navigate the tricky M&A waters, and comfortably sail through the M&A execution. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Asia Rewrites the M&A Rules . CHAPTER 2: Asian Companies Are Poised to Triumph in the Merger Endgame . CHAPTER 3: The Risk and Rise of Cross-Border M&A . CHAPTER 4: Transforming Government-Linked . CHAPTER 5: Getting It Right Before You Begin . CHAPTER 6: Due Diligence . CHAPTER 7: A Guide to Successful Post-Merger Integration . CHAPTER 8: Culture Matters . CHAPTER 9: Conclusion .

Managing the global Workforce

GLOBAL DIMENSIONS OF BUSINESS SERIES

Paula Caligiuri, Rutgers University, David Lepak, Rutgers University , and Jaime Bonache, ESADE Business School, Spain

MANAGING THE GLOBAL WORKFORCE

978-1-4051-0732-7 • 230pp • Hardcover • 2010

“...THE compendium on global HR and workforce practices.” Dave Ulrich, Professor, University of Michigan. Partner, The RBL Group

Paula Caligiuri, David Lepak and Jaime Bonache

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to International Dimensions of Human Resource Management . CHAPTER 2: Global Business Strategy: The Foundation for Managing the Global Workforce . CHAPTER 3: Comparative HR Systems: The Context for Managing the Global Workforce . CHAPTER 4: Cross-cultural Differences: The Cultural Lens for Managing the Global Workforce . CHAPTER 5: Global Workforce Planning: The Global Mobility of People, Jobs, and Knowledge . CHAPTER 6: Managing Competencies: Recruitment, Selection, Training and Development of the Global Workforce . CHAPTER 7: Managing Attitudes and Behavior: Motivating and Rewarding the Global Workforce . CHAPTER 8: Conclusions .

neW

The Handbook of Market intelligence: understand, Compete and grow in global Markets

WILEY HANDBOOKS IN FINANCIAL ENGINEERING AND ECONOMETRICS

HAN D BO O K O F

VOLATILITY MODELS AND

THEIR APPLICATIONS Luc Bauwens Christian Hafner Sebastien Laurent

Handbook of Volatility Models and Their applications Luc Bauwens, PhD, Catholic University of Louvain, Christian M . Hafner, PhD, Catholic University of Louvain, and Sebastien Laurent, Phd, Maastricht University 978-0-470-87251-2 • 568pp • Hardcover • 2012

Handbook of Volatility Models and Their Applications explores key concepts and topics essential for modeling the volatility of financial time series, both univariate and multivariate, parametric and non-parametric, high-frequency and low-frequency. Featuring contributions from international experts in the field, the book features numerous examples and applications from real-world projects and cutting-edge research, showing step-by-step how to use various methods accurately and efficiently when assessing volatility rates. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ARCH AND SV. PART II: OTHER MODELS AND METHODS. PART III: REALIZED VOLATILITY.

As the need for effective and top staff rises, Managing the Global Workforce provides the most up to date and topical information on accessing HRM. This book covers the full range of strategic, comparative and crosscultural issues affecting the way a workforce is managed globally.

Hans Hedin, Irmeli Hirvensalo, and Markko Vaarnas

The Handbook of

978-1-119-99364-3 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2011

Get an insider’s look at how some of the world’s most respected international companies use Market Intelligence. The Handbook of Market Intelligence provides over 40 enlightening case studies from companies such as Cisco Systems, ABB, Dunkin’ Brands and Statoil, as well as findings from two global surveys on Market Intelligence programs and trends. It also features a step-by-step roadmap to help companies raise their intelligence ambitions, by using the six Key Success Factors outlined in the World Class Market Intelligence Framework developed by the authors.

Market Intelligence Understand, Compete and Grow in Global Markets

HANS HEDIN, IRMELI HIRVENSALO AND MARKKO VAARNAS

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: MARKET INTELLIGENCE IN GLOBAL ORGANIZATIONS. PART II: ROADMAP TO WORLD CLASS MARKET INTELLIGENCE. PART III: MARKET INTELLIGENCE FOR KEY USER GROUPS. PART IV: DEVELOPING WORLD CLASS MARKET INTELLIGENCE PROGRAMS.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

i n T e R n aT i o n a l b u s i n e s s

Handbook of Modeling Highfrequency Data in finance

WILEY HANDBOOKS IN FINANCIAL ENGINEERING AND ECONOMETRICS

H AN D B O O K O F

MODELING HIGH-FREQUENCY DATA IN FINANCE

Frederi G. Viens, PhD, Purdue University, Maria C. Mariani, PhD, University of Texas at El Paso, and Ionut Florescu, PhD, Stevens Institute of Technology 978-0-470-87688-6 • 456pp • Hardcover • 2011

Handbook of Modeling High-Frequency Data in Finance addresses the many theoretical and practical questions raised by the nature and intrinsic properties of this data. A one-stop compilation of empirical and analytical research, this handbook explores data sampled with high-frequency finance in financial engineering, statistics, and the modern financial business arena. Frederi G. Viens Maria C. Mariani Ionut Florescu

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ANALYSIS OF EMPIRICAL DATA. PART II: LONG RANGE DEPENDENCE MODELS. PART III: ANALYTICAL RESULTS.

Handbook of exchange Rates

WILEY HANDBOOKS IN FINANCIAL ENGINEERING AND ECONOMETRICS

HAN D BO O K O F

EXCHANGE RATES

Jessica James, PhD, Citibank, United Kingdom, Ian Marsh, PhD, City University London, and Lucio Sarno, PhD, City University London 978-0-470-76883-9 • 840pp • Hardcover • 2012

Handbook of Exchange Rates is an impressive compilation of research from more than thirty-five leading researchers and experts on Jessica James Ian W. Marsh the topic. The book is clearly organized into Lucio Sarno five succinct Parts that explore the foreign exchange (FX) market, from its background and economic foundation to current practices, obstacles, and policies in the modern foreign exchange market. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: OVERVIEW PART II: EXCHANGE RATE MODELS AND METHODS. PART III: FX MARKETS AND PRODUCTS. PART IV: FX MARKETS AND POLICY.

bRiCs and beyond - executive lessons on emerging Markets

BRICS AND BEYOND EXECUTIVE LESSONS ON EMERGING MARKETS MADE IN THE USA MADE IN THE EU MASS-PRODUCED IN CHINA INVENTED IN INDIA SPEEDED-UP IN BRAZIL RECREATED IN RUSSIA BRANDED IN SOUTH AFRICA REDESIGNED IN EGYPT TESTED IN KAZAKHSTAN RE-ENGINEERED IN PERU PRICE-BUSTED IN TURKEY MODIFIED IN VIETNAM ADAPTED IN GHANA

STEP H A NIE JONE S

MBA Catalogue 2013

Stephanie Jones, Maastricht School of Management 978-1-119-96269-4 • 302pp • Hardcover • 2012

This international business executive text written especially for executive and MBA students, is based on extensive consulting in emerging economies and several years of experience teaching executive MBA courses around the globe. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . PART I: RISKS. CHAPTER 2: Country Risk . CHAPTER 3: Corporate Social Responsibility . CHAPTER 4: Business Culture . PART II: OPPORTUNITIES. CHAPTER 5: Marketing . CHAPTER 6: Entrepreneurship and Innovation . PART III: PRACTICE. CHAPTER 7: Strategy and Operations . CHAPTER 8: Strategic Alliances . CHAPTER 9: Lessons for Global Business .

i n T e R n aT i o n a l b u s i n e s s

neW

analysis of financial Time series, Third edition

international business – european edition Michael Czinkota, Iikka A. Ronkainen, Michael H. Moffett, Svetla Marinova and Marin Marinov 978-0-470-51029-2 • 632pp • Paperback • 2012

Presenting an up-to-date and complete exploration of international business issues and practice, the text is built upon a strong foundation of theory and includes current examples, cases and insights showing how global businesses apply these concepts. The text examines the role and impact of culture and also includes numerous current world maps, helping learners develop and refine a global perspective. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT. CHAPTER 1: The Nature of International Business . CHAPTER 2: Theory of Trade and Investment . Chapter 3: Culture . CHAPTER 4: Political and Legal Environment . PART 2: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS AND MARKETS. CHAPTER 5: International Financial Markets . CHAPTER 6: Economic Integration . CHAPTER 7: Emerging Markets . PART 3: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS STRATEGY. CHAPTER 8: Entry and Expansion . CHAPTER 9: Strategic Planning, Organization, Implementation and Control . PART 4: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS. CHAPTER 10: Marketing, Logistics and Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 11: Financial Management . CHAPTER 12: International Human Resource Management . CHAPTER 13: Corporate Governance, Accounting and Taxation . PART 5: EMERGING ISSUES. CHAPTER 14: Emerging Issues in International Business . PART 6: CASE STUDIES. 1 . Vietnamese Catfish . 2 . Car Financing in China . 3 . Turkey’s Kriz . 4 . Lifton Hydra Team . 5 . Cosmetics from Poland . 6 . General Motors Russia . 7 . Global Telecom Leaders . 8 . Toyota . 9 . When Diamonds Weep . 10 . Gorjene . 11 . Bolivia Oil and Gas . 12 . BMW Corporate

Ruey S . Tsay, PhD, University of Chicago 978-0-470-41435-4 • 677pp • Hardcover • 2010

Analysis of Financial Time Series provides a broad, mature, and systematic introduction to current financial econometric models and their applications to modeling and prediction of financial time series data. The Third Edition utilizes real-world examples and real financial data throughout the book to apply the models and methods described. The author begins with basic characteristics of financial time series data before covering three main topics: analysis and application of univariate financial time series; the return series of multiple assets; and Bayesian inference in finance methods. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Financial Time Series and Their Characteristics . CHAPTER 2: Linear Time Series Analysis and Its Applications . CHAPTER 3: Conditional Heteroscedastic Models . CHAPTER 4: Nonlinear Models and Their Applications . CHAPTER 5: High-Frequency Data Analysis and Market Microstructure . CHAPTER 6: Continuous-Time Models and Their Applications . CHAPTER 7: Extreme Values, Quantiles, and Value at Risk . CHAPTER 8: Multivariate Time Series Analysis and Its Applications . CHAPTER 9: Principal Component Analysis and Factor Models . CHAPTER 10: Multivariate Volatility Models and Their Applications . CHAPTER 11: State-Space Models and Kalman Filter . CHAPTER 12: Markov Chain Monte Carlo Methods with Applications .

Governanace . 13 . Danfoss China . 14 . Gazprom-Naftogaz . 15 . Wal-Mart .

V I J AY MAHAJAN Author of Africa Rising Author of Africa Rising

Foreword by J.W. Marriott , Chairman and C EO of Marriot t International

You Can’t lead With Your feet on the Desk: building Relationships, breaking Down barriers, and Delivering Profits Ed Fuller 978-0-470-87961-0 • 208pp • Hardcover • 2011

In You Can’t Lead With Your Feet On the Desk, one of America’s leading international businessmen, CEO of Marriott International, explains how to connect, manage, and do business with people in any culture. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Ditch The Desk . CHAPTER 2: The Value Of Values . CHAPTER 3: To Respect Is To Inspire . CHAPTER 4: Trust Must Be Earned . CHAPTER 5: Learn To Communicate . CHAPTER 6: Lead From The Front . CHAPTER 7: The Past Lives On . CHAPTER 8: Cultivate Your Connections .

TH E A R A B WO RL D UNBOUND

The arab World unbound: Tapping into the Power of 350 Million Consumers Vijay Mahajan 978-1-118-07451-0 • 432pp • Hardcover • 2012

This groundbreaking book reveals the myriad opportunities presented by the Arab World’s market of 350 million consumers, who collectively wield the ninth-largest economy in the world. Based on the author’s firsthand research, including hundreds of market visits and more than 600 interviews at companies doing business throughout the region, this book shows how globally interconnected and vibrant the Arab markets are. TAPPING INTO

THE POWER OF 350 MILLION CONSUMERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: DISCOVERING THE ARAB WORLD. CHAPTER 1: Drinking Red Bull in Dahiye . CHAPTER 2: The Diversity of the Arab World . CHAPTER 3: Islam Matters . PART II: TAPPING THE WELL OF ARAB CONSUMERS. CHAPTER 4: Tapping the Arab youth market . CHAPTER 5: Tapping the Arab Middle Class . CHAPTER 6: Tapping into the Arab women market . CHAPTER 7: Tapping into the Arab technology market . CHAPTER 8: Tapping into the Arab media and entertainment market . CHAPTER 9: Tapping into the Arab diaspora .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

Wiley Custom Select gives you the freedom to build your course materials exactly the way you want them. Offer your students a cost-efficient alternative to traditional texts. In a simple 3-step process create a textbook containing the content you want, in the order you want, delivered how you want.

Create your text in just 3 easy steps! Search and Select • Search an extensive collection of Wiley titles and choose from as many different texts as you like. • Arrange the chapters in the order you want. • Upload your own materials.

Customize and Personalize • Select a cover style from a variety of attractive options. • Personalize your book, including title, subtitle, your name, and institution. • Choose from multiple formats—full-color or black & white print text with a variety of binding options, or an eBook.

Preview and Submit • Access an online preview of your full text. • See instant pricing—you know at once exactly how much your text will cost. • Submit your order and we take care of the rest.

Find Out More START EXPLORING TODAY

customselect.wiley.com

Keep Your Course Current Visit WileyDIFFERENCEinBusiness.com where you’ll find:

Wiley’s Weekly Updates news site sparks classroom debate around current events that apply to your business course topics. We save you time by emailing you—every Monday—the most relevant news articles and videos tagged to your textbook and complemented by discussion questions.

Wiley encourages critical thinking with BUsiness Hot topiCs available through Wiley Custom select. Written by leading professionals and academics, these chapter-length modules easily fit into your syllabus and can be packaged with or bound inside your Wiley text.

you can choose from thousands of cases and articles from darden Business publishing to adopt or incorporate into your Wiley textbook. adding flexible and relevant BUsiness Cases to your course helps students learn how to apply concepts in context.

Wiley empowers students to make real-world decisions and apply what they learn in the classroom through a variety of BUsiness siMUlations, across all business school courses.

| WILEY DIFFERENCE IN BUSINESS | LIKE us at: facebook.com/wileybusiness

leaDeRsHiP

neW JEREMY HOPE PETER BUNCE FRANZ RÖÖSLI

DOWNLOADABLE WORKSHEETS AVAILABLE

FACILITATING WITH EASE! THIRD EDITION

facilitating with ease! Core skills for facilitators, Team leaders and Members, Managers, Consultants, and Trainers, Third edition

Leader's Dilemma The

Ingrid Bens, PhD 978-1-118-10774-4 • 256pp • Paperback • 2012

This bestselling book, Facilitating with Ease!, has become the “go-to” reference for anyone who wants to become skilled in the art of facilitation. The thoroughly revised Third Edition includes easy-to-follow instructions, techniques, and hands-on tools. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Understanding Facilitation . CHAPTER 2: Who Can Facilitate? CHAPTER 3: Facilitation Stages . CHAPTER 4: Knowing Your Participants . CHAPTER 5: Creating Participation . CHAPTER 6: Effective Decision Making . CHAPTER 7: Facilitating Conflict . CHAPTER 8: Meeting Management . CHAPTER 9: Process Tools for Facilitators . CHAPTER 10: Process Designs .

neW

GROUP DYNAMICS for C OAC H E S AND LEADERS

Reading the Room: group Dynamics for Coaches and leaders David Kantor, PhD

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Above all, The Leader’s Dilemma is about learning how to change business. Based on best practice and innovation drawn from leaders world-wide who have built and managed successful organizations, this book empowers readers to rethink how we manage organizations in a post-industrial, post credit crunch world where agility in a changing market is the most important remaining source of competitive advantage. HOW TO BUILD AN EMPOWERED AND ADAPTIVE ORGANIZATION WITHOUT LOSING CONTROL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Principle #1 - Values . CHAPTER 2: Principle #2 - Governance . CHAPTER 3: Principle #3 - Transparency . CHAPTER 4: Principle #4 - Teams . CHAPTER 5: Principle #5 - Trust . CHAPTER 6: Principle #6 - Accountability . CHAPTER 7: Principle #7 - Goals . CHAPTER 8: Principle #8 - Rewards . CHAPTER 9: Principle #9 - Planning . CHAPTER 10: Principle #10 - Coordination . CHAPTER 11: Principle #11 - Resources . CHAPTER 12: Principle #12 - Controls . CHAPTER 13: Implementation insights . CHAPTER 14: Make management change your legacy .

LEE G. BOLMAN TERRENCE E. DEAL

LEADING with

MBA Catalogue 2013

leading with soul: an uncommon Journey of spirit, Revised Third edition Lee G. Bolman and Terrence E. Deal 978-0-470-61900-1 • 304pp • Hardcover • 2011

In this new edition of the bestselling book on finding one’s personal path to leadership, Leading with Soul, Bolman illuminates the deeply personal journey to leadership. The Third Edition updates the timeless spiritual message in the light of the turmoil of recent years including recession, the spread of global terrorism, and ethics scandals as well as new insights from the literature of spirituality and work.

S O U L AN UNCOMMON JOURNEY OF SPIRIT

R E V I S E D

CHAPTER 1: Reading the Room: Introduction and Framework . PART I: A COMPLETE LANGUAGE FOR UNDERSTANDING LEADER BEHAVIOR. CHAPTER 2: Level I: Action Stances: The Four-Player Model . CHAPTER 3: Level II: Domains of Communication: Affect, Power, and Meaning . CHAPTER 4: Level III: Systems in Control of Speech . CHAPTER 5: The Behavioral Profile: A Synthesis of Levels I, II, and III . PART II: IDENTITY AND LEADER BEHAVIOR IN HIGH STAKES. CHAPTER 6: Level IV: Stories, Identity, and Structured Behavior . CHAPTER 7: Narrative Purpose . CHAPTER 8: Leader Behavior in High-Stakes Situations . CHAPTER 9: The Heroic Leader in Crisis . CHAPTER 10: Sources and Signs of Moral Corruption in Leaders . PART III: MODELS AND THE ULTIMATE LEADER. CHAPTER 11: From Personal Model to Leadership Model . CHAPTER 12: Building a Leadership Model . CHAPTER 13: A Model for Living . CHAPTER 14: Beyond the Behavioral Profile . CHAPTER 15: A Structural Dynamics Analysis of Barack Obama . AFTERWORD: Where Structural Dynamics Goes from Here

Jeremy Hope, Dr Peter Bunce, and Franz Roosli 978-1-119-97000-2 • 344pp • Hardcover • 2011

978-0-470-90343-8 • 448pp • Hardcover • 2012

In his first book in 10 years, worldrenowned systems psychologist David Kantor applies his research and theory to D AV I D K A N T O R help leaders, consultants and coaches learn to “read” group interactions in order to improve individual and organiza organizational communication and performance.

The leader’s Dilemma: How to build an empowered and adaptive organization Without losing Control

T H I R D

E D I T I O N

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE SEARCH. CHAPTER 1: The Heart of Leadership Lives in the Hearts of Leaders . CHAPTER 2: The Human Heart Is More Than a Pump . CHAPTER 3: The Journey of a Soul . CHAPTER 4: Discovering New Teachers . PART II: CONVICTION. CHAPTER 5: A Place to Start . CHAPTER 6: Vicissitudes of the Journey . CHAPTER 7: Gifts of Leadership . CHAPTER 8: Authorship . CHAPTER 9: Love . CHAPTER 10: Power . CHAPTER 11: Significance . CHAPTER 12: Corporate Community . PART III: SHARING. CHAPTER 13: Summoning the Magic of Stories . CHAPTER 14: Lifting Our Voices in Song . CHAPTER 15: Celebrating Shared Icons . PART IV: A NEW LIFE. CHAPTER 16: The Twilight of Leadership . CHAPTER 17: Deep Refuge . CHAPTER 18: The Legacy .

leaDeRsHiP

Fourth Edition

J?I@9<I> @ J?I@9<I>

Practicing leadership Principles and applications, fourth edition Dr. Arthur Shriberg, Xavier University, and David Shriberg, Loyola University 978-0-470-08698-8 • 320pp • Paperback • 2010

Gi`eZ`gc\j Xe[ 8ggc`ZXk`fej

Practicing Leadership Principles and Applications examines traditional and contemporary approaches to leadership through a multidisciplinary, integrated, and international lens. Authors Arthur Shriberg and David Shriberg encourage students to develop their own leadership styles by building on their personal strengths and talents, while exploring the different approaches to leadership. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Introducing Leadership and Beginning to Form Your Personal Leadership Model . CHAPTER 2: Ethical Leadership . CHAPTER 3: Leadership in a Global and Multicultural Society . CHAPTER 4: Evolution of Western Leadership . CHAPTER 5: Psychology I: Intelligence and Personality . CHAPTER 6: Psychology II: Motivation and Communication . CHAPTER 7: Management and Leadership . CHAPTER 8: Power and Leadership from the Top . CHAPTER 9: Teaming and Leadership . CHAPTER 10: Philosophy and Leadership . CHAPTER 11: Leadership 2 .0 (Virtual Leadership) . CHAPTER 12: Military Leadership . CHAPTER 13: Leading for Environmental Sustainability . CHAPTER 14: Practicing Leadership: It’s Your Turn .

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

G L O BA L E X E C U T I V E

LEADERSHIP I N V E N T O RY Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries O B S E R V E R

global executive leadership inventory (geli) Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries, INSEAD

global executive leadership inventory (geli), facilitator’s guide set

978-0-7879-7418-3 • 8pp • Paperback • 2004

Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries, INSEAD

The Global Executive Leadership Inventory, Observer is a questionnaire that consists of 100 action and behavior-based questions that an observer of the leader fills out about the leader. The questions are designed to measure competency within twelve areas: Envisioning, Empowering, Energizing, Designing & Monitoring, Rewarding & Feedback, Team-Building, Outside Orientation, Global Mindset, Tenacity, Emotional Intelligence, Life Balance, and Resilience to Stress.

global executive leadership inventory (geli), Participant Workbook Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries, INSEAD 978-0-7879-7416-9 • 72pp • Hardcover • 2005

Once you’ve completed Global Executive Leadership Inventory, The Participant Workbook guides you through the feedback and helps to create a development plan. As a result of the GELI process, when you complete this Workbook you will be able to state advantages of and concerns about 360-degree feedback, identify twelve key characteristics of successful global leaders, evaluate your strengths and weaknesses on each of the twelve key characteristics, and develop an action plan that specifies what you will do to improve your leadership competencies.

978-0-7879-6984-4 • 160pp • Paperback • 2005

Global Executive Leadership Inventory (GELI) is your in-depth development tool that offers guidance for understanding your leadership abilities and shows you how to take steps to improvement. The Inventory consists of 100 action- and behavior-based questions that are designed to measure your competency within twelve areas: Visioning, Empowering, Energizing, Designing and Aligning, Rewarding and Feedback, Team Building, Outside Orientation, Global Mindset, Tenacity, Emotional Intelligence, Life Balance, and Resilience to Stress.

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

G L O BA L E X E C U T I V E

LEADERSHIP I N V E N T O RY Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries

S E L F

global executive leadership inventory (geli), self assessment Manfred F. R. Kets de Vries, INSEAD 978-0-7879-7417-6 • 6pp • Paperback • 2004

The Global Executive Leadership Inventory, Self is a questionnaire that consists of 100 action and behavior-based questions that the leader fills out about his or herself.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

leaDeRsHiP

EDGAR H. SCHEIN ORGANIZATIONAL

C U LT U R E

organizational Culture and leadership, fourth edition

The little book of leadership: The 12.5 strengths of Responsible, Reliable, Remarkable leaders That Create Results, Rewards, and Resilience

Edgar H . Schein, MIT Sloan School of Management 978-0-470-19060-9 • 464pp • Paperback • 2010

Regarded as one of the most influential management books of all time, Leadership LEADERSHIP and Organizational Culture transforms the abstract concept of culture into a tool that can be used to better shape the dynamics of organization and change. This Fourth Edition focuses on today’s business realities, drawing on a wide range of contemporary research to redefine culture and demonstrate the crucial role leaders play in successfully applying the principles of culture to achieve their organizational goals. AND

T H

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

HOW TO MAKE EXTRAORDINARY THINGS HAPPEN IN ORGANIZATIONS

KOUZES & POSNER

2 MILLION COPIES SOLD | 25TH ANNIVERSARY

JAMES K OU Z ES

D A LO P! N P W A O E D TH

THE FIFTH EDITION LEADERSHIP CHALLENGE

PART I: ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE AND LEADERSHIP DEFINED. PART II: THE DIMENSIONS OF CULTURE. PART III: THE LEADERSHIP ROLE IN BUILDING, EMBEDDING, AND EVOLVING CULTURE. PART IV: HOW LEADERS CAN MANAGE CULTURE CHANGE. PART V: NEW ROLES FOR LEADERS AND LEADERSHIP.

BARRY POS N E R

THE LEADERSHIP CHALLENGE

The leadership Challenge, fifth edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: MODEL THE WAY. CHAPTER 1: When Leaders Are at Their Best . CHAPTER 2: Clarify Values . CHAPTER 3: Set the Example . PART 2: INSPIRE A SHARED VISION. CHAPTER 4: Envision the Future . CHAPTER 5: Enlist Others . PART 3: CHALLENGE THE PROCESS. CHAPTER 6: Search for Opportunities . CHAPTER 7: Experiment and Take Risks . PART 4: ENABLE OTHERS TO ACT. CHAPTER 8: Foster Collaboration . CHAPTER 9: Strengthen Others . PART 5: ENCOURAGE THE HEART. CHAPTER 10: Recognize Contributions . CHAPTER 11: Celebrate the Values and Victories . CHAPTER 12: Leadership Is Everyone’s Business .

MBA Catalogue 2013

The Little Book of Leadership combines classic style with the latest innovations to challenges the reader to self-evaluate every facet of their leadership, coaching, and communication abilities in order to better formulate what actions can be taken to improve their natural skills. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Leadership Insight . CHAPTER 2: Mental Leadership . CHAPTER 3: Resilient Leadership . CHAPTER 4: Reality Leadership . CHAPTER 5: Coach Leadership . CHAPTER 6: (The New) Situational Leadership . CHAPTER 7: Measurement Leadership . CHAPTER 8: Opportunity Leadership . CHAPTER 9: Guts Leadership . CHAPTER 10: Personal Leadership . CHAPTER 11: Celebration Leadership . CHAPTER 12: Next-Level Leadership .

LEADERSHIP L E A D E R S , F O L L OW E R S , E N V I R O N M E N T S

leadership Arthur Padilla 978-0-470-90720-7 • 400pp • Hardcover • 2012

978-0-470-65172-8 • 416pp • Hardcover • 2012

The most trusted resource on becoming a leader, The Leadership Challenge, is now Fifth Edition updated and revised for a new generation. The Fifth Edition delivers the latest research 25th Anniversary and case studies, and offers inspiring new stories of real people achieving extraordinary results. The authors’ central theme remains the same and is more relevant today than ever: “Leadership is Everyone s Business.” Their “five practices” and “ten commitments” have been proven by hundreds of thousands of dedicated, successful leaders.

978-0-470-94457-8 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2011

James M . Kouzes, Santa Clara University, and Barry Z . Posner, Santa Clara University

HOW TO MAKE EXTRAORDINARY THINGS HAPPEN IN ORGANIZATIONS

Jeffrey Gitomer and Dr. Paul Hersey (Foreword by)

AR T PADI L L A

Leadership is a “process,” not a person. The dynamics of leadership involve leaders, followers and their environments — the organizational contexts within which leading and following take place. Padilla’s Leadership brings a more holistic and comprehensive view to the leadership-followership process by focusing on all three of these critical aspects.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Prologue . CHAPTER 2: On Leadership . CHAPTER 3: Self-Awareness and Skill Development . CHAPTER 4: The Leaders . CHAPTER 5: The Followers . CHAPTER 6: Contexts and Environments . CHAPTER 7: Toxic Leadership . CHAPTER 8: Epilogue .

leaDeRsHiP

THIRD EDITION

Diagnosing and Changing ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE BASED ON THE COMPETING VALUES FRAMEWORK

KIM S. CAMERON & ROBERT E. QUINN

Diagnosing and Changing organizational Culture: based on the Competing Values framework, Third edition Kim S. Cameron, University of Michigan, and Robert E. Quinn, University of Michigan 978-0-470-65026-4 • 288pp • Paperback • 2011

Diagnosing and Changing Organizational Culture provides validated instruments for diagnosing organizational culture and management competency; a theoretical framework (competing values) for understanding organizational culture; and a systematic strategy and methodology for changing organizational culture and personal behavior. The Third Edition includes online versions of the MSAI and OCAI assessments and new discussions of the implications of national cultural profiles. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: An Introduction to Changing Organizational Culture . CHAPTER 2: The Organizational Culture Assessment Instrument . CHAPTER 3: The Competing Values Framework . CHAPTER 4: Constructing an Organizational Culture Profile . CHAPTER 5: Using the Framework to Diagnose and Change Organizational Culture . CHAPTER 6: Individual Change as a Key to Culture Change . CHAPTER 7: A Condensed Formula for Organizational Culture Change .

“Discover who you are as a leader with the world’s top experts on the subject!” —MAR SH ALL GOLDSMI T H

{ NEW AND REVISED }

DISCOVERING

THE LEADER IN YOU How to Realize Your

Discovering the Leader in You is derived from CCL’s most popular and best known leadership program: Leadership Development Program (LDP). This books shows readers what it looks like to fit in a leadership role and provides a system of self-discovery that allows them to explore the roles in their organization for which they are best suited. CENTER FOR CREATIVE LEADERSHIP

Ranked in the Top 5 Worldwide for Executive Education by BusinessWeek and Financial Times

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Where Does Leadership Fit in Your Life? CHAPTER 2: Organizational Realities, Demands, and Expectations . CHAPTER 3: Your Leadership Vision . CHAPTER 4: Your Leadership Motivation and Values . CHAPTER 5: Your Leadership Profile . CHAPTER 6: Personal Realities, Demands, and Expectations . CHAPTER 7: The Leader in You .

ELEPHANT

DISCOVERING

THE LEADER IN YOU

Sara N. King and David Altman

in the ROOM HOW RELATIONSHIPS MAKE OR BREAK THE SUCCESS OF LEADERS AND ORGANIZATIONS

978-0-470-60531-8 • 160pp • Paperback • 2011

From the Center for Creative Leadership W O R K B O O K (CCL) comes a highly accessible workbook based on the concepts outlined in the revised and updated edition of Discovering the Leader in You. The workbook contains a variety of questions and exercises designed to help professionals reflect on, examine, explore, and discover concepts and issues related to their role as leaders. SARA N. KING & DAVID G. ALTMAN

CENTER FOR CREATIVE LEADERSHIP Ranked in the Top 5 Worldwide for Executive Education by BusinessWeek and Financial Times

978-0-470-49888-0 • 208pp • Hardcover • 2011

SARA N. KING, DAVID G. ALTMAN & ROBERT J. LEE

THE

Discovering the leader in You Workbook

Sara N. King, David Altman, and Robert J. Lee

LEADERSHIP POTENTIAL

FOREWORD BY PETER SENGE

“Discover who you are as a leader with the world’s top experts on the subject!” —MARSHALL GOLDSMITH

Discovering the leader in You: How to realize Your leadership Potential, new and Revised

DIANA MCLAIN SMITH

elephant in the Room: How Relationships Make or break the success of leaders and organizations Diana McLain Smith, and Peter Senge (Foreword by) 978-1-118-01542-1 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2011

A systematic look at how relationships determine the success of leaders and their enterprises, along with tools to help strengthen and change them, Elephant in the Room puts relationships at the center of what leaders must understand and master to succeed.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UNDERSTANDING RELATIONSHIPS. CHAPTER 1: Present and Unaccounted For . CHAPTER 2: The Life and Death of a Relationship . CHAPTER 3: It’s a Matter of Perspective . PART II: STRENGTHENING RELATIONSHIPS. CHAPTER 4: Using the Heat of the Moment . CHAPTER 5: Mapping Relationships . CHAPTER 6: Focusing Investments, Managing Costs . PART III: TRANSFORMING RELATIONSHIPS. CHAPTER 7: Navigating Change Over Time . CHAPTER 8: Disrupting Patterns . CHAPTER 9: Reframing Each Other . CHAPTER 10: Revising What You Know . APPENDIX A: A Guide to Behavioral Repertoires . APPENDIX B: The Ladder of Reflection .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

leaDeRsHiP

neW

THE ‘I’ OF LEADERSHIP Strategies for Seeing, Being and Doing

The ‘i’ of leadership: evolution, strategy and self-Management Nigel Nicholson, London Business School 978-1-118-56743-2 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2013

Nigel Nicholson explains the emergence of leaders in different epochs and cultures. His approach is rooted in evolutionary Nigel Nicholson science and the latest thinking about how cultures and leadership co-evolve over time and place. The essence of leadership is the successful crafting of an iden identity that merges the leader and the surrounding culture or ‘zeitgeist’. The ‘I’ of leadership is this merger of individual and culture. Sixteen chapters present different sets of stories and challenges and illustrate how different leaders in all walks of life, have responded to critical turning points. The chapters are peppered with stories and examples from the lives of leaders, from the sports stadium to the office of the CEO. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: It goes with the territory – Leadership moments . CHAPTER 2: Leadership in the wild – The evolution of power . CHAPTER 3: A very short history of leadership . CHAPTER 4: Leadership as Strategy: Situations, Processes and Qualities (SPQ) . CHAPTER 5: Who Am I? Leadership Qualities and the Compass Question . CHAPTER 6: The “Eye” of Leadership… . .The Law of the Situation . CHAPTER 7: The Adaptive Leader – Leadership Processes . CHAPTER 8: Dynamic Leadership – Shaping and discovery . CHAPTER 9: Reading the World – A leadership conundrum . CHAPTER: 10 Born to Lead? – Leaders lost and found . CHAPTER 11: Who’s Your Buddy? Critical Leader Relationships . CHAPTER 12: Destiny, Drama and Deliberation – the lives of leaders . CHAPTER 13: The ‘I’ of Leadership – Inside the Mind of the Leader . CHAPTER 14: Games Leaders Play – Finding the narrative . CHAPTER 15: The Self-Management of Leadership – You, others & organization . CHAPTER 16: Can Leaders Save the World? Vision, Identity and Passion .

MBA Catalogue 2013

neW

Pa o l o G u e n z i a n d D i n o R u ta

leaDinG teams

leading Teams: ideas and action in sport and Management Dino Ruta and Paolo Guenzi, Bocconi School of Management 9781118392096 • 224pp • Paperback • 2013

Based on the authors’ work with top sports coaches and corporate executive programmes at Bocconi Business School, their new book brings together the latest new insights on team leadership and motivation, to provide a distinctive and vivid new book on the skills needed to lead teams. Containing tools and techniques from sports that show how top coaches optimize teamwork, this distinctive new model of team leadership is useful for both coaches and managers. Tools and Techniques for successful Team leadership from The sporTs World

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Why Sport and Management . CHAPTER 2: Managerial Models for Team Leadership . CHAPTER 3: The Trainer as a Manager . CHAPTER 4: The Trainer as a Coach . CHAPTER 5: A New Model of Team Leadership . CHAPTER 6: Team Leadership: Interviews with 18 Professional Coaches .

The Third Edition of the

WILEY ENCYCLOPEDIA OF MANAGEMENT

978-1-119-97251-8 • £1499 £1199 with discount • Hardback • Publishing July 2013

Providing comprehensive coverage of the field of management for scholars, students and professionals. l

Fourteen volume landmark work of reference

Revised and updated to chart the major developments that have occurred in: digital technologies; ethics and governance-related issues; innovation; emerging markets; organizational networks; and new avenues of sustainable business growth

Contains an entirely new volume on Technology & Innovation

Now offers users a fully searchable online resource linked to the wider literature and to an associated database of Handbooks and Journals in the field.

on i t a lic unt b pu isco e pr 0% d 2013 l cia f 2 ne e Sp er o to Ju off up

ManageMenT anD ob

“This book is truly amazing—actually, a masterpiece. It tells the story of the human condition.”—From Foreword by WARREN BENNIS

DRIVEN TO LE A D Good, Bad, and

Misguided leadership

PA U L R . L A W R E N C E H A RVA R D B U S I N E S S S C H O O L

Driven to lead: good, bad, and Misguided leadership Paul R . Lawrence, Harvard Business School 978-0-470-62384-8 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2010

In Driven to Lead, Harvard Business School professor Paul Lawrence updates the four drive theory of human behavior with the latest brain research and reveals how this theory can be used to explain and even predict the best and worst in leadership behavior.

CONSULTING

Peter Block 978-0-470-62074-8 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2011

This thoroughly revised and updated Third Edition of Peter Block’s groundbreaking book explores the latest thinking on consultation. Flawless Consulting includes new insights about how we can organize our consulting around discovering the strengths, positive examples, and gifts of the client organization or community. A GUIDE TO GETTING YOUR EXPERTISE USED

THIRD EDITION

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: How Much Can We Hope For? PART I: THE LEADERSHIP BRAIN. CHAPTER 2: A Brain Designed for Leadership? CHAPTER 3: Darwin Rediscovered: Did the Brain Evolve Leadership Capabilities? PART II: HISTORIC LEADERSHIP PATTERNS. CHAPTER 4: All About Leaders: Good, Bad, and Misguided . CHAPTER 5: Leadership and the Historic Evolution of Political Institutions . CHAPTER 6: Leadership of Economic Institutions: The Rise of Corporations . CHAPTER 7: Leadership in Institutions of Human Meaning: Religion, Art, and Science . PART III: LEADERSHIP IN CONTEMPORARY AFFAIRS. CHAPTER 8: Keeping on Track: Leadership in Contemporary Corporations . CHAPTER 9: A Worldwide Swindle: By Banking Leaders-w/o-Conscience? CHAPTER 10: Keeping a Global Economy and a Global Community on Track . CHAPTER 11: Keeping on Track by Practicing Good/Moral Leadership . CHAPTER 12: Renewing the Story of Human Progress with Darwin’s Help . Appendix: Darwin Misunderstood .

CHAPTER 1: A Consultant by Any Other Name . . . CHAPTER 2: Techniques Are Not Enough . CHAPTER 3: Flawless Consulting . CHAPTER 4: Contracting Overview . CHAPTER 5: The Contracting Meeting . CHAPTER 6: The Agonies of Contracting . CHAPTER 7: The Internal Consultant . CHAPTER 8: Understanding Resistance . CHAPTER 9: Dealing with Resistance . CHAPTER 10: From Diagnosis to Discovery . CHAPTER 11: Whole System Discovery . CHAPTER 12: Discovering Gifts, Capacities and Possibilities . CHAPTER 13: Get the Picture . CHAPTER 14: Preparing for Feedback . CHAPTER 15: Managing the Meeting for Action . CHAPTER 16: Implementation . CHAPTER 17: Elements of Engagement . CHAPTER 18: Consultant As Teacher . CHAPTER 19: The Heart of the Matter .

THE HANDBOOK of

KNOWLEDGE-BASED

COACHING

Julian Birkinshaw, London Business School

Leni Wildflower (Editor) and Diane Brennan (Editor)

TO PRACTICE

The Handbook of Knowledge-Based Coaching is designed for students of coaching and LENI WILDFLOWER | DIANE BRENNAN coaches wishing to enhance their practice. It provides comprehensive coverage of all of the theoretical constructs that are used in current coaching practices, and spans theories ranging from adult psychology and neuroscience to self-help and spiritual traditions. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: HUMAN BEHAVIOR AND COACHING. PART II: HUMAN INTERACTION AND COACHING. PART III: ORGANIZATIONS, LEADERSHIP, AND COACHING. PART IV: TRADITIONS FROM SELF-HELP, PERSONAL GROWTH, AND SPIRITUALITY. PART V: COACHING SPECIFIC POPULATIONS. PART VI: CREATIVE APPLICATIONS. PART VII: COMPONENTS OF EFFECTIVE COACHING.

MBA Catalogue 2013

Reinventing Management: smarter Choices for getting Work Done, Revised and updated edition

The Handbook of Knowledge-based Coaching: from Theory to Practice

978-0-470-62444-9 • 432pp • Hardcover • 2011 FROM THEORY

PETER BLOCK F L AW L E S S

flawless Consulting: a guide to getting Your expertise used, Third edition

978-1-118-37590-7 • 312pp • Hardcover • 2012

The best tool for understanding the nature of management in the modern organizations, Reinventing Management develops a comprehensive framework for clarifying the choices that make up a firm’s management model. Four core dimensions of management are identified -- setting objectives, motivating employees, coordinating activities, making decisions- and for each one the key choices are identified and discussed. “…issues both a practical outline of novel management approaches and a rallying cry: Put leadership and management back on equal footing!” H A R VA R D B U S I N E S S R E V I E W

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Why Management Failed . CHAPTER 2: What’s Your Management Model? CHAPTER 3: Coordinating Activities: From Bureaucracy to Emergence . CHAPTER 4: Making and Communicating Decisions: From Hierarchy to Collective Wisdom . CHAPTER 5: Setting Objectives: From Alignment to Obliquity . CHAPTER 6: Motivating Employees: From Extrinsic to Intrinsic Motivation . CHAPTER 7: Four Models of Management . CHAPTER 8: The Change Agent’s Agenda . CHAPTER 9: The Leader’s Agenda . Epilogue: Broadening the Debate on Reinventing Management .

ManageMenT anD ob

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 2ND EDITION

organizational behaviour, second edition Ray French, Charlotte Rayner, Gary Rees and Sally Rumbles 978-0-470-71033-3 • 692pp • Paperback • 2011

Combining a managerial approach, this text enables existing and aspiring managers to meet increasingly challenging performance targets, with a rounded and critical perspective, that questions and looks deeper into the research behind the theories. The concise coverage of the core topics can be applied to both one-semester and year-long teaching and learning patterns. In addition, this colourful and well-presented text includes full journal articles at the end of each section and excellent case material. Ray French • Charlotte Rayner Gary Rees • Sally Rumbles

John Schermerhorn Jr • James Hunt • Richard Osborn

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1 What is organizational behaviour? JOURNAL ARTICLE . PART 2: INDIVIDUAL DIFFERENCES AND THEIR RELEVANCE TO WORK. CHAPTER 2 Perception, personality and values . CHAPTER 3 Learning, reinforcement and self-management . CHAPTER 4 Motivation and empowerment . JOURNAL ARTICLE . PART 3: MANAGING THE ORGANIZATION. CHAPTER 5 Changing worlds and the design of work . CHAPTER 6 Organizational structure and design . CHAPTER 7 Organizational culture . JOURNAL ARTICLE . PART 4: PEOPLE, PROCESSES AND PERFORMANCE. CHAPTER 8 Groups and teams . CHAPTER 9 Leadership . CHAPTER 10 Power, politics and decision making in organizations . CHAPTER 11 Communication, confl ict and negotiation in organizations . CHAPTER 12 Organizational change . JOURNAL ARTICLE . PART 5: CASE STUDIES.

FIFTH EDITION

BECOMING A MASTER MANAGER A Competing Values Approach

Quinn | Faerman | Thompson | McGrath | St. Clair

neW FRANK J. LANDY

JEFFREY M. CONTE

WORK IN THE 21ST CENTURY

Work in the 21st Century, fourth edition Frank J. Landy and Jeffrey M. Conte 978-1-118-29120-7 • 720pp • Hardcover • 2013

FOURTH EDITION

Now in its 4th edition, Work in the 21st Century: An Introduction to Industrial and Organizational Psychology is the most current, engaging, and highly regarded text for the industrial and organizational psychology course. The fourth edition retains the 14-chapter format and the 4-color design, which brings I-O psychology to life, especially with the use of newsworthy color photographs. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: FUNDAMENTALS. CHAPTER 1: What Is Industrial and Organizational Psychology? CHAPTER 2: Methods and Statistics in I-O Psychology . PART 2: INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY. CHAPTER 3: Individual Differences and Assessment . CHAPTER 4: Job Analysis and Performance . CHAPTER 5: Performance Measurement . CHAPTER 6: Staffing Decisions . CHAPTER 7: Training and Development . PART 3: ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY. CHAPTER 8: The Motivation to Work . CHAPTER 9: Attitudes, Emotions, and Work . CHAPTER 10: Stress and Worker Well-Being . CHAPTER 11: Fairness and Diversity in the Workplace . CHAPTER 12: Leadership . CHAPTER 13: Teams in Organizations . CHAPTER 14: The Organization of Work Behavior .

becoming a Master Manager: a Competing Values approach, fifth edition Robert E. Quinn, Sue R. Faerman, Michael P. Thompson, Michael McGrath and Lynda S. St. Clair 978-0-470-28466-7 • 384pp • Paperback • 2011

Becoming a Master Manager, 5th Edition by Quinn et al. is built on a solid foundation of both theory and empirical evidence that provides a compelling case for why critical managerial and leadership competencies are important. The competing values framework offers future managers an enduring foundation for analyzing the most appropriate behaviors for achieving organizational goals. TABLE OF CONTENTS: INTRODUCTION The Competing Values Approach to Management The Evolution of Management ModelsThe Competing Values FrameworkOrganizing the Learning Process - ALAPA Core Competency: Thinking Critically . MODULE 1: CREATING AND SUSTAINING COMMITMENT AND COHESION. Competency 1-1 Understanding Self and Others . Competency 1-2 Communicating Honestly and Effectively . Competency 1-3 Menoring and Developing Others . Competency 1-4 Managing Groups and Leading Teams . Competency 1-5 Managing and Encouraging Constructive Conflict . MODULE 2: ESTABLISHING AND MAINTAINING STABILITY AND CONTINUITY. Competency 2-1 Organizing Information Flows . Competency 2-2 Working and Managing Across Functions . Competency 2-3 Planning and Coordinating Projects . Competency 2-4 Measuring and Monitoring Performance and Quality . Competency 2-5 Encouraging and Enabling Compliance . MODULE 3: IMPROVING PRODUCTIVITY AND INCREASING PROFITABILITY. Competency 3-1 Developing and Communicating a Vision . Competency 3-2 Setting Goals and Objectives . Competency 3-3 Motivating Self and Others . Competency 3-4 Designing and Organizing . Competency 3-5 Managing Execution and Driving for Result . MODULE 4: PROMOTING CHANGE AND ENCOURAGING ADAPTABILITY. Competency 4-1 Using Power Ethically and Effectively . Competency 4-2 Championing and Selling New Ideas . Competency 4-3 Fueling and Fostering Innovation . Competency 4-4 Negotiating Agreement and Commitment . Competency 4-5 Implementing and Sustaining Change . CONCLUSION INTEGRATION AND THE ROAD TO MASTERY INTEGRATION AND BEHAVIORAL COMPLEXITY. How Master Managers See the World . The Leveraging Power of Lift . The Never-ending Road to Mastery .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

ManageMenT anD ob

hanDBook oF

organIzaTIonaL LEarnIng & knowLEDgE ManagEMEnT sEConD EDITIon

Handbook of organizational learning and Knowledge Management, second edition Mark Easterby-Smith (Editor), Lancaster University, and Marjorie A. Lyles (Editor), Indiana University

Optimization Modeling with Spreadsheets

Kenneth R. Baker, PhD, Dartmouth College 978-0-470-92863-9 • 432pp • Hardcover • 2011

Second Edition

The fully revised and updated version of this successful Handbook is welcomed by management scholars world-wide. By bringing together the latest approaches from the leading experts in organizational learning & knowledge management the volume provides a unique and valuable overview of current thinking about how organizations accumulate ‘knowledge’ and learn from experience.

With its accessible and comprehensive presentation, Optimization Modeling with Spreadsheets is an excellent book for courses on deterministic models, optimization, and Kenneth R. Baker spreadsheet modeling at the upper-undergraduate and graduate levels. Developed and extensively classroom-tested by the author, the Second Edition features a systematic approach that equips readers with the skills to apply optimization tools effectively without the need to rely on specialized algorithms.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: DISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES. PART II: ORGANIZATIONAL LEARNING AND LEARNING ORGANIZATIONS. PART III: KNOWLEDGE AND ITS MANAGEMENT IN ORGANIZATIONS. PART IV: LEARNING AND KNOWLEDGE IN INTERNATIONAL CONTEXTS.

CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Spreadsheet Models for Optimization . CHAPTER 2: Linear Programming: Allocation, Covering and Blending Models . CHAPTER 3: Linear Programming Network Models . CHAPTER 4: Sensitivity Analysis in Linear Programs . CHAPTER 5: Linear Programming: Data Envelopment Analysis . CHAPTER 6: Integer Programming: Binary Choice Models . CHAPTER 7: Integer Programming: Logical Constraints . CHAPTER 8: Nonlinear Programming . CHAPTER 9: Heuristic Solutions with the Evolutionary Solver .

978-0-470-97264-9 • 710pp • Paperback • 2011 EDITED BY

Mark EasTErBY-sMITh anD

MarjorIE a. LYLEs

HANDBOOK OF

GENDER, WORK & ORGANIZATION

Handbook of gender, Work and organization Emma Jeanes (Editor), University of Exeter, David Knights (Co-Editor), Keele University, and Patricia Yancey Martin (Co-Editor), Florida State University 978-1-4443-9472-6 • 496pp • Hardcover • 2011

EDITED BY

This must-have reference represents a remarkably complete, detailed and extensive review of the field of gender, work, and organization in the second decade of the 21st century. The authors of Handbook of Gender, Work and Organization represent eight countries and many disciplines including management, sociology, political science, and gender studies. The chapters offer both reviews and empirical findings, and insights and challenges for further work. EMMA L. JEANES,

Scheduling in Supply Chains Using Mixed Integer Programming Tadeusz Sawik

DAVID KNIGHTS,

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: HISTORIES AND PHILOSOPHIES OF GENDER, WORK AND ORGANIZATION. PART II: EMBODYING ORGANIZATIONS, ORGANIZING BODIES AND REGULATING IDENTITIES. PART III: ORGANIZING WORK AND THE GENDERED ORGANIZATION. PART IV: DIVERSITY IN/AND MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS. PART V: GLOBALIZATION AND GENDER IN/AND MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS.

MBA Catalogue 2013

scheduling in supply Chains using Mixed integer Programming Tadeusz Sawik, PhD, AGH University of Science and Technology in Krakow, Poland 978-0-470-93573-6 • 492pp • Hardcover • 2011

PATRICIA YANCEY MARTIN

optimization Modeling with spreadsheets, second edition

Supplier 1

Featuring a unified and systematic presentation, Scheduling in Supply Chains Using Mixed Integer Programming provides state-of-the-art MIP modeling and solutions approaches, equipping readers with the knowledge and tools to model and solve real-world supply chain scheduling problems in make-to-order manufacturing. Drawing upon the author’s own research, the book explores MIP approaches and examples-which are modeled on actual supply chain scheduling problems in high-tech industries . Producer

Customers

Supplier m

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SHORT-TERM SCHEDULING IN SUPPLY CHAINS. PART II: MEDIUMTERM SCHEDULING IN SUPPLY CHAINS. PART III: COORDINATED SCHEDULING IN SUPPLY CHAINS.

ManageMenT anD ob

Fundamentals of

Supp S upply Chain Theoryy

fundamentals of supply Chain Theory Lawrence V. Snyder, PhD, Lehigh University, and Zuo-Jun Max Shen, PhD, University of California at Berkeley 978-0-470-52130-4 • 400pp • Hardcover • 2011

Addressing the need for the study of supply chain management to evolve at the same Lawrence V. Snyder pace as it’s real-world practice, Fundamentals Zuo-Jun Max Shen of Supply Chain Theory presents the methodology and foundations of the topic and also demonstrates how recent developments build upon classic models. The authors focus on strategic and tactical aspects of supply chain management, covering a broad range of topics from forecasting, inventory management, and facility location to process flexibility, contracting, and auctions. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Forecasting and Demand Modeling . CHAPTER 3: Deterministic Inventory Models . CHAPTER 4: Stochastic Inventory Models . CHAPTER 5: Multi-Echelon Inventory Models . CHAPTER 6: Dealing with Uncertainty in Inventory Optimization . CHAPTER 7: Facility Location Models . CHAPTER 8: Dealing with Uncertainty in Facility Location . CHAPTER 9: Process Flexibility . CHAPTER 10: The Bullwhip Effect . CHAPTER 11: Supply Chain Contracts . CHAPTER 12:Auctions . Appendix A: Multiple-CHAPTER Problems . Appendix B: How to Write Proofs: A Short Cou rse . Appendix C: Helpful Formulas . Appendix D: Langrangian Relaxation .

WILEY HANDBOOKS IN OPERATIONS RESEARCH A N D

MANAGEMENT SCIENCE

HANDBOOK OF

INTEGRATED RISK MANAGEMENT IN

GLOBAL SUPPLY CHAINS EDITED BY

Panos Kouvelis Lingxiu Dong Onur Boyabatli Rong Li

MANAGEMENT AND

Management and organization Theory: a Jossey-bass Reader Jeffrey A . Miles, University of the Pacific 978-1-118-00895-9 • 480pp • Paperback • 2012

A “must-have” for any MBA/PhD in management and organizations, this reader is the first to name, describe, and explore each of Jeffrey A. Miles the top 50 most popular, most researched, and most used management and organization theories to date. Management and Organization Theory includes key instruments used to measure variables in each theory and examines pertinent questions about the theory: strengths and weaknesses, practical applications, and the seminal articles published on each theory.

978-0-470-53512-7 • 624pp • Hardcover • 2011

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATIONS AND OVERVIEW. PART II: INTEGRATED RISK MANAGEMENT: OPERATIONS AND FINANCE INTERFACE. PART III: SUPPLY CHAIN FINANCE. PART IV: OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES. PART V: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS.

Pippa Bourne

neW

ORGANIZATION THEORY

Panos Kouvelis, PhD, Washington University in St. Louis, Lingxiu Dong, PhD, Washington University in St. Louis, Onur Boyabatli, PhD, Singapore Management University, and Rong Li, PhD, Singapore Management University

Handbook of Integrated Risk Management in Global Supply Chains is an essential reference for academics and practitioners in the areas of supply chain management, global logistics, management science, and industrial engineering who gather, analyze, and draw results from data. Contributions from leading academics and researchers provide an action-based framework that captures real issues, implementation challenges, and concepts emerging from industry studies.

Mike Bourne

A Jossey-Bass reader

Handbook of integrated Risk Management in global supply Chains

Handbook of Corporate Performance Management Mike Bourne and Pippa Bourne

H A N D B O O K

O F

Corporate Performance Management

978-0-470-66936-5 • 280pp • Hardcover • 2011

The Handbook of Corporate Performance Management is the essential guide to using performance measurement and management to get the best out of your business. This book will provide you with the tools and approaches to help translate your strategy into action and make you aware of the pitfalls to be avoided.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Performance and the Role of Measurement . CHAPTER 2: Practical Tools for Measuring Performance . CHAPTER 3: Designing the System . CHAPTER 4: Managing Implementation . CHAPTER 5: Assessing and Managing Change . CHAPTER 6: Target Setting . CHAPTER 7: Linking Rewards to Performance . CHAPTER 8: Managing with Measures – Statistical Process Control . CHAPTER 9: Using Measures – Performance Reviews . CHAPTER 10: Using Measures to Manage – Challenging Strategy . CHAPTER 11: Keeping Your Measurement Process up to Date . CHAPTER 12: Measuring Performance of People . CHAPTER 13: Measuring Customers . CHAPTER 14: Measuring Process Performance . CHAPTER 15: Measuring Competence and Resource Development . CHAPTER 16: Measuring Financial Performance . CHAPTER 17: Measuring Sustainability . CHAPTER 18: Creating a Culture of High Performance . CHAPTER 19: Leadership Vignettes . CHAPTER 20: Bringing It All Together .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

ManageMenT anD ob

neW

“Packed with insight, drawn from cutting-edge research, and squarely aimed at 21st century leaders seeking to build collaborative, self-reﬂective teams.” —DAVID GERGEN, professor of public service, Harvard Kennedy School; senior political analyst, CNN; adviser to four U.S. presidents

FO R EWO R D B Y E D GA R H . S C H E I N

teaming author of Organizational Culture and Leadership

How Organizations

Learn, Innovate, and Compete in the Knowledge Economy

FOREWORD BY EDGAR H. SCHEIN

Teaming: How organizations learn, innovate, and Compete in the Knowledge economy Amy C. Edmondson, Harvard Business School, and Edgar H. Schein 978-0-7879-7093-2 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2012

Based on over a decade of research on highperformance teams in hospitals, factories, corAmy C. Edmondson porations, and NASA, HBS Professor Amy Edmondson reveals “teaming” as the competitive advantage in establishing how works gets done and how leaders make it happen in organizations. With Teaming, leaders can shape these factors by encouraging reflection, creating psychological safety, and overcoming defensive interpersonal dynamics that inhibit the sharing of ideas. HARVARD BUSINESS SCHOOL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: TEAMING. CHAPTER 1: A New Way of Working . CHAPTER 2: Teaming to Learn, Innovate, and Compete . PART II: ORGANIZING TO LEARN. CHAPTER 3: The Power of Framing . CHAPTER 4: Making It Safe to Team . CHAPTER 5: Failing Better to Succeed Faster . CHAPTER 6: Teaming Across Boundaries . PART III: EXECUTION-AS-LEARNING. CHAPTER 7: Putting Teaming and Learning to Work . CHAPTER 8: Leadership Makes It Happen .

John R. Schermerhorn, Jr.

introduction to Management, Twelfth edition, international student Version

Author of Organizational Culture and Leadership

LEADING C U LT U R E CHANGE IN G L BAL

ORGANIZATIONS ALIGNING CULTURE and STRATEGY

978-0-470-90884-6 • 240pp • Hardcover • 2012

Filled with case studies from firms such as GT Automotive, GE Healthcare China, Vale, and Dominos, among others, Leading Culture Change in Global Organizations combines twenty years of research and survey results to illustrate a critical set of cultural dynamics that firms need to manage in order to remain competitive. Each chapter uses a case as a means to illustrate an important aspect of culture change focusing on seven common culture-change dilemmas including creating a strategic alignment, keeping strategy simple, and more. I N T E R N AT I O N A L I N ST I T U T E FO R M A N AG E M E N T D E V E LO P M E N T ( I M D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Building a High-Performance Business Culture . CHAPTER 2: Supporting the Front Line . CHAPTER 3: Creating Strategic Alignment . CHAPTER 4: Creating One Culture Out of Many . CHAPTER 5: Exporting Culture Change . CHAPTER 6: Building a Global Business in an Emerging Market . CHAPTER 7: Building a Global Business from an Emerging Market . CHAPTER 8: Building for the Future: Translating Knowledge into Action .

ROBERT F. HARTLEY

PART I: MANAGEMENT. CHAPTER 1: Introducing Management . CHAPTER 2: Management Learning Past to Present . CHAPTER 3: Ethics and Social Responsibility . PART II: ENVIRONMENT. CHAPTER 4: Environment and Sustainability . CHAPTER 5: Global Management and Cultural Diversity . CHAPTER 6: Entrepreneurship and New Ventures . PART III: PLANNING AND CONTROLLING. CHAPTER 7: Information and Decision Making . CHAPTER 8 Planning Processes and Techniques . CHAPTER 9: Control Processes and Systems . CHAPTER 10: Strategy and Strategic Management . PART IV: ORGANIZING. CHAPTER 11: Organization Structures and Design . CHAPTER 12: Organization Culture and Change . CHAPTER 13: Human Resource Management . PART V: LEADING. CHAPTER 14: Leading and Leadership Development . CHAPTER 15: Individual Behavior . CHAPTER 16: Motivation Theory and Practice . CHAPTER 17: Teams and Teamwork . CHAPTER 18: Communication and Collaboration . PART VI: CONTROLLING. CHAPTER 19: Operations and Services Management .

MBA Catalogue 2013

Management Mistakes and successes, Tenth edition Robert F. Hartley, Cleveland State University’s College of Business 978-0-470-53052-8 • 400pp • Paperback • 2010

10th Edition

25 t h Anniversary Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Daniel Denison, International Institute for Management Development (IMD) in Lausanne, Switzerland, Robert Hooijberg, IMD, Nancy Lane, IMD, and Colleen Lief, IMD

DANIEL DENISON | ROBERT HOOIJBERG NANCY LANE | COLLEEN LIEF

978-1-118-32402-8 • 640pp • Hardcover • 2012

John Schermerhorn’s Introduction to Management is designed to help millennial students learn the core concepts, enhance MANAGEMENT career readiness, and see the relevance beTwelfth Edition tween management and the business world. International Student Version Inspire today’s students to be good future managers by achieving the perfect balance of theory and practice in the principles of management course, with this Twelfth Edition.

leading Culture Change in global organizations: aligning Culture and strategy

W W W. W I LEY. CO M / CO LLE G E / H A RT LEY

Robert Hartley’s Management Mistakes and Successes has once again compiled a unique and engaging collection of mistakes, successes, and turnarounds of some of today’s most prominent businesses. The Tenth Edition helps students develop the critical-thinking skills required of successful managers.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: PLAYERS IN A TIME OF ECONOMIC CRISIS. PART II: GREAT COMEBACKS. PART III: ENTREPRENURIAL ADVENTURES. PART IV: PLANNING. PART V: LEADERSHIP AND EXECUTION. PART VI: CONTROLLING. PART VII: ETHICAL MISTAKES.

ManageMenT anD ob

Organizational Third Edition

MICHAEL A. HITT

Behavior

| ADRIENNE COLELLA | C. CHET MILLER

organizational behavior, Third edition international student Version

organizational behavior, Twelfth edition international student Version

Twelfth Edition

Michael A. Hitt, Texas A&M University, Adrienne Colella, Tulane Universit, and C. Chet Miller, Bauer College of Business, University of Houston 978-0-470-87371-7 • 540pp • Paperback • 2012

Managing organizational behavior is critical to implementing an organization’s strategy, gaining an advantage over competitors, and ensuring positive organizational performance. In Organizational Behavior, Third Edition the authors emphasize the importance of how people contribute to the success of organizations. International Student Version

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE STRATEGIC LENS. CHAPTER 1: A Strategic Approach to Organizational Behavior . CHAPTER 2: Organizational Diversity . CHAPTER 3: Organizational Behavior in a Global Context . PART II: INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES. CHAPTER 4: Learning and Perception . CHAPTER 5: Personality, Intelligence, Attitude and Emotions . CHAPTER 6: Work Motivation . CHAPTER 7: Stress and Well-Being . PART III: GROUPS, TEAMS AND SOCIAL PROCESSES. CHAPTER 8: Leadership . CHAPTER 9: Communication . CHAPTER 10: Decision Making by Individuals and Groups . CHAPTER 11: Groups and Teams . CHAPTER 12: Conflict, Negotiation, Power, and Politics . PART IV: THE ORGANIZATIONAL CONTEXT. CHAPTER 13: Organizational Structure and Culture . CHAPTER 14: Organizational Change and Development .

The Ropes to skip and the Ropes to Know: studies in organizational Theory and behavior, eighth edition R . Richard Ritti, PhD, Penn State University, and Steve Levy, California State University, San Bernardino 978-0-470-16967-4 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2009

Composed of a series of short, interwoven, and accessible stories, The Ropes sheds light on how crucially important the day-to-day conduct of an organization’s employee can be. Even the most savvy and experienced businesspeople will learn to recognize the rules followed and the roles played within their company culture. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: DE GUSTIBUS NON DISPUTANDUM EST – SOCIALIZATION AND PERCEPTION. PART II: BUT SOME ARE MORE EQUAL TWO THAN OTHERS SOCIALIZATION AND ATTRIBUTION. PART III: DOIN’ WHAT COMES NATCHERLY – MOTIVATION AND REINFORCEMENT THEORY. PART IV: TO BE OR NOT TO BE ... – MANAGERIAL DECISION MAKING AND MOTIVATION. PART V: SKATE FAST OVER THIN ICE – THE MYTH OF LEADERSHIP, PERCEPTION, AND ATTRIBUTION. PART VI: ACTIONS SPEAK LOUDER THAN WORDS – COMMUNICATION AS MYTH, SYMBOL, AND RITUAL. PART VII: THE RACE IS NOT TO THE SWIFT, NOR THE BATTLE TO THE STRONG – MOBILITY AND THE POWER OF LOWER ORGANIZATIONAL PARTICIPANTS. PART VIII: THERE BUT FOR THE GRACE OF GOD GO I – POWER, STATUS, AND COOLING OUT THE MARK.

John R. Schermerhorn, Richard N. Osborn, Mary Uhl-Bien and James G. Hunt 978-1-118-09231-6 • 648pp • Paperback • 2013 Schermerhorn

Osborn

Uhl-Bien

Hunt

Organizational Behavior connects OB concepts with applications and is the clearest, most current and applicable OB text today, helping students understand how they can thrive in the world of work. Through experiential exercises and activities that ask students to evaluate themselves as leaders and colleagues, students are encouraged to reflect, grow and understand how they can contribute their professional and social environments. International Student Version

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR TODAY. CHAPTER 1: Introducing Organizational Behavior . PART II: INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR AND PERFORMANCE. CHAPTER 2: Individual Differences, Values, and Diversity . CHAPTER 3: Emotions, Attitudes, and Job Satisfaction . CHAPTER 4: Perception, Attribution, and Learning . CHAPTER 5: Motivation Theories . CHAPTER 6: Motivation and Performance . PART III: TEAMS AND TEAMWORK. CHAPTER 7: Teams in Organizations . CHAPTER 8: Teamwork and Team Performance . CHAPTER 9: Decision Making and Creativity . CHAPTER 10: Conflict and Negotiation . PART IV: INFLUENCE PROCESSES AND LEADERSHIP. CHAPTER 11: Communication and Collaboration . CHAPTER 12: Power and Politics . CHAPTER 13: Leadership Essentials . CHAPTER 14: Leadership Challenges and Organizational Change . PART V: ORGANIZATIONAL CONTEXT. CHAPTER 15: Organizational Culture and Innovation . CHAPTER 16: Organizational Goals and Structures . CHAPTER 17: Strategy, Technology, and Organizational Design .

a Primer on organizational behavior, seventh edition James L. Bowditch, Boston College, and Anthony F. Buono, Bentley College 978-0-470-08695-7 • 496pp • Paperback • 2007

A Primer on Organizational Behavior, places attention on information technology in the workplace and how it’s reshaping organizations and the management practices within them. The Seventh Edition is thoroughly updated, featuring in-depth discussions on early management thought, workplace incivility, social justice, conformity in groups, virtual teams, team conflict, leader-member relations, and organizational change. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Management And Organizational Behavior . CHAPTER 2: Perception, Attitudes, And Individual Differences . CHAPTER 3: Motivation . CHAPTER 4: Communication . CHAPTER 5: Group Dynamics . CHAPTER 6: Work Teams And Intergroup Relations: Managing Collaboration And Conflict . CHAPTER 7: Leadership, Power, And The Manager . CHAPTER 8: Macro-Organizational Behavior: The Organization’s Environment . CHAPTER 9: Organization Structure And Design . CHAPTER 10: Organizational Culture And Effectiveness . CHAPTER 11: Organization Development And Change . Appendix A: The Research Process In Organizational Behavior . Appendix B: Statistical Analysis . Appendix C: How To Read A Research-Oriented Journal Article .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

ManageMenT anD ob

beyond Change Management: How to achieve breakthrough Results Through Conscious Change leadership, second edition Dean Anderson and Linda Ackerman Anderson 978-0-470-64808-7 • 320pp • Paperback • 2010

The Second Edition of this best-selling and groundbreaking book details the interaction of leadership styles, mindsets, and change processes, and revolutionizes change leaders’ approach to transformational change. Beyond Change Management includes new and ready-to-use worksheets, questionnaires, guidelines, and assessment instruments. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: A CALL FOR CONSCIOUS CHANGE LEADERS. CHAPTER 1: Achieving Breakthrough Results from Change . CHAPTER 2: The Drivers of Change . CHAPTER 3: Three Types of Organizational Change . CHAPTER 4: Two Leadership Approaches to Transformation . CHAPTER 5: Building Organizational Change Capability . PART II: PEOPLE DYNAMICS. CHAPTER 6: Human Dynamics: From Resistance to Commitment . CHAPTER 7: The Role and Impact of Mindset . CHAPTER 8: The Role and Impact of Culture . PART III: PROCESS DYNAMICS. CHAPTER 9: Conscious Process Thinking . CHAPTER 10: Change Process Models . PART IV: ANSWERING THE CALL TO CONSCIOUS CHANGE LEADERSHIP. CHAPTER 11: Answering the Call .

The first Move: a negotiator’s Companion

ALAIN LEMPEREUR & AURÉLIEN COLSON EDITED BY MICHELE PEKAR

Alain Lempereur, ESSEC, Aurelien Colson, ESSEC, and Michele Pekar (Editor) 978-0-470-75008-7 • 264pp • Hardcover • 2010

THE FIRST MOVE

Solidly and uniquely grounded in the best of European and American traditions and scholarship, including the authors’ own research, The First Move provides deep insight into how to negotiate successfully in business and political settings alike.

A NEGOTIATOR’S COMPANION

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Questioning before Negotiating . CHAPTER 2: Preparing Negotiations before Performing . CHAPTER 3: Doing the Essential before the Obvious . CHAPTER 4: Optimising Joint Value before Dividing It . CHAPTER 5: Listening before Speaking . CHAPTER 6: Acknowledging Emotions before Problem-Solving . CHAPTER 7: Deepening the Method before Facing Complexity . CHAPTER 8: Formalising the Agreement before Concluding .

neW

The Primes: How any group Can solve any Problem Chris McGoff 978-1-118-17327-5 • 272pp • Paperback • 2012

The Change leader’s Roadmap, second edition Linda Ackerman Anderson and Dean Anderson 978-0-470-64806-3 • 650pp • Paperback • 2010

The king of all how-to books on change, this Second Edition provides a strategic overview of the author s proven change process methodology, as well as pragmatic guidance and tools for each key step in a complex transformational change process. The Change Leader’s Roadmap is the most comprehensive guide available for building transformational change strategy and designing and implementing successful transformation. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UPSTREAM CHANGE. PART II: MIDSTREAM CHANGE. PART III: DOWNSTREAM CHANGE. PART IV: LEVERAGING THE CHANGE LEADER’S ROADMAP.

The Primes gives leaders the edge they need to succeed. This field manual is for anyone ready to step up to serious challenges, predict and manage inevitable problems, create a brighter future, and produce extraordinary results. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UNIVERSAL PATTERNS OF LEADING IN UNCERTAIN TIMES. PART II: UNIVERSAL PATTERNS OF POWERFUL ALLIANCES. PART III: UNIVERSAL PATTERNS OF OUTSTANDING GROUP PERFORMANCE. PART IV: UNIVERSAL PATTERNS OF GROUP FAILURE. PART V: UNIVERSAL PATTERNS OF THRIVING IN AMBIGUITY.

The Change leader’s Roadmap and beyond Change Management, Two book set, second edition Linda Ackerman Anderson and Dean Anderson 978-0-470-88013-5 • 650pp Paperback • 2010

MBA Catalogue 2013

ManageMenT anD ob

FiFtH eDition

Corporate governance, fifth edition

neW 25th Anniversary * 3rd Edition

Robert A. G. Monks and Nell Minow 978-0-470-97259-5 • 542pp • Paperback • 2011

CoRpoRAte GoveRnAnCe

Once again, Corporate Governance clearly shows the role of corporate governance in making sure the right questions are asked RobeRt A. G. Monks & nell Minow and the necessary checks and balances in place to protect the long-term, sustainable value of the enterprise. The Fifth Edition features 18 case studies of institutions and corporations in crisis, and analyses the reasons for their fall. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: What is a Corporation? CHAPTER 2: Shareholders: Ownership . CHAPTER 3: Directors: Monitoring . CHAPTER 4: Management: Performance . CHAPTER 5: International Corporate Governance . CHAPTER 6 . Afterword: Final Thoughts and Future Directions .

PRODUCTIVE WORKPLACES Dignity, Meaning, and Community in the 21st Century

Productive Workplaces: Dignity, Meaning, and Community in the 21st Century, Third edition, 25 Year anniversary Marvin R. Weisbord 978-0-470-90017-8 • 576pp • Hardcover • 2012

Productive Workplaces is smart, well-written and well-researched, thoughtful, somewhat provocative, and a one-of-a-kind review of the integration of economics, technology, and people; the work on self as integral to organizational change; the revision of Lewinian concepts for a new era; and the history behind “getting everybody improving whole systems” as a response to fast change and increasing diversity (not the same as using any particular method). The themes, case studies (many revisited), and models are as relevant as ever. MARVIN WEISBORD

THE CLASSIC WORK * REVISED AND EXPANDED

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

neW

Corporate governance and accountability, fourth edition

PART I: MYTHOLOGY AND MANAGING. PART II: SEARCHING FOR PRODUCTIVE WORKPLACES. PART III: LEARNING FROM EXPERIENCE. PART IV: INTEGRATING THE PAST INTO THE PRESENT. PART V: LEARNING THEN AND NOW.

Jill Solomon 978-1-118-44910-3 • 480pp • Paperback • 2013

Corporate Governance and Accountability, 4e provides readers with an up-to-date summary of the most recent developments in corporate governance. Presenting a full discussion of corporate governance issues, the book adopts a holistic approach, taking the broadest view of the corporate governance agenda, including both theory and practice. The new edition is comprehensively updated and incorporates new codes of practice, policy documents and academic research.

What Matters now: How to Win in a World of Relentless Change, ferocious Competition, and unstoppable innovation Gary Hamel 978-1-118-12082-8 • 304pp • Hardcover • 2012 How to Win in a World of Relentless Change,

Concise and to the point, What Matters Now will inspire leaders to rethink their business, their management, and how they lead. This is the first book in 5 years from Gary Hamel, “the world’s leading business thinker”, and spotlights an agenda for suc success for leaders everywhere. Ferocious Competition, and Unstoppable Innovation

GARY HAMEL

PATRICK LENCIONI B E S T- S E L L I N G AU T H O R O F T H E F I V E DY S F U N C T I O N S O F A T E A M

The Advantage

The advantage: Why organizational Health Trumps everything else in business Patrick M. Lencioni 978-0-470-94152-2 • 240pp • Hardcover • 2012

The Advantage brings together the concepts from all of Patrick Lencioni’s best-selling books into a powerful and entertaining guide to the one remaining competitive advantage in business: organizational health. In his most comprehensive and impactful book to date, Lencioni explains that organizational health is the one last advantage in the market today, and provides a ground breaking new way for conducting business — one that maximizes human potential and aligns the organization around common set of principles. WHY ORGANIZATIONAL HEALTH TRUMPS EVERYTHING ELSE IN BUSINESS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: The Case for Organizational Health . The Four Disciplines Model . DISCIPLINE 1: Build a Cohesive Leadership Team . DISCIPLINE 2: Create Clarity . DISCIPLINE 3: Overcommunicate Clarity . DISCIPLINE 4: Reinforce Clarity . The Centrality of Great Meetings . Seizing the Advantage . Checklist for Organizational Health .

Ranked #1 most inﬂuential business thinker by the Wall Street Journal

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: SECTION 1: Values Matter Now . SECTION 2: Innovation Matters Now . SECTION 3: Adaptability Matters Now . SECTION 4: Passion Matters Now . SECTION 5: Ideology Matters Now .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

THIRD EDITION

MARKETING

PLANS for SERVICES

Marketing Plans for services: a Complete guide, Third edition Malcolm McDonald, Pennie Frow, and Adrian Payne

David A . Aaker, Haas School of Business, University of California Berkeley

978-0-470-97909-9 • 512pp • Paperback • 2011

978-0-470-61358-0 • 400pp • Hardcover • 2011

Marketing Plans for Services, Third Edition is written in a pragmatic, action-orientated style and each chapter has examples of marketing planning in practice. The authors highlight key misunderstandings about marketing and the nature of services and relationship marketing. A COMPLeTe GUiDe

MALCOLM McDONALD • PeNNie FrOw • ADriAN PAYNe

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Marketing and services . CHAPTER 2: The nature of services marketing . CHAPTER 3: Marketing planning for services: the process . CHAPTER 4: Marketing planning for services: the problems . CHAPTER 5: Marketing planning Phase One: the strategic context . CHAPTER 6: Marketing planning Phase Two: the situation review (Part 1) . CHAPTER 7: Marketing planning Phase Two: the situation review (Part 2) . CHAPTER 8: Marketing planning Phase Three: marketing strategy formulation . CHAPTER 9: Marketing planning Phase Four: resource allocation, monitoring and detailed planning (Part 1: the budget, the service product plan and the communications plan) . CHAPTER 10: Marketing planning Phase Four: resource allocation, monitoring and detailed planning (Part 2: price, place, people, processes and customer service) . CHAPTER 11: Organizing for marketing planning . CHAPTER 12: Measuring the effectiveness of marketing plans for service businesses . CHAPTER 13: A step-by-step marketing planning system for service businesses .

neW

LUXURY BRAND MANAGEMENT A WORLD OF PRIVILEGE Second Edition

luxury brand Management: a World of Privilege, second edition Michel Chevalier and Gerald Mazzalovo 978-1-1181-7176-9 • 336pp • Hardcover • 2012

Now fully revised and updated, Luxury Brand Management, the first comprehensive book on luxury brand management, looks at the world of branding today. Written by two renowned insiders, the book builds on this new, broader definition of luxury and examines more than 450 interna internationally known brands from a wide range of industries. M I C H E L C H E VA L I E R GÉRALD MAZZALOVO

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Specificities Of The Luxury Industry . CHAPTER 2: Major Luxury Sectors . CHAPTER 3: The Power Of The Luxury Brand . CHAPTER 4: Product Lyfe Cycle . CHAPTER 5: The Luxury Client . CHAPTER 6: Brand Identity . CHAPTER 7: Managing Creation . CHAPTER 8: Communication . CHAPTER 9: International Distribution . CHAPTER 10: Retailing . CHAPTER 11: Logistics And Licensing . CHAPTER 12: The Brand Audit .

MBA Catalogue 2013

brand Relevance: Making Competitors irrelevant

This ground-breaking book defines the concept of brand relevance using dozens of case studies-Prius, Whole Foods, Westin, iPad and more-and explains how brand relevance drives market dynamics, which generates opportunities for your brand and threats for the competition. Brand Relevance reveals how these companies have made other brands in their categories irrelevant.

DAVID A. AAKER

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Winning the Brand Relevance Battle . CHAPTER 2: Understanding Brand Relevance: Categorizing, Framing Consideration, and Measurement . CHAPTER 3: Changing the Retail Landscape . CHAPTER 4: Market Dynamics in the Automobile Industry . CHAPTER 5: The Food Industry Adapts . CHAPTER 6: Finding New Concepts . CHAPTER 7: Evaluation . CHAPTER 8: Defining the Category or Subcategory . CHAPTER 9: Creating Barriers: Sustaining the Differentiation . CHAPTER 10: Maintaining Relevance in the Face of Market Dynamics . CHAPTER 11: Innovative Organization .

“A must read for anyone who wants to get a jump on the future.” GARY HAMEL, AUTHOR OF THE FUTURE OF MANAGEMENT

BEYOND THE FA M I L I A R

beyond the familiar: long-Term growth through Customer focus and innovation Patrick Barwise and Sean Meehan 978-0-470-97631-9 • 184pp • Hardcover • 2011

Above all, Beyond the Familiar runs counter to the fashionable claim that the startingpoint for business success should be to find Patrick Barwise a ‘blue-sky’, ‘out-of-the-box’ breakthrough Seán Meehan innovation. Barwise and Meehan use many compelling cases to illustrate how managers can find ways within their existing network and organization to achieve long term growth. LO N G -T E R M G R OW T H T H R O U G H

C U S TO M E R F O C U S A N D I N N OVAT I O N

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: What Every CEO Wants . CHAPTER 2: Your Promise to the Customer . CHAPTER 3: Delivering Today’s Promise Better and Better Every Day . CHAPTER 4: Driving the Market by Relentlessly Improving the Promise . CHAPTER 5: Innovating Beyond the Familiar . CHAPTER 6: Opening Up: What Leaders Must Do .

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

Award Winning Text Book

neW

SECOND EDITION

Sustainability Marketing

sustainability Marketing – a global Perspective, second edition Frank-Martin Belz and Ken Peattie 978-1-119-96619-7 • 352pp • Paperback • 2012

The new and extended Second Edition of the award-winning textbook Sustainability Frank-Martin Belz and Ken Peattie Marketing: A Global Perspective provides a sustainability-oriented vision of marketing for the twenty-first century. Adopting a a consumer marketing focus, it emphasises integrating sustainability principles into both marketing theory and the practical decision making of marketing managers. A GLOBAL PERSPECTIVE

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UNDERSTANDING SUSTAINABILITY AND MARKETING. CHAPTER 1 Marketing in the Twenty-First Century . CHAPTER 2 Framing Sustainability Marketing . PART II: DEVELOPING SUSTAINABILITY MARKETING OPPORTUNITIES. CHAPTER 3 Socio-Ecological Problems . CHAPTER 4 Sustainable Consumer Behaviour . PART III: DEVELOPING SUSTAINABILITY MARKETING STANDARDS AND STRATEGIES. CHAPTER 5 Sustainability Marketing Values and Objectives . CHAPTER 6 Sustainability Marketing Strategies . PART IV: DEVELOPING THE SUSTAINABILITY MARKETING MIX. CHAPTER 7 Customer Solutions . CHAPTER 8 Communications . CHAPTER 9 Customer Cost . CHAPTER 10 Convenience . PART V: DEVELOPING THE FUTURE OF SUSTAINABILITY MARKETING. CHAPTER 11 Sustainability Marketing Transformations . CHAPTER 12 Reframing Sustainability Marketing . CONCLUSIONS: A Final Rethink .

Marketing Communications – a brand narrative approach Micael Dahlen, Fredrik Lange and Terry Smith 978-0-470-31992-5 • 606pp • Paperback • 2010

Marketing Communications: is a mainstream, student-driven text which gives prominence to the driving force of all Marketing Communications: the imperative of Branding. The book aims to engage students in an entertaining, informative way, setting the conceptual mechanics of Marketing Communications in a contemporary, dynamic context. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS. CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Marketing Communications . CHAPTER 2 How Marketing Communications Works . PART 2: ANALYSIS AND PLANNING FOR MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS. CHAPTER 3 Analysis of Target Markets . CHAPTER 4 Marketing Communications Effects and Objectives . CHAPTER 5 Marketing Communications Strategy and Planning . CHAPTER 6 Strategic Positioning . CHAPTER 7 Tactics and Techniques of Positioning . PART 3: IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL OF MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS. CHAPTER 8 Building Brand Equity . CHAPTER 9 Brand Narrative and Relational Management . CHAPTER 10 The Marketing Communications Mix . CHAPTER 11 Advertising Strategy . CHAPTER 12 Advertising Creativity . CHAPTER 13 Media Concepts and Media Planning . CHAPTER 14 Public Relations and Hybrid Marketing Communications . CHAPTER 15 Sales and Sales Promotion . CHAPTER 16 Beyond Traditional Marketing Communications . CHAPTER 17 Evaluating Marketing Communications .

Consumer behaviour, second edition Martin M. Evans Gordon Foxall and Ahmad Jamal, all Cardiff Business School. 978-0-470-99465-8 • 576pp • Paperback • 2009

Consumer Behaviour, 2nd Edition is more ‘student centred’ than the competition, manifested in the use of cases and exercises to be used in participative and applied ways, reflecting the clear trend towards student centred and application-based marketing courses. FEATURES:

• Coverage of consumer buying behaviour from a marketing, rather than a behavioural science perspective. • The addition of new journal articles from a range of journals.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

SEVENTH EDITION

MARKETING

PLANS

neW

Marketing Plans: How to Prepare Them, How to use Them, seventh edition

The growth Drivers: The Definitive guide to Transforming Marketing Capabilities

Malcolm McDonald and Hugh Wilson 978-0-470-66997-6 • 592pp • Paperback • 2011

Andy Bird and Mhairi McEwan

Marketing Plans is a highly renowned HOW TO PREPARE THEM, HOW TO USE THEM international bestseller. The Seventh Edition Malcolm McDonald has been thoroughly revised, and every has been carefully updated with and Hugh Wilson chapter special attention to the latest developments in marketing. To accomplish this, Professor Malcolm McDonald has been joined in this edition by Professor Hugh Wilson, a leading expert on CRM and multichannel strategy as well as marketing planning.

The Growth Drivers explains the vital role that marketing, marketers and marketing capabilities play in driving sustainable, profitable growth. It offers fresh new thinking, inspiring case studies and practical tools to help business and marketing leaders drive growth by building marketing capabilities across their organizations.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Understanding the Marketing Process . CHAPTER 2: The Marketing Planning Process: 1 The Main Steps . CHAPTER 3: The Marketing Planning Process: 2 Removing the Myths . CHAPTER 4: Completing the Marketing Audit: 1 The Customer and Market Audit . CHAPTER 5: Completing the Marketing Audit: 2 The Product Audit . CHAPTER 6: Setting Marketing Objectives and Strategies . CHAPTER 7: The Integrated Marketing Communications Plan . CHAPTER 8: The Sales Plan . CHAPTER 9: The Pricing Plan . CHAPTER 10: The Multichannel Plan: The Route to Market . CHAPTER 11: The Customer Relationship Management Plan . CHAPTER 12: Implementation Issues in Marketing Planning . CHAPTER 13: Measuring the Effectiveness of Marketing Planning . CHAPTER 14: A Step-by-Step Marketing Planning System .

PART I: UNDERSTANDING THE GROWTH DRIVERS. CHAPTER 1: The Growth Challenge . CHAPTER 2: How Marketing Drives Growth . CHAPTER 3: Transforming Marketing Capabilities . PART II: HOW TO TRANSFORM MARKETING CAPABILITIES TO DRIVE GROWTH. CHAPTER 4: Defining a Marketing Capability Strategy . CHAPTER 5: Developing Solutions (Processes and Skills) . CHAPTER 6: Developing Solutions (Organization, People and Culture) . CHAPTER 7: Driving Embedding . PART III: SUSTAINING GROWTH IN PRACTICE. CHAPTER 8: Measuring Impact . CHAPTER 9: Mobilizing Capability Resources . CHAPTER 10: The Future Growth Journey .

978-1-119-95331-9 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2012

Managing Customer

THIRD eDITIon

KEY ACCOUNT MANAGEMENT

Key account Management: The Definitive guide, Third edition, Revised and updated Diana Woodburn and Malcolm McDonald 978-0-470-97415-5 • 496pp • Paperback • 2011

The DefiniTive GuiDe

Developing successful business-to-business relationships with more customers in highly Diana Woodburn and Malcolm McDonald competitive markets requires processes and skills that go beyond traditional selling activity. The very best state-of-the-art strategies are set out clearly in Key Account Management by intentionally known authors who have worked at the highest levels with more key and strategic account managers worldwide than probably any other leading advisors. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The crucial role of key account management . CHAPTER 2: Selecting and categorizing key customers . CHAPTER 3: Relationship stages . CHAPTER 4: Developing key relationships . CHAPTER 5: The buyer perspective . CHAPTER 6: Key account profitability . CHAPTER 7: Key account analysis . CHAPTER 8: Planning for key accounts . CHAPTER 9: Processes - making key account management work . CHAPTER 10: The role and requirements of key account managers . CHAPTER 11: Performance and rewards in KAM . CHAPTER 12: Organizing for key account management . CHAPTER 13: Transitioning to KAM .

MBA Catalogue 2013

Managing Relationships: a strategic Customer framework, second edition Relationships Don Peppers and Martha Rogers 978-0-470-42347-9 • 528pp • Hardcover • 2011

Now fully revised and updated with new examples, case studies, and references with contributing works from industry leaders Second Edition and academic experts, Managing Customer Don Peppers & Martha Rogers Relationships is one of the first books designed to develop an understanding of the pedagogy of managing customer relationships. With an emphasis on customer strategies and building customer value, the Second Edition focuses on marketing accountability and metrics and advanced customer valuation approaches, including Return on Customer. The new edition offers a full discussion of the influence of social networking on customer empowerment and customer relationship management (CRM). A Strategic Framework

With contributions from dozens of academic experts and industry leaders in managing customer strategy, value, and relationships

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: PRINCIPLES OF MANAGING CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS. PART II: IDIC IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS: A MODEL FOR MANAGING CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS. PART III: MEASURING AND MANAGING TO BUILD CUSTOMER VALUE.

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

third edition

MANAGING BUSINESS RELATIONSHIPS David Ford, Lars-Erik Gadde, Håkan Håkansson, Ivan Snehota

Managing business Relationships, Third edition David Ford, Euromed-Management, Marseille, Lars-Erik Gadde,Chalmers University of Technology, Hakan Hakansson, Nordic School of Management, BI,and Ivan Snehota, University of Lugano

Marketing Research, eleventh edition, international student Version Eleventh Edition

MARKETING RESEARCH

DAVID A. AAKER | V. KUMAR | ROBERT P. LEONE | GEORGE S. DAY

978-0-470-72109-4 • 256pp • Paperback • 2011 International Student Version

David A. Aaker, University of California, Berkeley, V. Kumar, University of Houston, George S. Day, University of Pennsylvania, Wharton School, and Robert Leone, Texas Christian University 978-1-118-32181-2 • 768pp • Hardcover • 2012

This new edition of Managing Business Relationships aims to help managers and students understand the reality of business networks and how to manage in them. It has been entirely rewritten to include the latest thinking and research from the IMP (Industrial Marketing and Purchasing) Group and includes new chapters on Intermediation in Business Networks, the Economics of Business Relationships and the Practice of Business Networking.

Marketing Research offers the best approach toward communicating the intricacies of this field and its usefulness to the marketing organization. “Macro-micro-macro” in design, and fitting for students in the intermediate or advanced courses, this highly-regarded Eleventh Edition focuses on market intelligence, strategy, theory, and application.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: The Importance of Business Relationships . CHAPTER 2: What are Business Relationships All About? CHAPTER 3: Relationships with Customers . CHAPTER 4: Relationships with Suppliers . CHAPTER 5: The Economics of Business Relationships . CHAPTER 6: Intermediation in Business Relationships . CHAPTER 7: Technology and Business Networks . CHAPTER 8: Managing in Networks . CHAPTER 9: Developing the Practice of Business Networking .

PART I: THE NATURE AND SCOPE OF MARKETING RESEARCH. PART II: DATA COLLECTION. PART III: DATA ANALYSIS. PART IV: SPECIAL TOPICS IN DATA ANALYSIS. PART V: APPLICATIONS OF MARKETING INTELLIGENCE.

global Marketing Management, fifth edition, international student edition Masaaki (Mike) Kotabe and Kristiaan Helsen

David A. Aaker Damien McLoughlin

strategic Market Management, global Perspectives, first edition David A. Aaker and Damien McLoughlin

Strategic Market Management

978-0-470-68975-2 • 368pp • Paperback • 2009

Global Marketing Management prepares students to become effective managers overseeing global marketing activities in an increasingly competitive environment. The text’s guiding principle, as laid out clearly and methodically by authors Kotabe and Helsen, is that the realities of international marketing are more “multilateral.”

The text is a European adaptation of our current US book: Strategic Market Global Perspectives Management, 9th Edition by David Aaker. This new edition is a mainstream text suitable for all business students studying strategy and marketing courses. Strategic Market Management: Global Perspectives is motivated by the strategic challenges created by the dynamic nature of markets. The premise is that all traditional strategic management tools either do not apply or need to be adapted to a more dynamic context.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Globalization Imperative . CHAPTER 2: Economic Environment . CHAPTER 3: Financial Environment . CHAPTER 4: Global Cultural Environment and Buying Behavior . CHAPTER 5: Political and Legal Environment . CHAPTER 6: Global Marketing Research . CHAPTER 7: Global Segmentation and Positioning . CHAPTER 8: Global Marketing Strategies . CHAPTER 9: Global Market Entry Strategies . CHAPTER 10: Global Product Policy Decisions I: Developing New Products for Global Markets . CHAPTER 11: Global Product Policy Decisions II: Marketing Products and Services . CHAPTER 12: Global Pricing . CHAPTER 13: Communicating With the World Consumer . CHAPTER 14: Sales and Cross-Cultural Management . CHAPTER 15: Global Logistics and Distribution . CHAPTER 16: Export and Import Management . CHAPTER 17: Planning, Organization, and Control of Global Marketing Operations . CHAPTER 18: Marketing Strategies for Emerging Markets . CHAPTER 19: Global Marketing and the Internet .

CHAPTER 1: Strategic Market Management: An Overview . PART I: STRATEGIC ANALYSIS. CHAPTER 2: External and Customer Analysis . CHAPTER 3: Competitor Analysis . CHAPTER 4: Market/Submarket Analysis . CHAPTER Chapter 5: Environmental Analysis and Strategic Uncertainty . CHAPTER 6: Internal Analysis . Case Challenges for Part I . PART II: CREATING AND IMPLEMENTING STRATEGIES. CHAPTER 7: Creating Advantage: Synergy and Commitment vs . Opportunism vs . Adaptability . CHAPTER 8: Alternative Value Propositions . CHAPTER 9: Building and Managing Brand Equity . CHAPTER 10: Energizing the Business . CHAPTER 11: Leveraging the Business . CHAPTER 12: Creating New Businesses . CHAPTER 13: Global Strategies . CHAPTER 14: Setting priorities for Businesses and brands—The Exit, Milk, and Consolidate Options . CHAPTER 15: From Silos to Synergy—Harnessing the Organization .

978-0-470-50574-8 • 752pp • Paperback • 2012

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

neW

Marketing Research, ninth edition, international student Version Carl McDaniel, Jr. and Roger Gates 978-1-118-11271-7 • 736pp • Hardcover • 2012

Marketing Research

In the Ninth Edition of Marketing Research, McDaniel and Gates continue to share their International Student Version industry experience to teach students how to make critical business decisions through the study of market research. The authors’ practical, applications-based approach features real data, real people, and real research, to prepare students to conduct and use market research for future careers in business. N

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Marketing Research . CHAPTER 2: Ethical Decision Making in the Marketing Research Industry . CHAPTER 3: Steps in the Research Process . CHAPTER 4: Using Secondary Data . CHAPTER 5: Focus Groups, Depth Interviews, and Other Non-quantitative Research Methods . CHAPTER 6: Methods of Survey Research . CHAPTER 7: Using the Internet for Marketing Research . CHAPTER 8: Ethnography, Scanner-based Research, and Other Observation Techniques . CHAPTER 9: Primary Data Collection: Experimentation and Test Markets . CHAPTER 10: The Importance of Proper Measurement . CHAPTER 11: Attitude Measurement . CHAPTER 12: Questionnaire Design . CHAPTER 13: Basic Sampling Issues . CHAPTER 14: Sample Size Determination . CHAPTER 15: Data Processing and Fundamental Data Analysis . CHAPTER 16: Statistical Testing of Differences and Relationships . CHAPTER 17: Bivariate Correlation and Regression . CHAPTER 18: Multivariate Data Analysis . CHAPTER 19: The Research Report . CHAPTER 20: Planning, Organizing, and Controlling the Research Function .

Marketing Mistakes and successes, eleventh edition Robert F. Hartley 978-0-470-16981-0 • 416pp • Paperback • 2009 BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ENTREPRENEURIAL ADVENTURES. PART II: MARKETING WARS. PART III: COMEBACKS. I: MARKETING MANAGEMENT MISTAKES. PART V: NOTABLE MARKETING SUCCESSES. PART VI: ETHICAL MISTAKES.

MBA Catalogue 2013

Marketing Research Essentials

8th Edition

Marketing Research, essentials, eighth edition Carl McDaniel, Jr., and Roger Gates 978-1-118-24932-1 • 480pp • Paperback • 2012

Filled with engaging, current examples drawn from the authors’ ongoing involvement in the field, Marketing Research Essentials is a comprehensive text that teaches McDANIEL G AT E S students how to become effective consumers of market research. The only book on the market co-authored by a full-time marketing researcher, McDaniel and Gates together bring their real-life, insider experiences from the industry to teach students how to make critical business decisions through the study of market research. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Role of Marketing Research in Management Decision Making . CHAPTER 2: Problem Definition, Exploratory Research, and the Research Process . CHAPTER 3: Secondary Data and Databases . CHAPTER 4: Qualitative Research . CHAPTER 5: Traditional Survey Research . CHAPTER 6: Online Marketing Research . CHAPTER 7: Primary Data Collection: Observation . CHAPTER 8: Primary Data Collection: Experimentation and Test Markets . CHAPTER 9: The Concept of Measurement and Attitude Scales . CHAPTER 10: Questionnaire Design . CHAPTER 11: Basic Sampling Issues . CHAPTER 12: Sample Size Determination . CHAPTER 13: Data Processing, Data Analysis, and Statistical Testing . CHAPTER 14: More Powerful Statistical Methods . CHAPTER 15: Communicating Research Results and Managing Marketing Research .

BRAND

brand against the Machine: How to build Your brand, Cut Through the Marketing noise, and stand out from AGAINST the Competition THE MACHINE John Morgan

How to Build Your Brand, Cut Through the Marketing Noise, and Stand Out from the Competition

978-1-1181-0352-4 • 210pp • Hardcover • 2011

Brand Against the Machine offers proven and actionable steps for companies and entrepreneurs to increase their brand visibility and credibility, and to create an indispensable brand that consumers can relate to, thus becoming life-long customers. Discover the aspirational currency that makes your brand one that people want to be or want to be friends with. Learn how to be real with your audience and make strategic associations to establish credibility. Brand Against the Machine will help you stand out, get noticed, and be remembered. JOHN MORGAN

CARL MCDANIEL, JR. s 2/'%2 '!4%3

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

neW

Hey, Whipple, squeeze This: The Classic guide to Creating great ads, fourth edition Luke Sullivan with Sam Bennett 978-1-1181-0133-9 • 386pp • Paperback • 2012

Hey Whipple, Squeeze This has inspired a generation of ad students, copywriters, and young creatives to make their mark in the industry. But students need new guidance to ply their craft now in the digital world. This new fourth edition explains how to bring brand stories into interactive, dynamic places online, in addition to traditional television, radio, print, and outdoor ads. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Salesmen Don’t Have to Wear Plaid . CHAPTER 2: A Sharp Pencil Works Best . CHAPTER 3: A Clean Sheet of Paper . CHAPTER 4: Write When You Get Work . CHAPTER 5: Concepting for the Hive Mind . CHAPTER 6: Big Honkin’ Ideas . CHAPTER 7: In the Future, Everyone Will Be Famous for 30 Seconds . CHAPTER 8: But Wait, There’s More! CHAPTER 9: Radio Is Hell . But It’s a Dry Heat . CHAPTER 10: Anymore CHAPTER 11: Only the Good Die Young . CHAPTER 12: Pecked to Death by Ducks . CHAPTER 13: A Good “Toto, I Have a Feeling We’re Not in McMann & Tate Anymore .” Book or a Crowbar . CHAPTER 14: Making Shoes versus Making Shoe Commercials .

engage!: The Complete guide for brands and businesses to build, Cultivate, and Measure success in the new Web, Revised and updated BRANDS and

Brian Solis and Ashton Kutcher (Foreword by)

BUSINESSES to Build, Cultivate, and Measure Success in the New Web

978-1-118-00376-3 • 336pp • Paperback • 2011

The Complete Guide for

REVISED and UPDATED

The ultimate guide to branding and building your business in the era of the Social Web, revised and updated with a Foreword by Ashton Kutcher, thoroughly examines the social media landscape and how to effectively use social media to succeed in business. Engage! leads you through the detailed and specific steps required for conceptualizing, implementing, managing, and measuring a social media program. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

BRIAN SOLIS

CHAPTER 1: The Social Media Manifesto . CHAPTER 2: Making the Case for Social Media: The Five Ws+H+E . CHAPTER 3: The New Media University . CHAPTER 4: The New Media University 101: Blogs, Podcasts, and Livecasts . CHAPTER 5: The New Media University 201: Communities, Social Calendars, and Livecasting . CHAPTER 6: The New Media University 301: Images and Multimedia . CHAPTER 7: The New Media University 401: Dashboards, Social Networks, and Brands . CHAPTER 8: The New Media University 501: Microblogs, Monetization, and Twitter . CHAPTER 9: The New Media University 601: Mobile Marketing and Video Broadcasting . CHAPTER 10: The New Media University 701: Social Media Optimization, SEO, and Content Distribution . CHAPTER 11: The New Media University 801: Syndication, Illustration, and Aggregation . CHAPTER 12: The New Media University 901: Brand Personality, Discovery, and Promise . CHAPTER 13: The New Media University 1001: Attention and Word of Mouth Marketing . CHAPTER 14: The New Media University 1101: Social Landscape and Initiatives . CHAPTER 15: Fusing the Me in Social Media and the We in the Social Web . CHAPTER 16: Learning and Experimentation Lead to Experience . CHAPTER 17: Defining the Rules of Engagement . CHAPTER 18: The Conversation Prism . CHAPTER 19: Unveiling the New Influencers . CHAPTER 20: The Human Network . CHAPTER 21: The Social Marketing Compass . CHAPTER 22: Facebook is Your Home Page for the Social Web . CHAPTER 23: Divide and Conquer . CHAPTER 24: A Tale of Two Cities . CHAPTER 25: We Earn the Relationships We Deserve . CHAPTER 26: The New Media Scorecard . Foreword by

ASHTON KUTCHER

FOREWORD BY

KATIE COUR IC

The End of

BU SI NE SS

AS USUAL REWIR E THE WAY WAAY YOU WORK W O TO SUCCEE D IN THE CONSU C NSUME CON UMER MER REVOLU REVO TION

The end of business as usual: Rewire the Way You Work to succeed in the Consumer Revolution Brian Solis 978-1-118-07755-9 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2011

Today’s biggest trends—the mobile web, social media, real-time—have produced a new consumer landscape. The End of Business As Usual explores this complex information revolution, how it has changed the future of business, media, and culture, and what you can do about it. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: A Quiet Riot: The Information Divide and the Cultural Revolution . CHAPTER 2: Youthquake: Millennials Shake Up the Digital Lifestyle . CHAPTER 3: The Medium Is No Longer the Message . CHAPTER 4: The Attention Deficit Crises and Information Scarcity . CHAPTER 5: The Evolution of the Network Economy and the Human Network . CHAPTER 6: The Nextwork: Defining Tomorrow’s Information Network . CHAPTER 7: Your Audience Is Now an Audience of Audiences with Audiences . CHAPTER 8: Convergence: The InterPart of Media and the Human Network . CHAPTER 9: Measures of Digital Influence and Social Capital: From Nobody to Somebody . CHAPTER 10: The Dawn of Connected Consumerism . CHAPTER 11: The Rise of Collective Commerce . CHAPTER 12: Creating Magical Experiences . CHAPTER 13: Brands Are No Longer Created, They’re Co-Created . CHAPTER 14: Reinventing the Brand and Sales Cycle for a New Genre of Connected Commerce . CHAPTER 15: Aspiring to Reach beyond Conformity to Inspire Customers . CHAPTER 16: The Last Mile: The Future of Business Is Defined through Shared Experiences . CHAPTER 17: The Culture Code: When Culture and Social Responsibility Become Market Differentiators . CHAPTER 18: Adaptive Business Models: Uniting Customers and Employees to Build the Business of Tomorrow, Today . CHAPTER 19: Change Is in the Air: The Inevitable March toward Change Management . CHAPTER 20: What’s Next? The Evolution of Business from Adaptive to Predictive .

BRIAN SOLIS AUTHOR OF

ENGAG E!

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

A BUSINESSWEEK BESTSELLER

OVER A QUARTER MILLION COPIES IN PRINT IN MORE THAN 25 LANGUAGES

NEW RULES of MARKETING & PR

The

y Completel Updated Revised & Third Edition

HOW TO USE SOCIAL MEDIA, ONLINE VIDEO, MOBILE APPLICATIONS, BLOGS, NEWS RELEASES & VIRAL MARKETING TO REACH BUYERS DIRECTLY

The new Rules of Marketing & PR: How to use social Media, online Video, Mobile applications, blogs, news Releases, and Viral Marketing to Reach buyers Directly, Third edition David Meerman Scott 978-1-118-02698-4 • 366pp • Paperback • 2011

The New Rules of Marketing and PR is a one-of-a-kind, pioneering guide to the future of marketing. It offers a step-by-step action plan for harnessing the power of the Internet to communicate with buyers directly, raise online visibility, and increase sales. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: HOW THE WEB HAS CHANGED THE RULES OF MARKETING AND PR. CHAPTER 1: The Old Rules of Marketing and PR Are Ineffective in an Online World . CHAPTER 2: The New Rules of Marketing and PR . CHAPTER 3: Reaching Your Buyers Directly . PART II: WEB-BASED COMMUNICATIONS TO REACH BUYERS DIRECTLY. CHAPTER 4: Social Media and Your Targeted Audience . CHAPTER 5: Blogs: Tapping Millions of Evangelists to Tell Your Story . CHAPTER 6: Audio and Video Drive Action . CHAPTER 7: The New Rules of News Releases . CHAPTER 8: Going Viral: The Web Helps Audiences Catch the Fever . CHAPTER 9: The Content-Rich Website . CHAPTER 10: Marketing and PR in Real Time . PART III: ACTION PLAN FOR HARNESSING THE POWER OF THE NEW RULES. CHAPTER 11: You Are What You Publish: Building Your Marketing and PR Plan . CHAPTER 12: Online Thought Leadership to Brand Your Organization as a Trusted Resource . CHAPTER 13: How to Create for Your Buyers . CHAPTER 14: How Web Content Influences the Buying Process . CHAPTER 15: Mobile Marketing: Reaching Buyers Wherever They Are . CHAPTER 16: Social Networking Sites and Marketing . CHAPTER 17: Blogging to Reach Your Buyers . CHAPTER 18: Video and Podcasting Made, Well, as Easy as Possible . CHAPTER 19: How to Use News Releases to Reach Buyers Directly . CHAPTER 20: The Online Media Room: Your Front Door for Much More Than the Media . CHAPTER 21: The New Rules for Reaching the Media . CHAPTER 22: Search Engine Marketing . CHAPTER 23: Make It Happen .

D AV I D M E E R M A N S C O T T

WALL STREET JOURNAL BESTSELLER HOW TO INSTANTLY ENGAGE YOUR M A R K E T , C O N N E C T W I T H C U S T O M E R S, AND CREATE PRODUCTS THAT GROW YOUR BUSINESS NOW

Revised and Updated

REAL-TIME

MARKETING & PR

Real-Time Marketing and PR: How to instantly engage Your Market, Connect with Customers, and Create Products that grow Your business now, Revised and updated edition

Measuring Marketing: 110+ Key Metrics every Marketer needs, second edition John A. Davis 978-1-1181-5374-1 • 320pp • Paperback • 2012

Find out how to act and react flexibly as events occur, position your brand in the always-on world of the Web, and avoid embarrassing mistakes and missteps with Real-Time Marketing and PR.

In Measuring Marketing: 103 Key Metrics Every Marketer Needs, Second Edition, one of the world’s leading experts in the field presents the key marketing ratios and metrics. Applying these metrics will enable marketers to make better decisions and increase their accountability for their strategies and activities.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: REVOLUTION TIME. CHAPTER 1: Grow Your Business Now . CHAPTER 2: Speed versus Sloth . CHAPTER 3: Laying Down Some Real-Time Law . CHAPTER 4: Real-Time Attitude . CHAPTER 5: Too Big to Succeed? CHAPTER 6: Live from the Revolution . CHAPTER 7: Crisis Communications and the Media . CHAPTER 8: What Are People Saying about You This Instant? CHAPTER 9: Tap the Crowd for Quick Action . PART II: CONNECT WITH YOUR MARKET. CHAPTER 10: RealTime Customer Connection . CHAPTER 11: Going Mobile, Real Time Is All the Time . CHAPTER 12: They Want It Immediately . PART III: GROW YOUR BUSINESS NOW. CHAPTER 13: Let Them Communicate . . . Now . CHAPTER 14: How Your Website Becomes a Real-Time Machine . CHAPTER 15: Make the Sale . CHAPTER 16: Business at the Speed of Now .

SECTION I: Corporate Financial Metrics . SECTION II: Marketing Planning Metrics . SECTION III: Brand Metrics . SECTION IV: Customers Metrics . SECTION V: Product/Offering Metrics . SECTION VI: Price Metrics . SECTION VII: Advertising/ Promotion Metrics . SECTION VIII: Direct Marketing Metrics . SECTION IX: Online/ Digital/Social Metrics . SECTION X: Place/Distribution Metrics . SECTION XI: Sales Metrics .

David Meerman Scott 978-1-1181-5599-8 • 254pp • Paperback • 2011

DAVID MEERMAN SCOTT Bestselling author of THE NEW RULES OF MARKETING & PR

neW

MBA Catalogue 2013

M a R K e T i n g , a D V e R T i s i n g a n D C o n s u M e R b e H aV i o u R

neW

SECO ND EDIT ION

RETAIL MARKETING AND BRANDING

MAXIMIZING ROI A DEFINITIVE GUIDE TO IS SPILLECKE JESKO PERREY AND DENN

neW

Retail Marketing and branding: a Definitive guide to Maximizing Roi, second edition

store Wars: The Worldwide battle for Mindspace and shelfspace, online and in-store, second edition

Jesko Perrey and Dennis Spillecke, McKinsey & Co.

Greg Thain, John Bradley

978-1-118-48952-9 • 400pp • Hardcover • 2012

The original book was well received and looked to help retailers overcome retail specific pitfalls in marketing ROI. The authors challenged the received wisdom currently exercised by retailers by demonstrating how marketing and branding can be an investment rather than a cost and by providing comprehensive guidelines for the implementation of new strategies, tools and techniques for achieving the best ROI from their marketing spend and branding investments (and how this integrates within the whole business value chain). The second edition of Retail Marketing and Branding includes the following updates: • New and updated case examples • Updated figures and examples throughout • New interviewers with recent experiences • Additional chapters PERSPECTIVES ON CONSUMER INDUSTRIES & RETAIL

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Principles of successful brand management: art, science, craft . CHAPTER 2: Segmentation . CHAPTER 3: A Guide to Excellence in Retail Brand Management . CHAPTER 4: Developing and Refining Retail Formats . CHAPTER 5: Store Brand Portfolio Management . CHAPTER 6: Private Label Branding . CHAPTER 7: How to Spend It: Fact-based Media Mix Optimization . CHAPTER 8: Budget Sizing: The Million-dollar Question . CHAPTER 9: Budget Prioritization . CHAPTER 10: Reach–Cost–Quality . CHAPTER 11: Marketing Mix Modeling . CHAPTER 12: The Digital Retail (R)evolution . CHAPTER 13: POS Marketing . CHAPTER 14: Leaflets and Local Print Advertising: How to Achieve Local Media Excellence . CHAPTER 15: Fact-based Promotion Management . CHAPTER 16: Excellence in Classical Media . CHAPTER 17: Digital Marketing Excellence . CHAPTER 18: Maximizing Customer Value with Data-driven CLM . CHAPTER 19: Smart Sourcing . CHAPTER 20: Ten perspectives on retail marketing .

978-1-118-37406-1 • 314pp • Hardcover • 2012

This new edition retains all the strengths of the old book including a comprehensive and complex approach to the consumer & retail market and the interaction between FMCG retailers and manufacturers. The book is thoroughly revised and updated and will consist of 4 main parts: • A section on leading FMCG companies and brands (such as Coke, P&G, Unilever, Nestle, L’Oreal etc.), their marketing and branding strategies in the western markets (USA, Western Europe: UK, France, Germany and others). • A section on leading retailers (Wal-Mart, Tesco, Carrefour etc.), their developments and expansion over the last 10 years. • A section describing the interaction between retailers and manufacturers, including competition for end-consumers, trade marketing. • A section covering the Emerging Markets—the retail landscape in the major developing economies, results of the expansion of major FMCG brands and western retail chains, challenges related to distribution and FMCG marketing in those countries. The book will also discuss the impact of the Global Crisis on the consumer and retail markets as well as predictions and prospects for the future. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Shifting of power in the value chain . CHAPTER 2: Differences between manufacturers and retailers . CHAPTER 3: The fragility of a marketing orientation . CHAPTER 4: Retailers and the marketing concept . CHAPTER 5: The battlefield for mindspace and shelfspace . CHAPTER 6: The battle for mindspace . CHAPTER 7: The battle for shelfspace . CHAPTER 8: Creating a sustainable retail differential . CHAPTER 9: Private label . CHAPTER 10: Trade marketing . CHAPTER 11: Internationalisation and emerging markets . CHAPTER 12: E-retailing . CHAPTER 13: The new order and its challenges .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

“This book is a valuable read for any enterprise CIO and IT leader.” — Mike Blake, Chief Information Officer, Hyatt Hotels Corporation

iPad ®

Nathan Clevenger

in the Enterprise

iPad in the enterprise: Developing and Deploying business applications Nathan Clevenger

Developing and Deploying Business Applications

978-1-118-02235-1 • 408pp • Paperback • 2011

iPad in the Enterprise gets you started immediately planning, designing, developing, deploying, and managing iPad apps specifically for the enterprise. The text covers high-level software architectural options, the importance of design and user experience, application development tools and techniques, and best practices for deploying applications and managing iPads in the enterprise. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

industrial Relations: Theory and Practice, Third edition Trevor Colling (Editor), Warwick Business School , and Mike Terry (Editor), Warwick Business School 978-1-4443-0885-3 • 494pp • Paperback • 2010

The Third Edition of Industrial Relations provides more detailed guidance on legal and institutional changes. In particular the text reflects the findings of the recent Work and Employee Relations Survey. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: BRITISH INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IN COMPARATIVE CONTEXT.. PART II: ACTORS. PART III: CONTEXTS. PART IV: PROCESSES. PART V: OUTCOMES.

PART I: STRATEGY. PART II: ARCHITECTURE. PART III: DESIGN. PART IV: DEVELOPMENT. PART V: DEPLOYMENT.

ALLISON CERRA & CHRISTINA JAMES

identity shift: Where identity Meets Technology in the networked-Community age Allison Cerra and Christina James 978-1-118-18113-3 • 240pp • Paperback • 2011

IDENTITY

SHIFT

From one of the largest telecommunications companies in the world, Identity Shift uses very readable and approachable case studies and interviews to show that while technology and all of its devices has become an intrinsic part of our lives, it is also drastically changing how we connect as people and how we see our own identity and security. While technology will never define us, this study reveals how profoundly it influences the way we define ourselves. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: THE 3-P MODEL OF IDENTITY. CHAPTER 1: Presentation: The Mirror Image . CHAPTER 2: Protection: Exposing the Blind Spots . CHAPTER 3: Preference: The (Un)Conscious Filter of (In)Finite Choice . CHAPTER 4: Trust: Meeting at the Crossroads of Identity . PART II: THE UNIVERSAL LAWS. CHAPTER 5: The Law of Learned Helplessness: Failure Is the Only Option . CHAPTER 6: The Law of Illusion: Lie to Me . CHAPTER 7: The Law of Recall: Taking It from the Top . CHAPTER 8: Rationalization: Finding Harmony in the Discord . PART III: IDENTITY THROUGH THE LIFE STAGES. CHAPTER 9: Teenage Growing Pains . CHAPTER 10: emerging Adulthood: In Search of the Ideal . CHAPTER 11: The “Meet” Market . CHAPTER 12: The Parent Puzzle . CHAPTER 13: The Midlife Rebirth . Epilogue: Who Are We Becoming? Appendix: Through the Lens of Research . WHERE IDENTITY MEETS TECHNOLOGY IN THE NETWORKED-COMMUNITY AGE

second edition

global logistics and supply Chain Management, second edition John Mangan, University of Newcastle, UK, Chandra Lalwani, University of Hull, UK; Tim Butcher, Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology, Australia, and Roya Javadpour, California Polytechnic State University, USA 978-1-119-99884-6 • 446pp • Paperback • 2011

GLOBAL LOGISTICS & SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT John Mangan, Chandra Lalwani, Tim Butcher & Roya Javadpour

Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management provides essential reading for students studying SCM and logistics. Encompassing both practical and strategic perspectives, the Second Edition takes a truly global perspective, recognizing the transnational nature of logistics activities in today’s world. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CONTEXT. CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Globalisation and International Trade CHAPTER 3: Supply Chain Relationships . CHAPTER 4: Supply Chain Strategies . CHAPTER 5: Simulation . PART II: LOGISTICS AND SUPPLY CHAIN OPERATIONS. CHAPTER 6: Transport in Supply Chains . CHAPTER 7: Transport Security . CHAPTER 8: Logistics Service Providers . CHAPTER 9: Procurement (Martin Murphy) . CHAPTER 10: Inventory Management (Chuda Basnet and Paul Childerhouse) . CHAPTER 11: Warehousing and Materials Handling (with Peter Baker). CHAPTER 12: Information Flows and Technology . CHAPTER 13: Logistics and Financial Management (Mike Tayles). CHAPTER 14: Measuring and Managing Logistics Performance (Noel McGlynn). PART III: SUPPLY CHAIN DESIGNS. CHAPTER 15: Supply Chain Vulnerability, Risk, Robustness and Resilience (Helen Peck). CHAPTER 16: Sustainable Logistics and Supply Chain Systems . CHAPTER 17: Reverse Logistics (Shams Rahman). CHAPTER 18: Service Supply Chains . CHAPTER 19: Emerging Supply Chain Designs .

MBA Catalogue 2013

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

essentials of business Processes and information systems Simha R. Magal and Jeffrey Word 978-0-470-23059-6 • 200pp • Paperback • 2010

This supplement text bridges the gap between the fundamentals of how businesses operate (processes) and the tools that business people use to accomplish their tasks (systems). Business students, regardless of their functional discipline, will be able to apply the real-world concepts discussed in this text immediately upon entering the workforce. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Organizations, Processes, and Information Systems . CHAPTER 2: Enterprise Systems . CHAPTER 3: The Procurement Process . CHAPTER 4: The Fulfillment Process . CHAPTER 5: The Production Process . CHAPTER 6: Integrated Processes .

R. Kelly Rainer & Casey G. Cegielski

neW

FOURTH EDITION

introduction to information systems, fourth edition international student Version

Keri E. Pearlson

neW

Carol S. Saunders

Strategic Management of Information Systems FIFTH EDITION

istrategic Management of information systems, fifth edition, international student Version Keri E. Pearlson and Carol S. Saunders 978-1-118-32254-3 • 416pp • Paperback • 2012

This brief, but complete, paperback builds a basic framework for the relationships among business strategy, information systems, and International Student Version organizational strategies. Students will learn how IT relates to organizational design and business strategy, how to recognize opportunities in the work environment, and how to apply current technologies in innovative ways. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Linking Systems Strategy and the Organization . CHAPTER 2: Strategic Use of Information Resources in a Global Economy . CHAPTER 3: Organizational Strategy: Managerial Levers . CHAPTER 4: Work Design: Enabling Global Collaboration . CHAPTER 5: Building and Changing Global Business Processes . CHAPTER 6: Information Systems Strategy: Architecture and Infrastructure . CHAPTER 7: Cost Recovery of Information Systems . CHAPTER 8: Governance of the Information Systems Organization . CHAPTER 9: Sourcing Information Systems around the World . CHAPTER 10: Managing Projects in a Global Ecosystem . CHAPTER 11: Business Analytics and Knowledge Management . CHAPTER 12: Ethical Guidelines for Information Use .

R. Kelly Rainer and Casey G. Cegielski 978-1-118-09230-9 • 480pp • Paperback • 2012 Introduction to

INFORMATION SYSTEMS International Student Version

This new edition includes updated coverage, refined cases, more illustrations, and a new “Weekly Updates” resource all in concise and engaging chapters.

An d re w G re A s le y

OperatiO Operati OperatiOns O ns ManageMent ManageM Manage M ent THIRD EDITION

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Modern Organization Functioning in a Global Environment . CHAPTER 2: Information Systems and the Modern Orgnization . CHAPTER 3: Ethics and Privacy . CHAPTER 4: Information Security . CHAPTER 5: Managing Knowledge and Data . Chapter 6: Networks . CHAPTER 7: Electronic Commerce: Applications and Issues . CHAPTER 8: Wireless Technologies and the Modern Organization . CHAPTER 9: Web 2 .0 and Social Networks . CHAPTER 10: Information Systems that Support Organizations . CHAPTER 11: Customer Relationship Management and Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 12: Managerial Support Systems . CHAPTER 13: Acquiring Information Systems and Applications .

operations Management, Third edition Andrew Greasley, Aston University Business School, UK 978-1-119-97854-1 • 512pp • Paperback • 2011

Operations Management, Third Edition provides a clear and accessible introduction to this important area of study, focusing on all key areas of operations in both manufacturing and service industries. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Operations Strategy . PART 2: DESIGN. CHAPTER 3: Process Types . CHAPTER 4: Layout Design . CHAPTER 5: Facility Design and Location . CHAPTER 6: Process Technology . CHAPTER 7: Product and Service Design . CHAPTER 8: Process Design . CHAPTER 9: Job and Work Design . PART 3: MANAGEMENT. CHAPTER 10: Planning and Control . CHAPTER 11: Capacity Management . CHAPTER 12: Inventory Management . CHAPTER 13: Lean Operations and JIT . CHAPTER 14: Enterprise Resource Planning . CHAPTER 15: Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 16: Project Management . CHAPTER 17: Quality . CHAPTER 18: Performance Measurement and Improvement .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

neW

SIMHA R. MAGAL

neW

JEFFREY WORD

Management information systems, Moving business forward

integrated business Processes with eRP systems Simha R. Magal Jeffrey Word

R. Kelly Rainer and Hugh J. Watson 978-0-470-88919-0 • 672pp • Paperback • 2012

Management Information Systems delivers a powerful, customizable, and easy-to-use teaching and learning architecture that empowers instructors to improve their productivity and better engage and motivate students to learn. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Information Systems and Their Importance to Individuals, Organizations, and Society . CHAPTER 2: Organizational Strategy, Competitive Advantage, and Information Systems . CHAPTER 3: Data Management . CHAPTER 4: Telecommunications and Networking . CHAPTER 5: Business Intelligence: What Information Systems Provide for Me . CHAPTER 6: Ethics and Privacy . CHAPTER 7: Information Security . CHAPTER 8: Social Networks . CHAPTER 9: E-Business and E-Commerce . CHAPTER 10: Wireless, Mobile Computing, and Mobile Commerce . CHAPTER 11: Information Systems within the Organization . CHAPTER 12: Extending the Organization to Customers . CHAPTER 13: Extending the Organization Along the Supply Chain . CHAPTER 14: Acquiring Information Systems and Applications .

F I F T H E DI T I O N

AN INTEGRATED APPROACH

Nada R. Sanders

operations Management, fifth edition international student Version R. Dan Reid, University of New Hampshire, and Nada R. Sanders, Lehigh University 978-1-118-32363-2 • 680pp • Paperback • 2013

For those who must rely on OM to successfully navigate and perform their jobs, leading authors Dan Reid and Nada Sanders have updated their classically readable, comprehensive, and integrated text, Operations Management. With its abundance of step-by-step solved problems, concepts, and examples of major real-world companies, this text brings unparalleled clarity and transparency to the course. International Student Version

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Operations Management . CHAPTER 2: Operations Strategy and Competitiveness . CHAPTER 3: Product Design and Process Selection . CHAPTER 4: Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 5: Total Quality Management . CHAPTER 6: Statistical Quality Control . CHAPTER 7: Just-in-Time and Lean Systems . CHAPTER 8: Forecasting . CHAPTER 9: Capacity Planning and Facility Location . CHAPTER 10: Facility Layout . CHAPTER 11: Work System Design . CHAPTER 12: Inventory Management . CHAPTER 13: Aggregate Planning . CHAPTER 14: Resource Planning . CHAPTER 15: Scheduling . CHAPTER 16: Project Management . Appendix A: Solutions to Odd-Numbered Problems . Appendix B: The Standard Normal Distribution . Appendix C: P-Chart .

Integrated Business Processes with ERP Systems covers the key processes supported by modern ERP systems. This textbook and W R I T T E N W I T H T H E S UP P O R T O F the WileyPLUS online course is designed for use as both a reference guide and a conceptual resource for students taking ERP-focused courses using SAP. It examines in depth the core concepts applicable to all ERP environments, and it explains how those concepts can be utilized to implement business processes in SAP systems. I N T E G R AT E D B U S I N E S S PROCESSES with E R P S Y S T E M S

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Business Processes . CHAPTER 2: Introduction to Enterprise Systems . CHAPTER 3: Introduction to Accounting . CHAPTER 4: The Procurement Process . CHAPTER 5: The Fulfillment Process . CHAPTER 6: The Production Process . CHAPTER 7: Inventory and Warehouse Management . CHAPTER 8: Material Planning . CHAPTER 9: Integrated process . Online-only chapters . CHAPTER 10: Enterprise Asset Management and Customer Service . CHAPTER 11: Management Accounting . CHAPTER 12: Human Capital Management . CHAPTER 13: Life Cycle Data Management . CHAPTER 14: Project Management . CHAPTER 15: BI/Analytics .

neW

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT R. Dan Reid

978-0-470-47844-8 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2012

MBA Catalogue 2013

SUPPLY C HAI N MANAGEMENT:

A GLOBAL PERSPECTIVE

supply Chain Management: a global Perspective Nada R. Sanders, Lehigh University 978-0-470-14117-5 • 428pp • Hardcover • 2011

In Supply Chain Management, Nada Sanders presents material from a uniquely balanced, integrative, and business-oriented viewpoint. Examining supply chain management as a boundary-spanning function that is Nada R. Sanders intertwined with other organizational areas, the text provides future supply chain managers instruction on interactions and integration of multiple business units. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 2: Supply Chain Strategy . CHAPTER 3: Network & System Design . CHAPTER 4: Marketing . CHAPTER 5: Operations Management . CHAPTER 6: Sourcing . CHAPTER 7: Logistics . CHAPTER 8: Forecasting & Demand Planning . CHAPTER 9: Inventory Management . CHAPTER 10: Lean Systems & Six-Sigma Quality . CHAPTER 11: Supply Chain Relationship Management . CHAPTER 12: Global Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 13: Sustainable Supply Chain Management .

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

Data Mining for business intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and applications in Microsoft office excel with XlMiner, second edition Galit Shmueli, PhD, University of Maryland, College Park ; Nitin R. Patel, PhD, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, and Peter C. Bruce, statistics.com 978-0-470-52682-8 â&#x20AC;˘ 428pp â&#x20AC;˘ Hardcover â&#x20AC;˘ 2010

Data Mining for Business Intelligence uses real data and actual cases to illustrate the applicability of data mining (DM) intelligence in the development of successful business models. Featuring complimentary access to XLMinerÂŽ, the Microsoft Office ExcelÂŽ add-in, this Second Edition allows readers to follow along and implement algorithms at their own speed, with a minimal learning curve. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: PRELIMINARIES. PART II: DATA EXPLORATION AND DIMENSION REDUCTION. PART III: PERFORMANCE EVALUATION. PART IV: PREDICTION AND CLASSIFICATION METHODS. PART V: MINING RELATIONSHIPS AMONG RECORDS. PART VI: FORECASTING TIME SERIES. PART VII: CASES.

+BDL 3 .FSFEJUI t 4DPUU . 4IBGFS

Operations Management

Fifth Edition

operations Management, fifth edition international student Version

7th

EDITION

O P E R AT I O N S MANAGEMENT Russell & Taylor

Roberta S. Russell, Virginia Tech, Pamplin College of Business, and Bernard W. Taylor, Virginia Tech, Pamplin College of Business 978-0-470-64623-6 â&#x20AC;˘ 832pp â&#x20AC;˘ Paperback â&#x20AC;˘ 2011

Operations Management: Creating Value Along the Supply Chain is designed to teach students how to analyze processes, ensure quality, create value, and manage the flow of information and products, while creating value along the supply chain. Most importantly, the Seventh Edition makes the quantitative topics easy for students to understand and the mathematical applications less intimidating. I n t e r n a t i o n a l S t u d e n t Ve r s i o n

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT. CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 2: Quality Management . CHAPTER 3: Statistical Process Control . CHAPTER 4: Product Design . CHAPTER 5: Service Design . CHAPTER 6: Processes and Technology . CHAPTER 7: Capacity and Facilities Design . CHAPTER 8: Human Resources . CHAPTER 9: Project Management . PART II: SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT. CHAPTER 10: Supply Chain Management Strategy and Design . CHAPTER 11: Global Supply Chain Procurement and Distribution . CHAPTER 12: Forecasting . CHAPTER 13: Inventory Management . CHAPTER 14: Sales and Operations Planning . CHAPTER 15: Resource Planning . CHAPTER 16: Lean Systems . CHAPTER 17: Scheduling . Appendix A: Normal Curve Areas .

Jack R. Meredith, Wake Forest University, and Scott M. Shafer, Wake Forest University 978-1-118-37979-0 â&#x20AC;˘ 248pp â&#x20AC;˘ Paperback â&#x20AC;˘ 2013

Operations Management for MBAs provides an introduction to the basic concepts of International Student Version operations management with a strategic, conceptual, and contemporary approach. Specifically written with the needs of MBA students in mind, current topics such as supply chain management, the balanced scorecard, and yield management, as well as those specific to marketing, finance and other majors are explained. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Operations Strategy and Global Competitiveness . CHAPTER 2: Process Planning and Design . CHAPTER 3: Controlling Processes . CHAPTER 4: Process Improvement: Minimizing Variation Through Six Sigma . CHAPTER 5: Process Improvement: Reducing Waste Through Lean . CHAPTER 6: Managing Process Improvement Projects . CHAPTER 7: Supply Chain Management . CHAPTER 8: Capacity, Scheduling, and Location Planning .

operations Management, seventh edition, international student Version

Essentials of

uality

essentials of Quality with Cases and experiential exercises, Premier edition V. E. Sower 978-0-470-50959-3 â&#x20AC;˘ 416pp â&#x20AC;˘ Paperback â&#x20AC;˘ 2010

While most books on quality management are much too complex, Essentials of Quality follows a new approach that is more accessiVictor E. Sower ble and engaging for business managers and students. This highly accessible, experiential text is unique in its coverage of current QM topics, from creative and innovative improvements and approaches to todayâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s economic environment to ways of developing metrics for measuring and evaluating programs. with cases and experiential exercises

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: QUALITY BASICS. PART II: QUALITY OF DESIGN. PART III: QUALITY SYSTEMS TO ASSURE CONFORMANCE TO DESIGN. PART IV: CONTROL AND IMPROVEMENT OF QUALITY. PART V: QUALITY MANAGEMENT.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

information Technology for Management, eighth edition, international student Version

E IG H TH E D ITIO N

Efraim Turban and Linda Volonino 978-1-118-09225-5 • 480pp • Paperback, 2011

A major revision of a highly respected text that has sold over 250,000 copies, Information Technology for Management teaches that the major role of IT is to provide enterprises with strategic advantage by facilitating problem solving, increasing productivity and quality, improving customer service, enhancing communication and collaboration, and enabling business process restructuring.

Information Technology for Management

EFRAIM TURBAN | LINDA VOLONINO

International Student Version

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: UNDERSTANDING INFORMATION SYSTEMS THAT SUPPORT ORGANIZATIONAL PERFORMANCE. CHAPTER 1: Information Systems in the 2010s . CHAPTER 2: IT Infrastructure and Support Systems . PART II: DATA AND NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE. CHAPTER 3: Data, Text, and Document Management . CHAPTER 4: Network Management and Mobility . CHAPTER 5: IT Security, Crime, Compliance, and Continuity . PART III. WEB, WIRELESS, AND SOCIAL MEDIA STRATEGIES. CHAPTER 6: E-Business and E-Commerce . CHAPTER 7: Mobile Computing and Commerce . CHAPTER 8: Web 2 .0 and Social Media . PART IV OPERATIONAL AND ENTERPRISE SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES. CHAPTER 9: Operational Planning and Control Systems . CHAPTER 10: Enterprise Information Systems . PART V. MANAGING IT, BUSINESS PROCESSES, AND SOCIAL/ECOLOGY RESPONSIBILITY. CHAPTER 12: IT Strategic Planning . CHAPTER 13: Business Process Management and Systems Development . CHAPTER 14: Global Ethics, Ecology, and Social Responsibility .

e c

o n d

d i

i o n

neW

Benefits Management

How to Increase the Business Value of Your IT Projects

benefits Management: How to increase the business Value of your iT Projects, second edition John Ward Cranfield School of Management, Elizabeth Daniel, Open University Business School 978-1-119-99326-1 • 362pp • Hardcover • 2012

neW

The Managers guide to systems Practice: Making sense of Complex Problems Frank Stowell, University of Northumbria, Christine Welch, Portsmouth Business School 978-1-118-34563-4 • 266pp • Hardcover • 2012

This book considers how to achieve value John Ward and ElizabEth daniEl from IT: from both theoretical and practical perspectives. It is based on extensive research which produced a comprehensive understanding and analysis of the issues involved in IT strategy and innovative new approaches that apply those issues in a wide range of organizations of the ideas, processes, tools and techniques that were developed.

This book provides a rapid introduction to straightforward, yet powerful ideas that enable users to address real world problems. Systems theory and practice is predominantly a framework for thinking about the World, in which holistic views are maintained. In this respect it contrasts with some familiar techniques of management science, in which problem situations are broken down into their constituent parts with resultant loss of coherence.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: The challenges of IS/IT projects . CHAPTER 2: Understanding the strategic context . CHAPTER 3: The foundations of benefits management . CHAPTER 4: Establishing the why, what and how . CHAPTER 5: Building the business case . CHAPTER 6: Stakeholder and change management . CHAPTER 7: Implementing a benefits management approach . CHAPTER 8: The importance of context . CHAPTER 9: From projects to programmes to portfolios . CHAPTER 10: Creating a better future .

PART I: KEY SYSTEMS IDEAS. CHAPTER 1: Understanding Things: The Manager’s Guide to Systems Practice . Introducing some basic (but powerful) ideas . CHAPTER 2: Models and Modelling . CHAPTER 3: The Practice . PART II: SYSTEMS THINKING. CHAPTER 4: Thinking about Systems . CHAPTER 5: Influential Ideas . PART III: THE CONTRIBUTIONS OF PHILOSOPHY AND THE SOCIAL SCIENCES. CHAPTER 6: Philosophical and Sociological Influences . CHAPTER 7: Systems Research . PART IV: CASE STUDIES. CHAPTER 8: Pulling it All Together . CHAPTER 9: Cases .

MBA Catalogue 2013

o P e R aT i o n s a n D i T

information systems for Managers: Texts and Cases, second edition InformaƟon Systems for Managers Text & Cases Second EdiƟon

Dr. Gabriele Piccoli, Cornell University 978-1-118-05761-2 • 538pp • Hardcover • 2012

Gabriele Piccoli

Information Systems for Managers is a text for managerial/MBA students intended to actively engage them in discussions and activities around information systems and information technology. Piccoli has interwoven many real-world examples into the text that show students how IS will affect their futures in management positions. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATIONS. CHAPTER 1: Information Systems and the Role of General and Functional Managers . CHAPTER 2: Information Systems Defined . CHAPTER 3: Organizational Information Systems and Their Impact . PART II: COMPETING IN THE INTERNET AGE. CHAPTER 4: The Changing Competitive Environment . CHAPTER 5: Electronic Commerce: New Ways of Doing Business . PART III: THE STRATEGIC USE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS. CHAPTER 6: Strategic Information Systems Planning . CHAPTER 7: Value Creation and Strategic Information Systems . CHAPTER 8: Value Creation with Information Systems . CHAPTER 9: Appropriating IT-Enabled Value Over Time . PART IV: GETTING IT DONE. CHAPTER 10: Funding and Governance of Information Systems . CHAPTER 11: Creating Information Systems . CHAPTER 12: Information Systems Trends . CHAPTER 13: Security, Privacy, and Ethics .

essentials of information systems for Managers: Text only EssenƟals of

InformaƟon Systems for Managers

Dr. Gabriele Piccoli, Cornell University 978-1-118-05711-7 • 448pp • Hardcover • 2012

Gabriele Piccoli

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATIONS. CHAPTER 1: Information Systems and the Role of General and Functional Managers . CHAPTER 2: Information Systems Defined . CHAPTER 3: Organizational Information Systems and Their Impact . PART II: COMPETING IN THE INTERNET AGE. CHAPTER 4: The Changing Competitive Environment . CHAPTER 5: Electronic Commerce: New Ways of Doing Business . PART III: THE STRATEGIC USE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS. CHAPTER 6: Strategic Information Systems Planning . CHAPTER 7: Value Creation and Strategic Information Systems . CHAPTER 8: Value Creation with Information Systems . CHAPTER 9: Appropriating IT-Enabled Value Over Time . PART IV GETTING IT DONE. CHAPTER 10: Funding and Governance of Information Systems . CHAPTER 11: Creating Information Systems . CHAPTER 12: Information Systems Trends . CHAPTER 13 Security, Privacy, and Ethics .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

PRoJeC T ManageMenT

I n t e r n a t i o n a l S t u d e n t Ve r s i o n

PROJECT PRACTICE

MANAGEMENT IN

4TH

Project Management in Practice, fourth edition international student Version Samuel J. Mantel Jr., University of Cincinnati; Jack R. Meredith, Wake Forest University; Scott M. Shafer, Wake Forest University, and Margaret M. Sutton

EDITION

978-0-470-64620-5 • 328pp • Paperback • 2011

MANTEL | MEREDITH | SHAFER | SUTTON

Offering streamlined coverage with an applied approach, Project Management in Practice focuses on the essentials of project management. This concise, hands-on Fourth Edition is ideal for a one semester project management course, or as a module on project management. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The World Of Project Management . CHAPTER 2: The Manager, The Organization, and the Team . CHAPTER 3:Planning The Project . CHAPTER 4: Budgeting the Project . CHAPTER 5: Scheduling the Project . CHAPTER 6: Allocating Resources to the Project . CHAPTER 7: Monitoring and Controlling The Project . CHAPTER 8: Evaluating and Terminating The Project . Appendix A: Probability and Statistics .

JACK J. PHILLIPS WAY N E B R A N T L E Y PAT R I C I A P U L L I A M P H I L L I P S

Project

Management

ROI

A Step-by-Step Guide for Measuring the Impact and ROI for Projects

Project Management Roi: a step-by-step guide for Measuring the impact and Roi for Projects Jack J. Phillips, Wayne Brantley, and Patricia Pulliam Phillips

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Project Management Issues and Challenges . CHAPTER 2: The Project Management Lifecycle . CHAPTER 3: ROI Methodology Basics . CHAPTER 4: Achieving Business Alignment with the Project . CHAPTER 5: Measuring Reaction and Learning . CHAPTER 6: Measuring Application and Implementation . CHAPTER 7: Measuring Business Impact . CHAPTER 8: Isolation of Project Impact . CHAPTER 9: Converting Data to Money . CHAPTER 10: Measuring the Intangibles . CHAPTER 11: Monitoring Project Costs and Calculating ROI . CHAPTER 12: Forecasting Value, Including ROI . CHAPTER 13: Reporting Results . CHAPTER 14: Implementing and Sustaining ROI .

MBA Catalogue 2013

Samuel J. Mantel

Project Management: a Managerial approach, eighth edition international student Version Jack R. Meredith, Wake Forest University and Samuel J. Mantel Jr., University of Cincinnati

E IGHTH E DITION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT

978-1-118-09373-3 • 608pp • Paperback • 2012

A Managerial Approach

Meredith’s newest edition of Project Management focuses on all facets of the steps needed to successfully manage a project, from planning and resources to budget budgeting and more. Revisions for the Eighth Edition include a more consistent writing style throughout, additional examples of some concepts to make them easier to grasp, and improved visual elements to make the textbook and online resources easier to understand and navigate. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Projects in Contemporary Organizations . CHAPTER 2: Strategic Management and Project Selection . CHAPTER 3: The Project Manager . CHAPTER 4: Managing Conflict and the Art of Negotiation . CHAPTER 5: The Project in the Organizational Structure . CHAPTER 6: Project Activity and Risk Planning . CHAPTER 7: Budgeting : Estimating Costs and Risks . CHAPTER 8: Scheduling . CHAPTER 9: Resource Allocation . CHAPTER 10: Monitoring and Information Systems . CHAPTER 11: Project Control . CHAPTER 12: Project Auditing . CHAPTER 13: Project Termination .

Project Management Metrics, KPIs, and Dashboards A Guide to Measuring and Monitoring Project Performance

978-1-118-07277-6 • 320pp • Hardcover • 2011

An exclusive portal to the methods and tools the ROI Institute uses to determine return on investment in project management, Project Management ROI takes the guesswork out of determining how to monetarily value projects by teaching the time-tested Return on Investment (ROI) methodology. It presents these results-based concepts in a methodical, reproducible manner that project managers, executives, and analysts can use as a validated reference for future projects.

Jack R. Meredith

Project Management Metrics, KPis, and Dashboards: a guide to Measuring and Monitoring Project Performance Harold Kerzner, PhD, International Institute for Learning

HAROLD KERZNER, PH.D.

978-1-118-02652-6 • 384pp • Paperback • 2011

The first book on project management performance indicators and metrics by the leading authority in the area, Dr. Harold Kerzner, Project Management Metrics, KPIs, and Dashboards walks through everything from the basics of project management metrics and key performance indicators to establishing targets and using dashboards to monitor performance. The content aligns with PMI’s PMBOK Guide and stress “value” as the main driver. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Changing Landscape for Project Management . CHAPTER 2: The Driving Forces for Better Metrics . CHAPTER 3: Metrics . CHAPTER 4: Key Performance Indicators . CHAPTER 5: Value-Driven Project Management Metrics . CHAPTER 6: Dashboards . CHAPTER 7: Dashboard Applications . CHAPTER 8: Measurement-Driven Project Management .

PRoJeC T ManageMenT

CHARL ES G. CO B B,

PM P

Making Sense of

Agile Project Management Balancing Control and Agility

Making sense of agile Project Management: balancing Control and agility Charles G. Cobb 978-0-470-94336-6 • 264pp • Paperback • 2011

The first book to place agile project management in the context of the overall business strategy and show how it can be implemented successfully, Making Sense of Agile Project Management is intended to provide a much deeper understanding of agile principles, methodologies, and practices to enable project managers to develop a more agile approach. Managers will understand how to blend and tailor agile and traditional principles, methodologies, and practices to create an appropriate balance of control and agility to fit a business environment as well as the risks and complexities of any individual project. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: OVERVIEW. CHAPTER 1: Introduction . CHAPTER 2: Agile Values, Principles, and Practices . CHAPTER 3: Becoming More Agile . CHAPTER 4: Part I Summary and Action Plan . CHAPTER 5: Case Studies . PART II: OVERVIEW. CHAPTER 6: Agile Project Management . CHAPTER 7: Fundamental Principles behind SDLC Models . CHAPTER 8: Software Development Life Cycles . CHAPTER 9: Part II Summary and Action Plan . PART III: APPENDICES. Appendix A: Overview of Agile Development Practices . Appendix B: Overview of Agile Project Delivery Frameworks .

International Bestseller!

The

FAST FORWARD

MBA in

Eric Verzuh

Fourth E DITION

For any professional responsible for coordinating projects among different departments, across executive levels, or with technical complexity, The Fast Forward MBA in Project Management offers comprehensive E RIC V ERZUH instruction on how to deliver on time and Includes PMP Certification Study Tips on budget. Get the step-by-step advice you need to find the right sponsor, clarify objectives, and set realistic schedules and budget projections. A PRACTICAL HANDBOOK AND REFERENCE FREE DOWNLOADABLE FORMS

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION. PART II: DEFINING THE PROJECT. PART III: THE PLANNING PROCESS. PART IV: CONTROLLING THE PROJECT. PART V: ADVANCING YOUR PRACTICE OF PROJECT MANAGEMENT.

Updated for the 2011 PMP Exam

Includes Over Two Hours of Bonus Audio on the CD Includes Real-World Scenarios and Leading-Edge Exam Prep Software Featuring:

• Custom Test Engine

• Chapter Review in Audio Format • Electronic Flashcards

THE IIL / WILEY SERIES IN PROJECT MANAGEMENT

978-0-470-60034-4 • 416pp • Hardcover • 2010

PMP

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Project Management Framework . CHAPTER 2: Integration Management . CHAPTER 3: Scope Management . CHAPTER 4: Time Management . CHAPTER 5: Cost Management . CHAPTER 6: Human Resources Management . CHAPTER 7: Procurement Management . CHAPTER 8: Quality Management . CHAPTER 9: Risk Management . CHAPTER 10: Communications Management .

978-1-118-08321-5 • 648pp • Paperback • 2011

If you’re preparing for the Project Management Professional (PMP) exam, PMP Project Management Professional Exam Study Guide is what you need. Not only does it reflect the very latest version of the exam, it is written by popular project management expert Kim Heldman, author of the five previous editions of this top-selling book, and it also includes a CD with practice exams, exam prep software, electronic flashcards, and over two hours of additional audio review. Project Management Professional Exam STUDY GUIDE Sixth Edition

Based on principles set forth in the bestsellManaging ing Project Management: A Systems Approach COMPLEX to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling, PROJECTS Tenth Edition, this easy-to-follow guide will revolutionize the way you view and practice project management. It introduces the Harold Kerzner, P .D. Carl Belack, PMP acclaimed Kerzner Approach®, demonstrating how it empowers you with the skills needed to ensure that projects are completed successfully. Most importantly, it shows you how to manage complex projects more effectively.

PMP Project Management Professional exam study guide, sixth edition Kim Heldman

Harold Kerzner, PhD and Carl Belack

978-1-118-07377-3 • 519pp • Paperback • 2011

Project Management

• Hundreds of Sample Questions

Managing Complex Projects

The fast forward Mba in Project Management, fourth edition

Kim Heldman

SERIOUS SKILLS.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: What Is a Project? CHAPTER 2: Creating the Project Charter . CHAPTER 3: Developing the Project Scope Statement . CHAPTER 4: Creating the Project Schedule . CHAPTER 5: Developing the Project Budget . CHAPTER 6: Risk Planning . CHAPTER 7: Planning Project Resources . CHAPTER 8: Developing the Project Team . CHAPTER 9: Conducting Procurements and Sharing Information . CHAPTER 10: Measuring and Controlling Project Performance . CHAPTER 11: Controlling Work Results . CHAPTER 12: Closing the Project and Applying Professional Responsibility . Appendix A: Process Inputs and Outputs . Appendix B: About the Companion .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

PRoJeC T ManageMenT

Kim Heldman, PMP

Project Management

art JumpSt

Project Management Jumpstart, Third edition Kim Heldman 978-0-470-93919-2 • 360pp • Paperback • 2011

3rd Edition The Best First Step Toward

Whether your students are considering a career in project management or simply wish to expand their understanding of general project management principles, Project Management JumpStart is ideal reading. Project management guru Kim Heldman presents you with a clear, concise, and enjoyable writing style so that they can approach project management from a practical rather than theoretical standpoint. a Career in Project Management

Christine van Winkelen and Jane McKenzie

Knowledge Works The handbook of practical ways to identify and solve common organizational problems for better performance

Knowledge Works: The Handbook of Practical Ways to identify and solve Common organizational Problems for better Performance Christine van Winkelen and Jane McKenzie 978-1-119-99362-9 • 328pp • Hardcover • 2011

SERIOUS SKILLS.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Building the Foundation . CHAPTER 2: Developing Project Management Skills . CHAPTER 3: Initiating the Project . CHAPTER 4: Defining the Project Goals . CHAPTER 5: Breaking Down the Project Activities . CHAPTER 6: Planning and Acquiring Resources . CHAPTER 7: Assessing Risk . CHAPTER 8: Developing the Project Plan . CHAPTER 9: Budgeting 101 . CHAPTER 10: Executing the Project . CHAPTER 11: Controlling the Project Outcome . CHAPTER 12: Closing the Books . Appendix A: Answers to Review Questions . Appendix B: Sample Project Management Forms . Appendix C: Sample Project Management Checklists .

Chris Chapman and Stephen Ward

Knowledge Works is a handbook full of ideas to help students draw on people’s knowledge to keep ideas fresh, reduce waste, and build competence and capability. Students can either dip into it according to their needs, or work through it in a more systematic way to create a plan to improve an organization’s performance. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ESTABLISH STRATEGIC PRIORITIES. PART II: ENABLE OPERATIONAL EFFECTIVENESS. PART III: STIMULATE INNOVATION. IV: INCREASE LEARNING CAPACITY. PART V: BECOME MORE AGILE. PART VI: MAKE CHANGE STICK.

neW

HoW to Manage Project oPPortunity and risk

Why uncertainty management can be a much better approach than risk management

How to Manage Project opportunity and Risk: Why uncertainty Management can be a Much better approach than Risk Management, Third edition Stephen Ward, University of Southampton, England, and Chris Chapman, University of Southampton, England 978-0-470-68649-2 • 520pp • Hardcover • 2012

Based on a sound conceptual foundation yet developed to meet practical concerns, How to Manage Project Opportunity and Risk has become recognized as a standard work on its subject. It sets out the key issues and concepts involved in effective risk and uncertainty management in a clear and accessible way, providing a comprehensive discussion of risk management processes set firmly in the context of the project management task as a whole and focused on improving performance.

the Updated 3rd edition of Project Risk Management

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SETTING THE SCENE. CHAPTER 1: Uncertainty in and around projects . CHAPTER 2: Uncertainty, risk and opportunity . CHAPTER 3: Key motives for uncertainty management . CHAPTER 4: An overview of generic process frameworks . PART II: THE GENERIC PROCESS IN ONE KEY LIFECYCLE STAGE. CHAPTER 5: Define the project . CHAPTER 6: Focus the process . CHAPTER 7: Identify all the relevant sources of uncertainty, response options and conditions . CHAPTER 8: Structure all uncertainty . CHAPTER 9: Clarify ownership . CHAPTER 10: Quantify some uncertainty . CHAPTER 11: Evaluate all the relevant implications . PART III: THE GENERIC PROCESS IN ALL LIFECYCLE STAGES. CHAPTER 12: Fully integrating the strategy shaping stages . CHAPTER 13: Fully integrating the strategy implementation stages . PART IV: KEY CORPORATE IMPLICATIONS. CHAPTER 14: Developing PUMP capability as a project . CHAPTER 15: Contracts and governance as frameworks for enlightened relationship management . CHAPTER 16: A corporate capability perspective .

MBA Catalogue 2013

PRoJeC T ManageMenT

Robert K. Wysocki

Effective Project

Management Traditional, Agile, Extreme

SIXTH EDITION

effective Project Management: Traditional, agile, extreme, sixth edition Robert K. Wysocki 978-1-118-01619-0 • 816pp • Hardcover • 2012

The Sixth Edition of Effective Project Management provides updated and expanded coverage of all major project management techniques, including traditional Linear and Incremental methods, agile Iterative and Adaptive methods, and even extreme methods. It provides more than 50 pages of new material, including a new chapter on career and professional development for project managers. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: DEFINING AND USING PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCESS GROUPS. PART II: ESTABLISHING PROJECT MANAGEMENT LIFE CYCLES C AND STRATEGIES.. PART P III: BUILDING AN EFFECTIVE PROJECT MANAGEMENT INFRASTRUCTURE. PART IV: MANAGING THE REALITIES OF PROJECTS.

E L E V E N T H

E D I T I O N

PROJECT MANAGEMENT A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling

HAROLD R. KERZNER, Ph.D.

Project Management: a systems approach to Planning, scheduling, and Controlling, eleventh edition Harold Kerzner 978-1-118-02227-6 • 1280pp • Hardcover • 2013

The latest edition of the best selling “bible” of project management, Project Management, 11th Edition maintains the streamlined approach of the prior editions. This edition is closely aligned with PMI’s Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK), Fifth Edition. New content includes measuring project management ROI and value to the organization and to customers. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Overview . CHAPTER 2: Project Management Growth: Concepts and Definitions . CHAPTER 3: Organizational Structures . CHAPTER 4: Organizing and Staffing the Project Office and Team . CHAPTER 5: Management Functions . CHAPTER 6: Management of Your Time and Stress . CHAPTER 7: Conflicts . CHAPTER 8: Special Topics . CHAPTER 9: The Variables for Success . CHAPTER 10: Working With Executives . CHAPTER 11: Planning . CHAPTER 12: Network Scheduling Techniques . CHAPTER 13: Project Graphics . CHAPTER 14: Pricing and Estimating . CHAPTER 15: Cost Control . CHAPTER 16: Tradeoff Analysis in a Project Environment . CHAPTER 17: Risk Management . CHAPTER 18: Learning Curves . CHAPTER 19: Contract Management . CHAPTER 20: Quality Management . CHAPTER 21: Modern Developments Project Management . CHAPTER 22: The Business of Scope Changes . CHAPTER 23: The Project Office . CHAPTER 24: Managing Crisis Projects . CHAPTER 25: The Rise, Fall, and Resurrection of Iridium: A Project Management Perspective .

F O U R T H

E D I T I O N

Project Management Case studies, fourth edition Harold Kerzner

PROJECT MANAGEMENT CASE STUDIES

978-1-118-02228-3 • 704pp • Paperback • 2013

Providing a comprehensive collection of case studies in one accessible volume, Project Management Case Studies features one hundred cases drawn from real companies that illustrate both successful and poor implementation of project management. Covering broad areas of project management plus construction and international project management, this fourth edition of the most popular book of project management case studies maintains the popular “super case” on the Iridium Project.

HAROLD R. KERZNER, Ph.D.

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

s T R aT e g Y

neW

E I G H TH

Contemporary strategy analysis, eighth edition, Text and Cases

E D I TI ON

Robert M. Grant, Georgetown University

978-1-119-94188-0 • 744pp • Paperback • 2012

9781119941897 • 848pp • Paperback • 2012

Robert M. Grant combines a highly accessible writing style with a concentration on the fundamentals of value creation and an emphasis on practicality in this

leading strategy text. In this new edition, he includes an even greater focus on strategy implementation that reflects the needs of firms to reconcile scale economies with entrepreneurial flexibility, innovation with cost efficiency, and globalization with local responsiveness. Contemporary Strategy Analysis, 8th Edition has been adopted by leading business schools all across the world. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1: The Concept of Strategy . PART II: THE TOOLS OF STRATEGY ANALYSIS. CHAPTER 2: Goals, Values, and Performance . CHAPTER 3: Industry Analysis: The Fundamentals . CHAPTER 4: Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis . CHAPTER 5: Analyzing Resources and Capabilities . CHAPTER 6: Organization Structure and Management Systems: The Fundamentals of Strategy Implementation . PART III: STRATEGIES FOR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE. CHAPTER 7: The Sources and Dimensions of Competitive Advantage . CHAPTER 8: Industry Evolution and Strategic Change . CHAPTER 9: Technology-based Industries & the Management of Innovation . CHAPTER 10: Competitive Advantage in Mature Industries . PART IV CORPORATE STRATEGY. CHAPTER 11: Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm . CHAPTER 12: Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation . CHAPTER 13: Diversification Strategy . CHAPTER 14: Implementing Corporate Strategy: Managing the Multibusiness Company . CHAPTER 15: Mergers, Acquisitions, and Alliances . CHAPTER 16: Current Trends in Strategic Management?

This edition combines the text with an updated collection of 20 case studies. New and ROBERT M. GRANT updated examples and applications include: Lady Gaga and the Haus of Gaga, Queen Elizabeth and the House of Windsor, IBM, Inditex/Zara, Samsung, and Pixar. Included with every new copy of this text, students will have access to the entire text as an interactive e-book with embedded video clips for each case study, glossary flash cards and self-test questions to check understanding. S

ROBERT M. GRANT

CONTEMPORARY STRATEGY ANALYSIS

XT A ED ND IT IO CA S N E

EDITIO N

ED TE IT XT IO N

EIG HTH

Contemporary strategy analysis, eighth edition, Text only

CONTEMPORARY STRATEGY ANALYSIS

neW

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: INTRODUCTION. CHAPTER 1: The Concept of Strategy . PART II: THE TOOLS OF STRATEGY ANALYSIS. CHAPTER 2: Goals, Values, and Performance . CHAPTER 3: Industry Analysis: The Fundamentals . CHAPTER 4: Further Topics in Industry and Competitive Analysis . CHAPTER 5: Analyzing Resources and Capabilities . CHAPTER 6: Capability Development and Knowledge Management . CHAPTER 7: Fundamentals of Strategy Implementation: Designing Structure and Systems . PART III: THE ANALYSIS OF COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE. CHAPTER 8: The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage . CHAPTER 9: Cost Advantage . CHAPTER 10: Differentiation Advantage . PART IV: BUSINESS STRATEGY FORMULATION & IMPLEMENTATION IN DIFFERENT CONTEXTS. CHAPTER 11: Industry Evolution and Strategic Change . CHAPTER 12: Technology-based Industries & the Management of Innovation . CHAPTER 13: Competitive Advantage in Mature Industries . PART V: CORPORATE STRATEGY. CHAPTER 14: Vertical Integration and the Scope of the Firm . CHAPTER 15: Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation . CHAPTER 16: Diversification Strategy . CHAPTER 17: Implementing Corporate Strategy: Managing the Multibusiness Company . CHAPTER 18: Mergers and Acquisitions . CHAPTER 19: What’s New in Strategic Management?

Designing organizations: an executive guide to strategy, structure, and Process, new and Revised Jay R. Galbraith, Center for Effective Organizations at the University of Southern California 978-0-7879-5745-2 • 224pp • Hardcover • 2001

Designing Organizations provides a concise guide to the process of creating and managing an organisation, no matter how complex, to help them achieve unique competitive advantages and be poised to respond effectively and rapidly to customer demands. Students will find the concrete tools they need to select and implement an efficient design that creates superior and more competitive performance. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction: Six Immutable Forces Shaping Today’s Organizations . CHAPTER 2: Choosing an Effective Design . CHAPTER 3: Matching Strategy and Structure . CHAPTER 4: Linking Processes to Coordination Needs . CHAPTER 5: Creating and Integrating Group Processes . CHAPTER 6: Designing a Reconfigurable Organization . CHAPTER 7: Organizing Around the Customer . CHAPTER 8: Customer-Focused Structures . CHAPTER 9: Creating a Virtual Corporation . CHAPTER 10: Organizing the Continuous Design Process .

MBA Catalogue 2013

s T R aT e g Y

neW

foundations of strategy Robert M. Grant and Judith Jordan 978-0-470-97127-7 • 520pp • Paperback • 2012

Foundations of Strategy is a new concise text written in an accessible style, with a clear, comprehensive approach and sound theoretical depth. Extensive teaching materials such as Case Teaching notes, an Instructor’s Manual, Test Bank and PPT slides are available on an accompanying website. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Concept of Strategy . CHAPTER 2: Industry Analysis . CHAPTER 3: Resources and Capabilities . CHAPTER 4: The Nature and Sources of Competitive Advantage . CHAPTER 5: Business Strategies in Different Industry and Sectoral Contexts . CHAPTER 6: Technology-Based Industries and the Management of Innovation . CHAPTER 7: Corporate Strategy . CHAPTER 8: Global Strategies and the Multinational Corporation . CHAPTER 9: Realising Strategy . CHAPTER 10: Current Trends in Strategic Management .

executing Your business Transformation: How to engage sweeping Change Without Killing Yourself or Your business Mark Morgan, Andrew Cole, Dave Johnson, and Rob Johnson 978-0-470-47440-2 • 228pp • Hardcover • 2010 H O W C H A N G E

T O

E N G A G E

W I T H O U T O R

Y O U R

S W E E P I N G

K I L L I N G

Y O U R S E L F

B U S I N E S S

Written by four authors who have guided business transformation efforts in companies from Monsanto to American Power Conversion, Executing Your Business Transformation provides leaders and their organizations with eleven specific lessons that can improve the probability of successfully dealing with large scale business transformation, strategic execution and organizational change. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Once Upon a Time In Transformation . CHAPTER 2: What Got You Here May Kill You There . CHAPTER 3: Yesterday’s Leadership Skills May Prevent Tomorrow’s Success . CHAPTER 4: There Is No Strategy If Nobody Knows What to Do . CHAPTER 5: Transforming Strategy Requires More Than Expensive Software . Software CHAPTER 6: Transform Human Resources into a Strategic Advantage . CHAPTER 7: Your Customers Are Always Right, Except When They Aren’t . CHAPTER 8: Don’t Let Analysts Run Your Business . CHAPTER 9: Merger Is Not a Four-Letter Word . CHAPTER 10: Who Melted My Cheese? CHAPTER 11: Spin Is Overrated for Creating Value . CHAPTER 12: Consultants Are Not an Excuse for Not Knowing Your Business .

Henry CHesbrougH Author of the bestselling book, Open Innovation

open services innovation: Rethinking Your business to grow and Compete in a new era Henry Chesbrough, Haas School of Business at the University of California, Berkeley 978-0-470-90574-6 • 256pp • Hardcover • 2011

oPenServices InnovatIon

The father of “open innovation” is back with his most significant book yet. Open Services Innovation offers a new approach that demonstrates how open innovation combined with a services approach to business is an effective and powerful way to grow and compete in our increasingly services-driven economy. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: The Case for Open Services Innovation . PART I: A FRAMEWORK TO SPUR INNOVATION AND GROWTH. CHAPTER 2: Think of Your Business as a Services Business . CHAPTER 3: Co-Create with Your Customers . CHAPTER 4: Extend Services Innovation Outside Your Organization . CHAPTER 5: Transform Your Business Model with Services . PART II: OPEN SERVICES INNOVATION IN PRACTICE. CHAPTER 6: Open Services Innovation in Larger Companies . CHAPTER 7: Open Services Innovation in Smaller Companies . CHAPTER 8: Open Services Innovation for Services Businesses . CHAPTER 9: Open Services Innovation in Emerging Economies . CHAPTER 10: Open Services Innovation: The Way Forward . Rethinking YouR Business to

gRow And Compete in A new eRA

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

s T R aT e g Y

neW

strategy in Practice: a Practitioner’s guide to strategic Thinking, second edition George Tovstiga, Henley Business School, University of Reading

second edition

Strategy in Practice

978-1-118-51925-7 • 256pp • Paperback • 2013

The 2nd edition of Strategy in Practice presents a practitioner focussed approach to G eo r G e to vs ti G A strategy. It is increasingly recognised that the ability to adapt classic formulas to changing circumstances and develop fast, sound strategic thinking is what differentiates the successful corporate leader. Developed from experience in industry this successful text will include an instructor site with PowerPoint slides, extra examples and exercises, and links highlighting changing business practice. A PrActitioner’s Guide to strAteGic thinkinG

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Strategy in Practice and Strategic Thinking . CHAPTER 2: Articulating the Strategic Question . CHAPTER 3: Sense Making and Strategic Insight . CHAPTER 4: Insight-Driven Strategic Analysis . CHAPTER 5: Strategic Analysis II: High-Level Analysis . CHAPTER 6: Strategic Analysis III: Supporting–Level Analysis . CHAPTER 7: Strategy Formation and Evaluation of Strategic Options . CHAPTER 8: Insight–Driven Strategy in Perspective .

the Strategy

pathFinDer core conceptS anD Live caSeS SeconD eDition

Duncan angwin

Stephen cummingS

chriS Smith

strategic iQ: Creating smarter Corporations John Wells, Harvard Business School 978-0-470-97828-3 • 272pp • Hardcover • 2012

Why do once-successful companies fail? Strategic IQ identifies 3 types of inertia that can be fatal to the most successful company: CREATING SMARTER strategic/structural/ personal. John Wells CORPORATIONS shows how traditional success metrics such JOHN R. WELLS as revenue growth, profit, market share, reputation and stock price often fail to predict impending disaster, and what to do about it. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SMART STRATEGY. CHAPTER 1 .1: The Need for Smart Strategy . CHAPTER 1 .2: Low Strategic Intelligence . CHAPTER 1 .3: What is Strategy? CHAPTER 1 .4: Moderate Strategic Intelligence . CHAPTER 1 .5: High Strategic Intelligence . PART II: SMART STRUCTURE. CHAPTER 2 .1: The Need for Smart Structure . CHAPTER 2 .2: Smart Asset Management . CHAPTER 2 .3: Formal Architecture – Navigating the Architecture Labyrinth . CHAPTER 2 .4: Informal Architecture – Leveraging Social Mechanics . CHAPTER 2 .5: Towards Smarter Structure . PART III: SMART MINDS. CHAPTER 3 .1: The Need for Smart Minds . CHAPTER 3 .2: What is a Mind? CHAPTER 3 .3: Hiring Smart Minds . CHAPTER 3 .4: Addressing Basic Human Needs . CHAPTER 3 .5: Harnessing Insatiable Human Needs .

Creative strategy: Reconnecting business and innovation

Duncan Angwin, Warwick Business School , Stephen Cummings, Victoria Management School, Victoria University of Wellington, NZ, and Chris Smith, University of Adelaide, South Austrailia

Chris Bilton, University of Warwick, and Stephen Cummings, Victoria University of Wellington, New Zealand

978-0-470-68946-2 • 472pp • Paperback • 2011

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE STRATEGIC ENVIRONMENT. CHAPTER 1: Macro-Shocks . CHAPTER 2: Movers and Shakers . CHAPTER 3: Industry Dynamics . PART II: THE STRATEGIC ORGANIZATION. CHAPTER 4: Corporate Strategy . CHAPTER 5: Strategic Positioning . CHAPTER 6: Corporate Identity . CHAPTER 7: Organic Strategy . PART III: STRATEGIC ADVANCES. CHAPTER 8: Crossing Borders . CHAPTER 9: Guiding Change . PART IV: STRATEGIC FUTURES . CHAPTER 10: Sustain Ability . CHAPTER 11: Maverick Strategies .

MBA Catalogue 2013

STRATEGIC

The strategy Pathfinder: Core Concepts and live Cases, second edition

This new edition of the popular The Strategy Pathfinder updates the micro-cases of real-life problems faced by companies and executives. These micro-cases help students to engage with the kinds of situations they will encounter in their working lives while provoking discussions about key theoretical themes. Original presentation and design makes this an essential companion for both the businessschool classroom and the executive briefcase.

neW

978-1-4051-8019-1 • 286pp • Paperback • 2010

By considering strategy as a creative process (and vice versa), Creative Strategy defines a mindset which switches between opposing processes and characteristics, and which drives every aspect of the business. The authors draw experiences and cases from across this false divide to uncover the creative connections behind successful strategy. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE INNOVATIVE ACT: DISCOVERY AND CREATION. PART II: STRATEGIC ENTREPRENEURSHIP: DILETTANTES AND DILIGENCE. PART III: STRATEGIC LEADERSHIP: ENVISIONING AND INTERACTING.. PART IV: STRATEGIC ORGANIZATION: FOCUSSING AND LOOSENING.

s T R aT e g Y

neW

outthink the Competition: How a new generation of strategists sees options others ignore

global strategies for emerging asia

GLOBAL STRATEGIES FOR EMERGING ASIA editors

ANIL K. GUPTA TOSHIRO WAKAYAMA U. SRINIVASA RANGAN

Anil K. Gupta, Stanford University Technology Ventures Program, Bethesda, Toshiro Wakayama, University of Japan, and Srini Rangan, Babson Park 978-1-118-21797-9 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2012

With in-depth case analyses of the latest trends in Asian markets, including competition between Chinese and Indian companies, this authoritative collection provides executives and students with specific strategies for addressing the rapid growth and increasing competition in Asia. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Kaihan Krippendorff 978-1-118-10508-5 • 246pp • Hardcover • 2011

A Fast Company blogger, and former McKinsey consultant, Krippendorff proves that business competition is undergoing a fundamental paradigm shift and that during such revolutions, outthinkers beat traditionalists. Outthink the Competition presents stories of breakthrough companies like Apple, Google, Vistaprint, and Rosetta Stone whose stunning performances defy traditional explanation and will inspire readers to outthink the competition. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: GEARING UP FOR THE NEW GLOBAL REALITY. CHAPTER 1: Building the Next-Generation Global Enterprise (Anil K . Gupta and Haiyan Wang) . CHAPTER 2: Is Your Business Model Ready to Drill into the Core of the Diamond? (Niraj Dawar and Charan Bagga) . PART II: WINNING THE LOCAL COMPETITION IN EMERGING ASIA. CHAPTER 3: Coevolving Local Adaptation and Global Integration: The Case of Panasonic China (Toshiro Wakayama, Junjiro Shintaku, Tomofumi Amano and Takafumi Kikuchi) . CHAPTER 4: How Some Japanese Firms Have Succeeded Against Low-Cost Competitors in Emerging Markets (Junjiro Shintaku and Tomofumi Amano) . CHAPTER 5: Transferring Home-Grown Management Practices: The Case of Toyota in China (Akira Tanaka and Yue Wang) . PART III: ACQUISITION-DRIVEN GLOBALIZATION FROM EMERGING ASIA. CHAPTER 6: Dubious Value of International Acquisitions by Emerging Economy Firms: The Case of Indian Firms (Aneel Karnani) . CHAPTER 7: Acquisition Advantage: How Emerging Market Firms Use Acquisitions, and What Incumbents Can Do About It (U . Srinivasa Rangan and Sam Hariharan) . PART IV: INNOVATION OPPORTUNITIES AND CHALLENGES IN EMERGING ASIA. CHAPTER 8: Innovating in the Vortex: New Perspectives from Radically Different Business Experiences in India (Srikanth Kannapan and Kuruvilla Lukose) . CHAPTER 9: Protecting Intellectual Property in China: A View from the Field (Andreas Schotter and Mary B . Teagarden) . CHAPTER 10: Competing in Emerging Asia: Reflections and Conclusions (Anil K . Gupta, U . Srinivasa Rangan and Toshiro Wakayama) .

PART I: THE FOUNDATION. CHAPTER 1: Evolution through Revolution . CHAPTER 2: Today’s Business Revolution . PART II: THE NEW OUTTHINKER PLAYBOOK. CHAPTER 3: Move Early to the Next Battleground . CHAPTER 4: Coordinate the Uncoordinated . CHAPTER 5: Force Two-Front Battles . CHAPTER 6: Be Good . CHAPTER 7: Create Something Out of Nothing. PART III: THE FIVE HABITS OF OUTTHINKERS. CHAPTER 8: Mental Time Travel . CHAPTER 9: Attacking the Interconnected System . CHAPTER 10: Frame Shifting . CHAPTER 11: A Disruptive Mind-Set . CHAPTER 12: Shaping Perceptions . PART IV: APPLY THE OUTTHINKER PROCESS. CHAPTER 13: Step 1: Imagine . CHAPTER 14: Step 2: Dissect . CHAPTER 15: Step 3: Expand . CHAPTER 16: Step 4: Analyze . CHAPTER 17: Step 5: Sell . PART V: REBUILDING THE ORGANIZATION FROM WITHIN. CHAPTER 18: Phase 1: Establish Multiple Points of Differentiation . CHAPTER 19: Phase 2: Create Playbook Asymmetry . CHAPTER 20: Phase 3: Construct an Outthinker Culture . Appendix A: The Research . Appendix B: The 36 Stratagems . Appendix C: Tools .

David Besanko

neW

| David Dranove | Mark Shanley | Scott Schaefer

economics of strategy, sixth edition David Besanko, David Dranove, Scott Schaefer, and Mark Shanley

neW

scenario Planning: a field guide to the future Woody Wade 978-1-118-17015-1 • 204pp Paperback • 2012

A FIELD GUIDE TO THE FUTURE

Scenario Planning serves as a guide to taking a long-term look at your business, your industry, and the world, posing thoughtful questions about the possible consequences of some current (and possible future) trends. This visual book will help you answer this question: Is my organization ready for every possibility? D E S I G N E D

B Y

N A T H A L I E

W A G N E R

ECONOMICS of STRATEGY

978-1-118-31918-5 • 624pp • Paperback • 2012

A comprehensive text that provides a link between economic theory and business International Student Version applications that is at once technical in its approach and accessible due to its numerous examples and clear writing styles. The sixth edition uses economic theory to bring new insights to popular topics in modern strategy. By presenting basic concepts of economic theory with ideas in modern strategy literature, the book provides readers with a logical framework for understanding the strategic activities within a firm. Sixth Edition

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Escaping the Tyranny of the Present . CHAPTER 2: How-To . CHAPTER 3: Case Studies: The Real World . CHAPTER 4: Black Swans . CHAPTER 5: Are You Ready?

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

soCial MeDia

neW

The Handbook of online and social Media Research: Tools and Techniques for Market Researchers

hello ¡hola!

The social Media Mba: Your Competitive edge in social Media strategy Development and Delivery Christer Holloman 978-1-119-96323-3 • 276pp • Hardcover • 2012

In The Social Media MBA editor Christer Your Competitive Edge in Social Media Holloman has crowd sourced 15 thought Strategy Development & Delivery leaders from 4 continents to offer an Christer Holloman exceptional educational program written for experienced social media professionals and students. This all encompassing guide will also give students more intellectual support and confidence to discuss social media on a higher level with peers or inspire colleagues.

The handbook of online and Social Media ReSeaRch Tools and Techniques for Market Researchers

Ray Poynter 978-0-470-71040-1 • 464pp • Hardcover • 2010

RAY POYNTER

Drawing together the new techniques available to the market researcher into a single reference, The Handbook of Online and Social Media Research explores how these innovations are being used by the leaders in the field. This groundbreaking reference examines why traditional research is broken, both in theory and practice, and includes chapters on online research communities, community panels, blog mining, social networks, mobile research, e-ethnography, predictive markets, and DIY research.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: FOUNDATION. CHAPTER 1: Quick Recap . CHAPTER 2: Bridging the Social Media Gap . PART II: STRATEGY DEVELOPMENT. CHAPTER 3: Inspiring and Facilitating Creativity . CHAPTER 4: The Rise of Branded Content . CHAPTER 5: Power of Integration . CHAPTER 6: Intent is the New Demographic . CHAPTER 7: Targeting the Easily Influenced Not the Highly Influential . PART III: STRATEGY DELIVERY. CHAPTER 8: Your Best Advocates . CHAPTER 9: The Profit Manifesto . CHAPTER 10: Social Media Business Engineering . CHAPTER 11: Power Struggles of the Advocate Age . PART IV: CASE STUDIES. CHAPTER 12: ARM . CHAPTER 13: Aviva . CHAPTER 14: Dell . CHAPTER 15: Evans Cycles . CHAPTER 16: GlaxoSmithKline . CHAPTER 17: Kodak . CHAPTER 18: Royal Philips Electronics . CHAPTER 19: Sage . PART V: THE FUTURE. CHAPTER 20: The Ethnocentric Bias . CHAPTER 21: Digital Dragons, Elephants and Tigers . CHAPTER 22: Design Thinking and Social Media . CHAPTER 23: God Technology .

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: ONLINE QUANTITATIVE SURVEY RESEARCH. CHAPTER 1: Overview of Online Quantitative Research . CHAPTER 2: Web Survey Systems . CHAPTER 3: Designing Online Surveys . CHAPTER 4: Working with Panels and Databases . CHAPTER 5: Running an Online Survey and Summary . PART II: QUALITATIVE RESEARCH. CHAPTER 6: Overview of Online Qualitative Research . CHAPTER 7: Online Focus Groups . CHAPTER 8: Bulletin Board Groups and Parallel IDIs . CHAPTER 9: Other Online Qualitative Methods and Summary of Online Qualitative Research . PART III: SOCIAL MEDIA. CHAPTER 10: Participatory Blogs as Research Tools . CHAPTER 11: Online Research Communities/MROCs . CHAPTER 12: Blog and Buzz Mining . CHAPTER 13: Other Social Media Topics and Summary . PART IV: RESEARCH TOPICS. CHAPTER 14: Specialist Research Areas . CHAPTER 15: Website Research . CHAPTER 16: Research Techniques and Approaches . CHAPTER 17: The Business of Market Research . PART V: BREAKING NEWS! CHAPTER 18: NEWMR . CHAPTER 19: Trends and Innovations . CHAPTER 20: An Overview of Online and Social Media Research .

neW

The social Media Mba in Practice

The social Media Mba in Practice Christer Holloman 978-1-118-52454-1 • 200pp • Hardcover • 2013

This book will present readers with the most comprehensive set of ‘blue prints’ ever published in one book for how to deliver social media strategies more successfully. The book will showcase a wide range of detailed and inspiring examples of how admired brands and companies have delivered their strategies. Each case is full of hand-on-advice that readers can make use of immediately. The book is written by Christer Holloman, editor of The Social Media MBA. CHRISTER HOLLOMAN TABLE OF CONTENTS: Each chapter of the book is a different case study from a leading company tackling a different issue of their social media strategy . Examples include: Nationwide, Honda, Sage, Cisco, Barclay Card US, Dell, play .com, Xerox, PwC, Hobart, confused .com, Rentokil, Getty Images, F5, Sony Music, Allianz, Nokia, Electrolux and more .

MBA Catalogue 2013

soCial MeDia

neW

Social Media Marketing AN H

UR A DAY SECOND EDITION

social Media Marketing: an Hour a Day, second edition Dave Evans and Susan Bratton (Foreword by) 978-1-118-19449-2 • 432pp • Paperback • 2012

In the newest editio n of his top-selling book, social media expert Dave Evans bypasses theory to provide students with practical, hands-on advice on developing, implementing, and measuring social media marketing campaigns. Revised with more than 100 pages of new material, Social Media Marketing includes new and updated coverage on Facebook, Twitter, and Google+; the latest on listening and analytics platforms; how to incorporate mobile and location-based services like Foursquare and Gowalla into your plan; and more. SERIOUS SKILLS.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: THE FOUNDATION OF SOCIAL MEDIA. CHAPTER 1: Backlash . CHAPTER 2: The Marketer’s Dilemma . CHAPTER 3: What Is Social Media? PART II: MONTH 1: PREPARE FOR SOCIAL MARKETING. CHAPTER 4: Week 1: Web 2 .0, The Social Web . CHAPTER 5: Week 2: The Social Feedback Cycle . CHAPTER 6: Week 3: Touchpoint Analysis . CHAPTER 7: Week 4: Influence and Measurement . PART III: MONTH 2: SOCIAL MEDIA CHANNELS. CHAPTER 8: Week 1: Build a Social Media Campaign . CHAPTER 9: Week 2: Social Platforms . CHAPTER 10: Week 3: Social Content—Text, Photos, Audio, and Video . CHAPTER 11: Week 4: Social Content—Ratings, Reviews, and Recommendations . CHAPTER 12: Week 5: Social Interactions . PART IV: MONTH 3: COMPLETE YOUR PLAN. CHAPTER 13: Week 1: Objectives, Metrics, and ROI . CHAPTER 14: Week 2: Present Your Social Media Plan .

Ma tt B a iley

INSIDE Your Google AdWords™ gift card worth $25!

Foreword by Avinash Kaushik, Author of Web Analytics 2.0 and Analytics Evangelist, Google

Internet Marketing AN H

SERIOUS SKILLS.

Dave Evans with Jake McKee

Foreword by Susan Bratton, CEO, Personal Life Media, Inc.

Da ve E va n s Foreword by Susan Bratton, CEO of Personal Life Media

UR A DAY

internet Marketing: an Hour a Day Matt Bailey 978-0-470-63374-8 • 600pp • Paperback • 2011

Sybex’s Internet Marketing: An Hour a Day is the only step-by-step, task-based guide to all aspects of a successful internet marketing strategy that features the popular An Hour a Day approach and covers the integration of social media.

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: UNDERSTANDING TODAY’S INTERNET MARKETING. PART II: MONTH 1: EVALUATE AND RESEARCH. PART III: MONTH 2: DEVELOP CONTENT THAT CONVERTS. PART IV: MONTH 3: DEVELOP GOOD SITE ARCHITECTURE. PART V: MONTH 4: EXPAND YOUR REACH AND MEASURE RESULTS.

Social Media Marketing

The Next Generation of Business Engagement

create a presence

social CRM tools + platforms

collaboration + engagement

act on feedback

social Media Marketing: The next generation of business engagement Dave Evans, Susan Bratton (Foreword by), with Jake McKee 978-0-470-63403-5 • 408pp • Paperback • 2010

consume curate create collaborate

Social Media Marketing takes students to the next step in social technology and its application in business. In particular, this book explains how to successfully implement a variety tools, how to ensure higher levels of customer engagement, and how to build on the lessons learned and information gleaned from first-generation social media marketing efforts and to carry this across your organization. SERIOUS SKILLS.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SOCIAL BUSINESS FUNDAMENTALS. CHAPTER 1: Social Media and Customer Engagement . CHAPTER 2: The New Role of the Customer . CHAPTER 3: Build a Social Business . CHAPTER 4: The Social Business Ecosystem . PART II: RUN A SOCIAL BUSINESS. CHAPTER 5: Social Technology and Business Decisions . CHAPTER 6: Social Analytics, Metrics, and Measurement . CHAPTER 7: Five Essential Tips . PART III: SOCIAL BUSINESS BUILDING BLOCKS. CHAPTER 8: Engagement on the Social Web . CHAPTER 9: Social CRM . CHAPTER 10: Social Objects . CHAPTER 11: The Social Graph . CHAPTER 12: Social Applications .

Dave Peck

Foreword by Brian Solis, Author of Engage! and Principal, Altimeter Group

Think You Engage

Think before You engage: 100 Questions to ask before starting a social Media Marketing Campaign Dave Peck 978-1-118-01881-1 • 312pp • Paperback • 2011

Social media guru and author David Peck presents a working knowledge of the different social media tools that are needed to effectively embark on a social media marketing campaign. Answering a plethora of common questions, Think Before You Engage shows students how to engage customers with social media in a way that will keep them coming back for more. Starting a Social Media Marketing Campaign

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Planning a Brand . CHAPTER 2: Building an Online Identity . CHAPTER 3: Choosing the Right Social Networks . CHAPTER 4: Creating a Website . CHAPTER 5: Making a Website Social . CHAPTER 6: Twitter . CHAPTER 7: Facebook . CHAPTER 8: LinkedIn . CHAPTER 9: Other Key Social Media Websites . CHAPTER 10: Getting Found Online . CHAPTER 11: Monitoring an Online Brand . CHAPTER 12: The Real World . CHAPTER 13: Dealing with Difficult Situations . CHAPTER 14: Creating a Social Media Strategy . CHAPTER 15: Evolving a Brand .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

soCial MeDia

neW

share This: The social Media Handbook for PR Professionals “Social media has become an invaluable tool in my PR armoury by giving me a direct voice to speak to members of the media and the general public. This book is a useful guide to using social media effectively.” - Lord Sugar

CIPR - The Chartered Institute of Public Relations 978-1-118-40484-3 • 264pp • Hardcover • 2012

Share This is a practical handbook to the biggest changes taking place in the media and its professions by the Chartered Institute of Public Relations (CIPR) Social Media Panel. The book was conceived and written by more than 20 public relations practitioners representing a cross-section of public, private and voluntary sector expertise using many of the social tools and techniques that it addresses.

THE SOCIAL MEDIA HANDBOOK FOR PR PROFESSIONALS THE CHARTERED INSTITUTE OF PUBLIC RELATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: CHANGING MEDIA, CHANGING PR. CHAPTER 1: An Introduction to Social Networks . PART II: PLANNING. CHAPTER 2: Kick-Start Your Social Media Strategy . CHAPTER 3: What has Google Ever Done for PR? CHAPTER 4: Integrating Traditional and Social Media . CHAPTER 5: Social Media Guidelines: Creating Freedom Within a Framework . CHAPTER 6: Open Communication: Psychology, Ethics and Etiquette . PART III: NETWORKS. CHAPTER 7: Facebook: A Way to Engage with Your Audiences . CHAPTER 8: Twitter: The Unstoppable Rise of Microblogging . CHAPTER 9: LinkedIn: Social Networking for Professionals . CHAPTER 10: Google+: Better than Buzz? CHAPTER 11: The Business of Blogging . PART IV: ONLINE MEDIA RELATIONS. CHAPTER 12: Modern Media Relations and Social Media Newsrooms . CHAPTER 13: Brands as Media . CHAPTER 14: The Future of Broadcast . CHAPTER 15: Media Relations Modernised . CHAPTER 16: Pitching Using Social Media . PART V: MONITORING AND MEASUREMENT. CHAPTER 17: Real-Time Public Relations . CHAPTER 18: Social Media Monitoring . CHAPTER 19: Measuring Social Media . PART VI: SKILLS. CHAPTER 20: Skilling Up for the Future . CHAPTER 21: The Future of PR Education . PART VII: INDUSTRY CHANGE. CHAPTER 22: Employee Engagement: How Social Media are Changing Internal Communication . CHAPTER 23: Back to the Future for Public Sector Communications . CHAPTER 24: Modernising Public Affairs for the Digital Age . CHAPTER 25: Social Media and the Third Sector . PART VIII: THE FUTURE. CHAPTER 27: Here Comes Web 3 .0 and the Internet of Things .

neW N A N C Y F LY N N

THE

Social Media

The social Media Handbook: Rules, Policies, and best Practices to successfully Manage Your organization’s social Media Presence, Posts, and Potential Nancy Flynn 978-1-118-08462-5 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2012

HANDBOOK POLICIES AND BEST PRACTICES TO E F F EC T I V E LY M A N A G E YO U R O R G A N I Z AT I O N ’ S

The Social Media Handbook is a comprehensive risk and compliance management toolkit that walks readers step-by-step through the process of developing and implementing effective social media policy and compliance management programs that are designed to minimize, and in some cases prevent, social networking and web 2.0 risks and other electronic disasters. Throughout this important resource, Nancy Flynn offers a guide to best practices for creating safe, effective, and compliant electronic business communications.

S O C I A L M E D I A P R E S E N C E , P O S T S , A N D P OT E N T I A L R I S KS

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Media Policy and Compliance Management Program . CHAPTER 2: Social Media and the Law: What Every Organization Needs to Know About Legal Compliance . CHAPTER 3: Social Networking Creates Legal Evidence: How to Manage Records and E-Discovery Compliantly . CHAPTER 4: Regulatory Compliance: Government and Industry Watchdogs Keep an Eye on the Social Web . CHAPTER 5: Privacy, Security, and Social Media: What Every Employer—and User—Should Know . CHAPTER 6: Blog Risks and Compliance Rules . CHAPTER 7: Mobile Devices Drive Social Media Risks . CHAPTER 8: Seven-Step Action Plan for Successful Social Media Policy and Compliance Management . CHAPTER 9: Conduct a Social Media Policy Audit . CHAPTER 10: Writing Effective Social Media Policies . CHAPTER 11: Content Rules Are Critical to Compliance . CHAPTER 12: Enforce Policy Compliance with Education . CHAPTER 13: Reputation Management: Responding to and Recovering from a Social Networking Nightmare . CHAPTER 14: Sample Policies: Social Media, Blogs, and Related AUPs . CHAPTER 15: Glossary of Social Media, Legal, Regulatory, and Technology Terms .

MBA Catalogue 2013

soCial MeDia

SMITH WOLLAN

edia

ghout

usiness

at your

THE SOCIAL MEDIA MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK

ng nsive mmuith, and rics,

THE

SOCIAL MEDIA MANAGEMENT HANDBOOK EVERYTHING YOU NEED TO KNOW TO GET SOCIAL MEDIA WORKING IN YOUR BUSINESS STRATEGY, CULTURE, METRICS, POLICIES, ROLES, AND RESPONSIBILITIES

The social Media Management Handbook: everything You need To Know To get social Media Working in Your business While marketing and PR departments are usually early adopters, social media’s potential extends far beyond these functions. More direct interaction with customers, greater organizational agility and coordination, better market data and business intelligence, and more efficient internal processes are just some potential benefits. But realizing these goals is no cakewalk, and the new opportunities also bring new pitfalls. So what’s the smart way to bring social media initiatives to your company?

Robert Wollan, Nick Smith, Catherine Zhou The Social Media Management Handbook helps you work across such disparate areas as IT, customer service, sales, communications, and more. It explains policies, procedures, roles and responsibilities, metrics, strategies, incentives, and legal issues that may arise. When you use the comprehensive strategies described in this book, you’ll be able to:

• 978-0-470-65124-7 • 352pp • Hardcover • 2011 Make the business case for social media investments by demonstrating ROI and other key supporting data

• Develop a clear social media strategy and integrate

it with your overall strategy • Understand the IT implications of social media use • Take small, initial successes and scale them to create significant results for the entire enterprise • Create consistent customer experiences and interactions • Employ an effective social media management framework • Adopt effective social media governance policies to ensure legal compliance • And much more

BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: SOCIAL MEDIA STRATEGY FOR ORGANIZATIONS. PART II: MARKETING AND SALES IN SOCIAL MEDIA. PART III: CUSTOMER SERVICE AND SUPPORT WITH SOCIAL MEDIA. PART IV: BEYOND THE “PILOT” PHASE: THE CORE COMPONENTS OF THE AGILE DIGITAL ENTERPRISE. PART V: EMPOWERING EMPLOYEES FOR SOCIAL MEDIA SUCCESS.

Social Media Metrics D O W H AT YOU N E V E R T H O U G H T P O SS I B L E W I T H S O C I A L M E D I A M E T R I C S

JO H N LOV E T T

+ Insider Tips Tips, tricks, and secrets for quantifying social media success + Valuable Insights Eye-opening strategies for moving beyond “counting metrics” to “business value metrics” + Unbeatable Advice Real-world solutions for developing a scalable framework for social media measurement

Erik Qualman

The Social Media Management Handbook is the first guide to explain, clearly and concretely, how to implement key social media strategies throughout the organization. Use this practical, step-by-step road map to ensure your Facebook, Twitter, and other Web 2.0 initiatives achieve business goals and drive your overall enterprise strategy.

A comprehensive reference guide to managing social media efforts internally within NICK SMITH & ROBERT WOLLAN organizations, The Social Media ManageCATHERINE ZHOU ment Handbook explains social media policies, procedures, roles and responsibilities, metrics, strategies, incentives, legal issues, etc. WITH

socialnomics: How social Media Transforms the Way We live and Do business, Revised and updated edition

$27.95 USA / $33.95 CAN

How do organizations manage social media effectively?

978-0-470-63884-2 • 320pp • Paperback • 2010 revised and

updated

socialnomics how social media transforms the way we live and do business

erik qualman

The ultimate guide to the social media revolution, Socialnomics delivers a fascinating look at the business implications of social media. It shows how to tap its considerable power to increase sales, cut marketing costs, and communicate directly with consumers.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Word of Mouth Goes World of Mouth . CHAPTER 2: Social Media = Preventative Behavior . CHAPTER 3: Social Media = Braggadocian Behavior . CHAPTER 4: Obama’s Success Driven by Social Media . CHAPTER 5: I Care More about What My Neighbor Thinks than What Google Thinks . CHAPTER 6: Death of Social Schizophrenia . CHAPTER 7: Winners and Losers in a 140-Character World . CHAPTER 8: Next Steps for Companies and The “Glass House Generation” . CHAPTER 9: Social Media Rolodex and Resources . CHAPTER 10: Other Insights and FAQs .

social Media Metrics secrets John Lovett 978-0-470-93627-6 • 384pp • Paperback • 2011

Expert John Lovett delivers insider tips, valuable insights, and unbeatable advice crucial to those who need to grow and measure the effectiveness and ROI of social media for their company on the worldwide stage. Written in a conversational tone, Social Media Metrics Secrets goes behind the scenes to present you with unbeatable advice and unparalleled insight into social media metrics. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

PART I: ADDRESSING THE SOCIAL DATA DILEMMA. CHAPTER 1: Going Pro with Social Media . CHAPTER 2: Riding the Social Data Wave: Information CHAPTER 3: Activating Your Socially Connected Business . PART II: MANAGING SOCIAL MEDIA WITH ANALYTICS. CHAPTER 4: EmbracChurning Data into Information . ing Social Analytics . CHAPTER 5: Using the Social Analytics Framework . CHAPTER 6: Deploying a Process of Continuous Optimization . PART III: FINDING THE BIG SOCIAL MEDIA PAYOFF. CHAPTER 7: Tracking the Elusive ROI in Social Media . CHAPTER 8: Taking the Corporate Plunge . CHAPTER 9: Planning for a Socially Networked Future .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

s u s Ta i n a b i l i T Y

The a to Z of Corporate social Responsibility, second edition Wayne Visser, CSR International, London, UK, Dirk Matten, York University Business School, Toronto, ON, Canada, Manfred Pohl, ICCA, The Netherlands, Germany, and Nick Tolhurst, ICCA, The Netherlands, United Kingdom 978-0-470-68650-8 • 500pp • Paperback • 2010

The A to Z of Corporate Social Responsibility is a unique publication and is the culmination of over a hundred of the world’s leading thinkers, opinion formers, academic and business people providing an easy-to-use guide to CSR: from general concepts such as sustainability, stakeholder management, business ethics and human rights to more specific topics such as carbon trading, microfinance, biodiversity, the Base of the Pyramid model and globalization.

The sustainable Mba: The Manager’s guide to green business Giselle Weybrecht 978-0-470-74114-6 • 416pp • Hardcover • 2009

Organized like a business school course, The Sustainable MBA covers sustainability as it relates to Accounting, Economics, Entrepreneurship, Ethics, Finance, Marketing, Operations, Organizational Behavior and Strategy. It brings together all the pieces of the business and sustainability puzzle in an easy to use, easy to understand format. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART 1: SETTING THE SCENE. CHAPTER 1: About this book . CHAPTER 2: What is sustainability? CHAPTER 3: What does this mean for business? CHAPTER 4: The sustainability journey . CHAPTER 5: Getting started . PART 2: THE CORE TOPICS. CHAPTER 6: Accounting . CHAPTER 7: Economics . CHAPTER 8: Entrepreneurship . CHAPTER 9: Ethics and corporate governance . CHAPTER 10: Finance . CHAPTER 11: Marketing . CHAPTER 12: Operations . CHAPTER 13: Organizational behaviour . CHAPTER 14: Strategy . PART 3: TOOLS. CHAPTER 15: Tools for monitoring, managing and improving performance . CHAPTER 16: Tools for greening offices and buildings . PART 4: WRAPPING IT ALL UP. CHAPTER 17: What can I do? CHAPTER 18: What will the future bring?

MBA Catalogue 2013

The new Pioneers: sustainable business success through social innovation and social entrepreneurship Tania Ellis

THE NEW

PIONEERS Sustainable business success through social innovation and social entrepreneurship

TANIA ELLIS Foreword by Klaus Schwab, founder of the World Economic Forum

978-0-470-74842-8 • 280pp • Hardcover • 2010

With a wide array of cases from all over the world, Tania Ellis explains the key principles of sustainable business success. The New Pioneers provides insight into the new rules that are paving the way for business unusual, for the benefit of humanity and the bottom line.

TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: NEW TIMES – NEW NEEDS. CHAPTER 1: Outer globalization . CHAPTER 2: Inner globalization . PART II: NEW NEEDS – NEW SOLUTIONS. CHAPTER 3: The routes to sustainable business success . CHAPTER 4: Visions for the future .

ERIC LOWITT

THE FUTURE

The future of Value: How sustainability Creates Value Through Competitive Differentiation Eric Lowitt 978-1-118-07452-7 • 272pp • Hardcover • 2011

OF VALUE

The Future of Value reveals what it takes for companies to grow and outperform the competition in today’s growth-constrained, sustainability conscious world. Author Eric How Sustainability Creates Value Through Lowitt shows leaders how to use sustainCompetitive Differentiation ability as a powerful, pragmatic lens to enhance business performance. He also explores how to craft and oversee a portfolio of effective tools, develop competitive strategies, and adjust value chain activities, talent management practices, and corporate policies to help organizations execute powerful sustainability strategies. TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: HOW SUSTAINABILITY CREATES VALUE. CHAPTER 1: Sustainable Companies Are Market Leaders . CHAPTER 2: Sustainable Market Leaders Compete on Sustainability . CHAPTER 3: Competing on Sustainability Creates Value . PART II: HOW TO CREATE VALUE IN YOUR ORGANIZATION. CHAPTER 4: Crafting Sustainability Strategy . CHAPTER 5: Leading Strategy and Management Efforts . CHAPTER 6: Embedding Sustainability into the Value Chain . CHAPTER 7: Analyzing and Communicating Performance . CHAPTER 8: Renewing Sustainability Efforts . CHAPTER 9: Keeping Sustainable and Agile . Appendix A: Research Methodology . Appendix B: Interviewees . Appendix C: Interview Protocol .

TRaining

first Principles of instruction M. David Merritt 978-0-470-90040-6 • 528pp • Paperback • 2012

This handy resource describes and illustrates the concepts underlying the “First Principles of Instruction” and illustrates First Principles and their application in a wide variety of instructional products. First Principles of Instruction introduces the e3 Course Critique Checklist that can be used to evaluate existing instructional product. It also provides directions for applying this checklist and illustrates its use for a variety of different kinds of courses. BRIEF TABLE OF CONTENTS: PART I: IDENTIFYING E3 INSTRUCTION. PART II: DESIGNING E3 INSTRUCTION. PART III: SUPPORT FOR FIRST PRINCIPLES OF INSTRUCTION.

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

2nd

SIX DISCIPLINES The

Edition

of Breakthrough Learning

The six Disciplines of breakthrough learning: How to Turn Training and Development into business Results, second edition Calhoun W. Wick, Roy V. H. Pollock, and Andy Jefferson

How to Turn Training and Development into Business Results

978-0-470-52652-1 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2010

Whether you’re an HR or OD professional or work in a training department, learn to apply the principles of follow-through management within your organization in the Second Edition of this bestselling resource. The Six Disciplines of Breakthrough Learning incorporates new research on learning and learning transfer, along with new case studies, interviews, and tools. Calhoun Wick, Roy Pollock, and Andrew Jefferson

TABLE OF CONTENTS: Introduction: The Six Ds . CHAPTER 1: D1 . Define Outcomes in Business Terms . CHAPTER 2: D2 . Design Complete Experience . CHAPTER 3: D3 . Deliver for Application . CHAPTER 4: D4 . Drive Follow-Through . CHAPTER 5: D5 . Deploy Active Support . CHAPTER 6: D6 . Document Results .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

oTHeR anD sPeCial

Multivariate analysis for the biobehavioral and social sciences: a graphical approach

Multivariate Analysis for the Biobehavioral and Social Sciences A Graphical Approach Bruce L. Brown, Suzanne B. Hendrix, Dawson W. Hedges, Timothy B. Smith

Bruce L. Brown, PhD, Brigham Young University in Provo, UT, Suzanne B. Hendrix, PhD, Brigham Young University in Provo, UT, Dawson W. Hedges, MD, Brigham Young University in Provo, UT, and Timothy B. Smith, PhD 978-0-470-53756-5 • 496pp • Hardcover • 2011

An insightful guide to understanding and visualizing multivariate statistics using SAS, STATA, and SPSS, Multivariate Analysis for the Biobehavioral and Social Sciences outlines the essential multivariate methods for understanding data in the social and biobehavioral sciences. Using real-world data and the latest software applications, the book addresses the topic in a comprehensible and hands-on manner, making complex mathematical concepts accessible to readers. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Overview Of Multivariate and Regression Methods . CHAPTER 2: The Seven Habits of Highly Effective Quants: A Review of Elementary Statistics Using Matrix Algebra . CHAPTER 3: Fundamentals of Matrix Algebra . CHAPTER 4: Factor Analysis and Related Methods: Quintessentially Multivariate . CHAPTER 5: Multivariate Graphics . CHAPTER 6: Canonical Correlation: The Underused Method . CHAPTER 7: Hotelling’s T 2 as The Simplest Case of Multivariate Inference . CHAPTER 8: Multivariate Analysis Of Variance . CHAPTER 9: Multiple Regression and The General Linear Model . Appendices: Statistical Tables .

Mathematical Statistics with Resampling and R Laura Chihara and Tim Hesterberg

Mathematical statistics with Resampling and R Laura M. Chihara, PhD, University of Minnesota, and Tim C. Hesterberg, PhD, Stanford University 978-1-118-02985-5 • 440pp • Hardcover • 2011

What sets Mathematical Statistics with Resampling and R apart from other mathematical statistics books is the use of modern resampling techniques that engage and motivate the reader. Throughout the book, case studies on diverse subjects such as flight delays, birth weights of babies, and telephone company repair times illustrate the relevance of the real-world applications of the discussed material. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Data and Case Studies . CHAPTER 2: Exploratory Data Analysis . CHAPTER 3: Hypothesis Testing . CHAPTER 4: Sampling Distributions . CHAPTER 5: The Bootstrap . CHAPTER 6: Estimation . CHAPTER 7: Classical Inference: Confidence Intervals . CHAPTER 8: Classical Inference: Hypothesis Testing . CHAPTER 9: Regression . CHAPTER 10: Bayesian Methods . CHAPTER 11: Additional Topics . Appendix A: Review of Probability . Appendix B: Probability Distributions . Appendix C: Distributions Quick Reference .

neW

The R book, second edition

THE R BOOK

SECOND EDITION

MICHAEL J. CRAWLEY

Michael J. Crawley 978-0-470-97392-9 • 960pp • Hardcover • 2012

As one of the most powerful and flexible statistical software packages, R is fast becoming the universal language in which to obtain and present results. The R Book, 2nd Edition offers user-friendly explanations of the advantages of the R environment to beginners and intermediate users in a range of disciplines, from science and engineering to medicine and economics. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Getting Started . CHAPTER 2 Essentials of the R Language . CHAPTER 3: Data Input . CHAPTER 4: Dataframes . CHAPTER 5: Graphics . CHAPTER 6: Tables . CHAPTER 7: Mathematics . CHAPTER 8: Classical Tests . CHAPTER 9: Statistical Modelling . CHAPTER 10: Regression . CHAPTER 11: Analysis of Variance . CHAPTER 12: Analysis of Covariance . CHAPTER 13: Generalized Linear Models . CHAPTER 14: Count Data . CHAPTER 15: Count Data in Tables . CHAPTER 16: Proportion Data . CHAPTER 17: Binary Response Variables . CHAPTER 18: Generalized Additive Models . CHAPTER 19: Mixed-Effects Models . CHAPTER 20: Non-linear Regression . CHAPTER 21: Meta-analysis . CHAPTER 22: Bayesian statistics . CHAPTER: 23 Tree Models . CHAPTER 24: Time Series Analysis . CHAPTER 25: Multivariate Statistics . CHAPTER 26: Spatial Statistics . CHAPTER 27: Survival Analysis . CHAPTER 28: Simulation Models . CHAPTER 29: Changing the Look of Graphics .

MBA Catalogue 2013

oTHeR anD sPeCial

neW “Without trust, nothing can be achieved. Liars and Outliers is a brilliant analysis of the role of trust in society and business.” —Klaus Schwab, Founder and Executive Chairman, World Economic Forum

LIARS & OUTLIERS ENABLING THE TRUST THAT SOCIETY NEEDS TO THRIVE

liars and outliers: enabling the Trust that society needs to Thrive Bruce Schneier

Personal Productivity

neW

Personal Productivity secrets

Maura Nevel Thomas 978-1-118-17967-3 • 312pp • Paperback • 2012

DO WHAT YOU NEVER THOUGHT POSSIBLE WITH YOUR TIME AND ATTENTION…AND REGAIN CONTROL OF YOUR LIFE

Liars and Outliers reaches across academic disciplines to develop an understanding of trust, cooperation, and social stability. It’s a Bruce Schneier series of evolutionary tricks, social pressures, legal mechanisms, and physical barriers and Bruce Schneier, world-renowned for his level-headed thinking on security and technology, tackles this complex subject head-on.

Personal Productivity Secrets reveals updated and vital information for achieving your significant results, and being as productive as you can be in a fast-paced, technologydriven society. It helps you understand how your brain absorbs, organizes, and filters the daily deluge of information, to appreciate the difference between “Time Management” and “Attention Management” and create a plan for navigating endless technology options to keep you productive, focused and in control.

TABLE OF CONTENTS:

CHAPTER 1: Overview . PART I: THE SCIENCE OF TRUST. CHAPTER 2: A Natural History of Security . CHAPTER 3: The Evolution of Cooperation . CHAPTER 4: A Social History of Trust . CHAPTER 5: Societal Dilemmas . PART II: A MODEL OF TRUST. CHAPTER 6: Societal Pressures . CHAPTER 7: Moral Pressures . CHAPTER 8: Reputational Pressures . CHAPTER 9: Institutional Pressures . CHAPTER 10: Security Systems . PART III: THE REAL WORLD. CHAPTER 11: Competing Interests . CHAPTER 12: Organizations . CHAPTER 13: Corporations . CHAPTER 14: Institutions . PART IV: CONCLUSIONS. CHAPTER 15: How Societal Pressures Fail . CHAPTER 16: Technological Advances . CHAPTER 17: The Future .

PART I: MANAGING YOUR ATTENTION. CHAPTER 1: Stop Trying to Manage Your Time . CHAPTER 2: Changing Your Mind: Attention Management . PART II: THE EMPOWERED PRODUCTIVITY SYSTEM. CHAPTER 3: Empowering Your Productivity . CHAPTER 4: Controlling the Constant Chatter . CHAPTER 5: Supplementing Brainpower with Technology . CHAPTER 6: Clearing Your Mind Now . CHAPTER 7: Capture, Store, Act . CHAPTER 8: Clearing Your Space . CHAPTER 9: Emerging Concepts in Information Management . CHAPTER 10: The T .E .S .S .T . Process . CHAPTER 11: Controlling Your Email . CHAPTER 12: Defending Your Attention Using Technology . PART III: TOOLS FOR SUCCESS. CHAPTER 13: Mastering Your Technology . CHAPTER 14: Managing New Communication—Social Media . CHAPTER 15: Implications for Groups and Teams . CHAPTER 16 Modern Conveniences—Reviews and Recommendations . PART IV: APPENDICES. Appendix A: Recommended Book List . Appendix B: Resources .

978-1-118-14330-8 • 384pp • Hardcover • 2012

Bestselling Author of Secrets and Lies and Beyond Fear

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

THIRD EDITION

E-LEARNING and the Science of Instruction Proven Guidelines for Consumers and Designers of Multimedia Learning

e-learning and the science of instruction: Proven guidelines for Consumers and Designers of Multimedia learning, Third edition Dr. Ruth C. Clark, and Dr. Richard E. Mayer, University of California, Santa Barbara 978-0-470-87430-1 • 528pp • Hardcover • 2011

RUTH COLVIN CLARK

RICHARD E. MAYER

The ultimate handbook to designing elearning features updated research, dozens of new examples, and updated principles and guidelines for consumer and designers of multimedia learning. e-Learning and the Science of Instruction provides design principles to increase learning while debunking many popular theories about good design. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: e-Learning: Promise and Pitfalls . CHAPTER 2: How Do People Learn from e-Courses? CHAPTER 3: Evidence-Based Practice . CHAPTER 4: Applying the Multimedia Principle: Use Words and Graphics Rather Than Words Alone . CHAPTER 5: Applying the Contiguity Principle: Align Words to Corresponding Graphics . CHAPTER 6: Applying the Modality Principle: Present Words as Audio Narration Rather Than On-Screen Text . CHAPTER 7: Applying the Redundancy Principle: Explain Visuals with Words in Audio OR Text: Not Both . CHAPTER 8: Applying the Coherence Principle: Adding Material Can Hurt Learning . CHAPTER 9: Applying the Personalization Principle: Use Conversational Style and Virtual Coaches . CHAPTER 10: Applying the Segmenting and Pretraining Principles: Managing Complexity by Breaking a Lesson into Parts . CHAPTER 11: Leveraging examples in e-Learning . CHAPTER 12: Does Practice Make Perfect? CHAPTER 13: Learning Together Virtually . CHAPTER 14: Who’s in Control? Guidelines for e-Learning Navigation . CHAPTER 15: e-Learning to Build Thinking Skills . CHAPTER 16: Simulations and Games in e-Learning . CHAPTER 17:Applying the Guidelines .

M AU RA NE VE L THOM AS

+ Insider Tips Expert advice to help you optimize your performance

+ Valuable Insights Constructive tips and techniques for controlling your attention and managing your time + Unbeatable Advice Intelligent suggestions on selecting and using tools that encourage productivity and success

neW

Trillions: Thriving in the emerging information ecology Peter Lucas, Joe Ballay, and Michael McManus 978-1-118-17607-8 • 288pp • Hardcover • 2012

The ultimate guide to prepare for, and prosper in, the next technology wave, Trillions is an eye-opening book exploring what you need to do to meet the challenge of an information network comprising a trillion or more devices. Filled with diagrams and sidebars offering practical steps, visual case studies, and first person essays to drive home key points, this book exposes the limitations of current technology, inspiring you to meet the coming challenges resulting from the deployment of electronic devices and sensors that will surpass a trillion in number. TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: The Future, So Far . CHAPTER 2: The Next Mountain . CHAPTER 3: The Tyranny of the Orthodoxy . CHAPTER 4: How Nature Does It . CHAPTER 5: How Design Does It . CHAPTER 6: Design Science on Trillions Mountain . CHAPTER 7: Architecture with a Capital “A” . CHAPTER 8: Life in an Information Ecology . CHAPTER 9: Aspects of Tomorrow .

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

oTHeR anD sPeCial

Essential resources for training and HR professionals

e-learning by Design, second edition William Horton 978-0-470-90002-4 • 640pp • Paperback • 2011

This best-selling reference from industry leader William Horton, addresses new technologies, new learning design models, and features allnew contemporary case studies, examples, and William Horton activities. e-Learning by Design is filled with clear information and instruction without over simplification. The book helps instructors build customized e-learning programs from scratch—building on core principles of instructional design to: develop meaningful activities and lessons; create and administer online tests and assessments; design learning games and simulations; and implement an individualized program. SECOND EDITION

E-Learning by Design

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Designing ELearning . CHAPTER 2: Absorb-Type Activities . CHAPTER 3: Do-Type Activities . CHAPTER 4: Connect-Type Activities . CHAPTER 5: Tests . CHAPTER 6: Topics . CHAPTER 7: Games and Simulations . CHAPTER 8: Social Learning . CHAPTER 9: Mobile Learning . CHAPTER 10: Design for the Virtual Classroom . CHAPTER 11: Conclusion . Appendix: Essentialism .

“deserves to become an instant classic” pHilip Kotler

the age oF responsiBility Csr 2.0 and the new dna of Business

Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics

Statistics for SPATIO-TEMPORAL DATA

statistics for spatio-Temporal Data Noel Cressie, Ohio State University, and Christopher K. Wikle, University of Missouri 978-0-471-69274-4 • 624pp • Hardcover • 2011

A state-of-the-art presentation of spatiotemporal processes, bridging classic ideas with modern hierarchical statistical modelNoel Cressie Christopher K. Wikle ing concepts and the latest computational methods, Statistics for Spatio-Temporal Data presents a systematic approach to key quantitative techniques that incorporate the latest advances in statistical computing as well as hierarchical, particularly Bayesian, statistical modeling, with an emphasis on dynamical spatio-temporal models. •

TABLE OF CONTENTS: CHAPTER 1: Space-Time: The Next Frontier . CHAPTER 2: Statistical Preliminaries . CHAPTER 3: Fundamentals of Temporal Processes . CHAPTER 4: Fundamentals of Spatial Random Processes . CHAPTER 5: Exploratory Methods for Spatio-Temporal Data . CHAPTER 6: Spatio-Temporal Statistical Models . CHAPTER 7: Hierarchical Dynamical Spatio-Temporal Models . CHAPTER 8: Hierarchical DSTMs: Implementation and Inference . CHAPTER 9: Hierarchical DSTMs: Examples .

The age of Responsibility: CsR 2.0 and the new Dna of business Wayne Visser, CSR International, Cambridge, and Jeffrey Hollender, Co-founder Seventh Generation, Burlington, Vermont 978-0-470-68857-1 • 408pp • Hardcover • 2011

In this landmark book, Wayne Visser shows how the old model of CSR is being replaced by a 2nd generation movement that goes beyond the outmoded approach of CSR as philanthropy or public relations to a more interactive, stakeholder-driven model. TABLE OF CONTENTS:

Wayne Visser

Foreword by Jeffrey Hollender, Co-Founder, Seventh Generation

MBA Catalogue 2013

PART I: THE CALL TO RESPONSIBILITY. CHAPTER 1: Our ability to respond . PART II: THE AGES AND STAGES OF CSR. CHAPTER 2: The age of greed . CHAPTER 3: The age of philanthropy . CHAPTER 4: The age of marketing . CHAPTER 5: The age of management . CHAPTER 6: The age of responsibility . PART III: THE PRINCIPLES OF CSR 2.0. CHAPTER 7: The principle of creativity . CHAPTER 8: The principle of scalability . CHAPTER 9: The principle of responsiveness . CHAPTER 10: The principle of glocality . CHAPTER 11: The principle of circularity . PART IV: OUR ABILITY TO CHANGE. CHAPTER 12: The matrix of change . CHAPTER 13: Making a difference .

inDeX

a 7city Learning, CFA Level I Exam Companion: The 7city/ Wiley study guide to getting the most out of the CFA Institute Curriculum, 40

Baker, H. Kent, The Art of Capital Restructuring: Creating Shareholder Value through Mergers and Acquisitions, 26 Baker, H. Kent, Capital Budgeting Valuation: Financial Analysis for Today’s Investment Projects, 27

Aaker, David A., Brand Relevance: Making Competitors Irrelevant, 68

Baker, Robert P., The Trade Lifecycle: Behind the Scenes of the Trading Process, 33

Aaker, David A., Marketing Research, 11th Edition International Student Version, 71

Baker, Kenneth R., Optimization Modeling with Spreadsheets, 2nd Edition, 62

Aaker, David A., Strategic Market Management: Global Perspectives, 71

Banko, John, Modeling Mortgage-Backed Securities: Design, Structure, and Risk Analysis with Microsoft Excel, 36

Acharya, Viral V., Regulating Wall Street: The Dodd-Frank Act and the New Architecture of Global Finance, 22 Agresti, Alan, Categorical Data Analysis, 3rd Edition, 13 Alexander, Carol, Market Risk Analysis, Four Volume Boxset, 39 Alexander, Carol, Market Risk Analysis, Volume I, Quantitative Methods in Finance, 39 Alexander, Carol, Market Risk Analysis, Volume III, Pricing, Hedging and Trading Financial Instruments, 39 Alexander, Carol, Market Risk Analysis, Volume II, Practical Financial Econometrics, 39 Alexander, Carol, Market Risk Analysis, Volume IV, Value at Risk Models, 39 Allman, Keith, Financial Simulation Modeling in Excel: A Step-by-Step Guide, + Website, 31 Anderson, Dean, Beyond Change Management: How to Achieve Breakthrough Results Through Conscious Change Leadership, 2nd Edition, 66 Anderson, Linda Ackerman, The Change Leader’s Roadmap: How to Navigate Your Organization’s Transformation, 2nd Edition, 66

Bardhan, Ashok, Global Housing Markets: Crises, Policies, and Institutions, 32 Barwise, Patrick, Beyond the Familiar: Long-Term Growth through Customer Focus and Innovation, 68 Bauwens, Luc, Handbook of Volatility Models and Their Applications, 47 Bazerman, Max H., Judgment in Managerial Decision Making, 8th Edition, 11 Beder, Tanya S., Financial Engineering: The Evolution of a Profession, 26 Bell, Arthur H., Management Communication, 3rd Edition, 7 Belz, Frank-Martin, Sustainability Marketing: A Global Perspective, 2nd Edition, 69 Bens, Ingrid, Facilitating with Ease! Core Skills for Facilitators, Team Leaders and Members, Managers, Consultants, and Trainers, 3rd Edition, 54 Bern, Gianna, Investing in Energy: A Primer on the Economics of the Energy Industry, 27 Besanko, David, Economics of Strategy, 6th Edition International Student Version, 36

Anderson, Linda Ackerman, The Change Leader’s Roadmap and Beyond Change Management, Two Book Set, 2nd Edition, 66

Besanko, David, Economics of Strategy, Sixth Edition, 89

Angwin, Duncan, The Strategy Pathfinder: Core Concepts and Live Cases, 2nd Edition, 88

Bessis, Jol, Risk Management in Banking, 3rd Edition, 37

Arnett, George W., Global Securities Markets: Navigating the World’s Exchanges and OTC Markets, 24

b Bach, Stephen, Managing Human Resources: Human Resource Management in Transition, 5th Edition, 45 Bagshaw, Katharine, Audit and Assurance Essentials: For Professional Accountancy Exams, + Website, 4 Bailey, Matt, Internet Marketing: An Hour a Day, 91 Baker, H. Kent, Corporate Governance: A Synthesis of Theory, Research, and Practice, 2 Baker, H. Kent, Behavioral Finance: Investors, Corporations, and Markets, 22 Baker, H. Kent, Capital Structure and Corporate Financing Decisions: Theory, Evidence, and Practice, 25

Bessant, John, Innovation and Entrepreneurship, 2nd Edition, 16

Bilton, Chris, Creative Strategy: Reconnecting Business and Innovation, 88 Bird, Andy, The Growth Drivers: The Definitive Guide to Transforming Marketing Capabilities, 70 Birkinshaw, Julian, Reinventing Management: Smarter Choices for Getting Work Done, Revised and Updated Edition, 60 Block, Peter, Flawless Consulting: A Guide to Getting Your Expertise Used, 3rd Edition, 60 Boatright, John R., Finance Ethics: Critical Issues in Theory and Practice, 20 Bolman, Lee G., Leading with Soul: An Uncommon Journey of Spirit, Revised 3rd Edition, 54 Bolten, Randall, Painting with Numbers: Presenting Financials and Other Numbers So People Will Understand You, 7

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

inDeX

Boudreau, John, Transformative HR: How Great Companies Use Evidence-Based Change for Sustainable Advantage, 42 Bourne, Mike, Handbook of Corporate Performance Management, 63 Bowditch, James L., A Primer on Organizational Behavior, 7th Edition, 65 Bradley, Teresa, Essential Mathematics for Economics and Business, 4th Edition, 14 Brown, Bruce L., Multivariate Analysis for the Biobehavioral and Social Sciences: A Graphical Approach, 96 Butler, Kirt C., Multinational Finance: Evaluating Opportunities, Costs, and Risks of Operations, 5th Edition, 17 Bygrave, William D., Entrepreneurship, 2nd Edition, 15

Clayman, Michelle R., Corporate Finance Workbook: A Practical Approach, 2nd Edition, 34 Clevenger, Nathan, iPad in the Enterprise: Developing and Deploying Business Applications, 76 Cloke, Kenneth, Resolving Conflicts at Work: Ten Strategies for Everyone on the Job, 3rd Edition, 42 Cobb, Charles G., Making Sense of Agile Project Management: Balancing Control and Agility, 83 Collardi, Boris F. J., Private Banking: Building a Culture of Excellence, 41 Collier, Paul M., Accounting For Managers: Interpreting Accounting Information for Decision-Making, 4th Edition, 4

CAIA Association, CAIA Level II: Advanced Core Topics in Alternative Investments, 2nd Edition, 35

Colling, Trevor, Industrial Relations: Theory and Practice, 3rd Edition, 76

Caligiuri, Paula, Managing the Global Workforce, 47

Collings, Steven, Frequently Asked Questions on IFRS, 6

Cameron, Kim S., Diagnosing and Changing Organizational Culture: Based on the Competing Values Framework, 3rd Edition, 57

Cooper, Cary L., Wiley Encyclopedia of Management 3e, 59

Cerra, Allison, Identity Shift: Where Identity Meets Technology in the Networked-Community Age, 76 Chakravarty, Vikram, Asian Mergers and Acquisitions: Riding the Wave , 47 Chapman, Robert J., Simple Tools and Techniques for Enterprise Risk Management, 2nd Edition, 38

Cortinhas, Carlos, Statistics for Business and Economics, 1st European Edition, 13 Crawley, Michael J., The R Book, 2nd Edition, 96 Cressie, Noel, Statistics for Spatio-Temporal Data, 98 Cumming, Douglas, Venture Capital: Investment Strategies, Structures, and Policies, 20 Czinkota, Michael, International Business, European Edition, 49

Chernick, Michael R., An Introduction to Bootstrap Methods with Applications to R, 9

Dahlen, Micael, Marketing Communications: A Brand Narrative Approach, 69

Chesbrough, Henry, Open Services Innovation: Rethinking Your Business to Grow and Compete in a New Era, 87

Damodaran, Aswath, Applied Corporate Finance, 3rd Edition, 17

Chevalier, Michel, Luxury Brand Management: A World of Privilege, 2nd Edition, 68

Damodaran, Aswath, Investment Philosophies: Successful Strategies and the Investors Who Made Them Work, 2nd Edition, 34

Chihara, Laura M., Mathematical Statistics with Resampling and R, 96 Chisholm, Andrew M., An Introduction to International Capital Markets: Products, Strategies, Participants, 2nd Edition, 38

Damodaran, Aswath, Investment Valuation: Tools and Techniques for Determining the Value of any Asset, University Edition, 3rd Edition, 34

Choudhry, Moorad, The Principles of Banking, 35

Davis, John A., Measuring Marketing: 110+ Key Metrics Every Marketer Needs, 2nd Edition, 74

Choudhry, Moorad, An Introduction to Banking: Liquidity Risk and Asset-Liability Management, 37

DeCenzo, David A., Human Resource Management, 11th Edition International Student Version, 43

Choudhry, Moorad, An Introduction to Bond Markets, 4th Edition, 38

Denison, Daniel, Leading Culture Change in Global Organizations: Aligning Culture and Strategy, 64

Christian, Dieter, IFRS Essentials, 4

Denning, Stephen, The Leaderâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Guide to Storytelling: Mastering the Art and Discipline of Business Narrative, Revised and Updated, 7

CIPR, Share This: The Social Media Handbook for PR Professionals, 92

MBA Catalogue 2013

Clayman, Michelle R., Corporate Finance: A Practical Approach, 2nd Edition, 34

CAIA Association, Mark J. P., CAIA Level I: An Introduction to Core Topics in Alternative Investments, 2nd Edition, 35

Cascarino, Richard E., Auditorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Guide to IT Auditing, + Software Demo, 2nd Edition, 5

100

Clark, Ruth C., e-Learning and the Science of Instruction: Proven Guidelines for Consumers and Designers of Multimedia Learning, 3rd Edition, 97

inDeX

Denning, Stephen, The Leader’s Guide to Radical Management: Reinventing the Workplace for the 21st Century, 15 DeRosa, David F., Options on Foreign Exchange, 3rd Edition, 28

Ford, David, Managing Business Relationships, 3rd Edition, 71 Fraser, John, Enterprise Risk Management: Today’s Leading Research and Best Practices for Tomorrow’s Executives, 19 French, Ray, Organizational Behaviour, 2nd Edition, 61

Dick, Wolfgang, Financial Reporting under IFRS: A Topic Based Approach, 6

Fridson, Martin S., Financial Statement Analysis: A Practitioner’s Guide, 4th Edition, 27

Dor, Arik Ben, Quantitative Credit Portfolio Management: Practical Innovations for Measuring and Controlling Liquidity, Spread, and Issuer Concentration Risk, 33

Fuller, Ed, You Can’t Lead With Your Feet On the Desk: Building Relationships, Breaking Down Barriers, and Delivering Profits, 49

Dorrell, Darrell D., Financial Forensics Body of Knowledge, + Website, 5

Duhon, Terri, How the Trading Floor Really Works, 33 Duncan, Richard, The New Depression: The Breakdown of the Paper Money Economy, 14

e Easterby-Smith, Mark, Handbook of Organizational Learning and Knowledge Management, 2nd Edition, 62

Galbraith, Jay R., Designing Organizations: An Executive Guide to Strategy, Structure, and Process, New and Revised, 86 Gallo, Frank T., Business Leadership in China: How to Blend Best Western Practices with Chinese Wisdom, Revised Edition, 46

Edmondson, Amy C., Teaming: How Organizations Learn, Innovate, and Compete in the Knowledge Economy, 64

GARP (Global Association of Risk Professionals), Foundations of Banking Risk: An Overview of Banking, Banking Risks, and Risk-Based Banking Regulation, 18

Ellis, Tania, The New Pioneers: Sustainable business success through social innovation and social entrepreneurship, 94

Gaughan, Patrick A., Mergers, Acquisitions, and Corporate Restructurings, 5th Edition, 21

Elton, Edwin J., Modern Portfolio Theory and Investment Analysis, 8th Edition International Student Version, 22

Ghosh, Amalendu, Managing Risks in Commercial and Retail Banking, 41

Ernst & Young, International GAAP 2013: Generally Accepted Accounting Principles under International Financial Reporting Standards, 5

Gillis, Tamara, The IABC Handbook of Organizational Communication: A Guide to Internal Communication, Public Relations, Marketing, and Leadership, 2nd Edition, 7

Evans, Martin M., Consumer Behaviour, 2nd Edition, 69 Evans, Dave, Social Media Marketing: An Hour a Day, 2nd Edition, 91

Gitomer, Jeffrey, The Little Book of Leadership: The 12.5 Strengths of Responsible, Reliable, Remarkable Leaders That Create Results, Rewards, and Resilience, 56

Evans, Dave, Social Media Marketing: The Next Generation of Business Engagement, 91

Goldstein, Harvey, Multilevel Statistical Models, 4th Edition, 9

Evensky, Harold, The New Wealth Management: The Financial Advisor’s Guide to Managing and Investing Client Assets, 25

Goodwin, Paul , Decision Analysis for Management Judgment, 4th Edition, 13

f Fabozzi, Frank J., Financial Economics, 17 Fabozzi, Frank J., Mortgage-Backed Securities: Products, Structuring, and Analytical Techniques, 2nd Edition, 30 Fabozzi, Frank J., Equity Valuation and Portfolio Management, 30 Feibel, Bruce J., Complying with the Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS), 29 Feld, Brad, Venture Deals: Be Smarter Than Your Lawyer and Venture Capitalist, 28 Flynn, Nancy, The Social Media Handbook: Rules, Policies, and Best Practices to Successfully Manage Your Organization’s Social Media Presence, Posts, and Potential, 92

Govindarajan, Vijay, Governance, Risk Management, Financial Regulation and Compliance: An Integrated Approach, 22 Grant, Robert M., Contemporary Strategy Analysis: Text Only, 8th Edition, 86 Grant, Robert M., Contemporary Strategy Analysis: Text and Cases, 8th Edition, 86 Grant, Robert M., Foundations of Strategy, 87 Gray, Dina, Measurement Madness: Avoiding Performance Management Pitfalls, 11 Greasley, Andrew, Operations Management, 3rd Edition, 77 Grigg, Neil S., Water Finance: Public Responsibilities and Private Opportunities, 29 Guest, David E, HRM and Performance: Achievements and Challenges, 45

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

101

inDeX

Gup, Benton E., Banking and Financial Institutions: A Guide for Directors, Investors, and Borrowers, 29

Jeanes, Emma, Handbook of Gender, Work and Organization, 62

Gupta, Anil K., Global Strategies for Emerging Asia, 89

Jha, Siddhartha, Interest Rate Markets: A Practical Approach to Fixed Income, 25

H Hamel, Gary, What Matters Now: How to Win in a World of Relentless Change, Ferocious Competition, and Unstoppable Innovation, 67 Hartley, Robert F., Management Mistakes and Successes, 10th Edition, 64 Hartley, Robert F., Marketing Mistakes and Successes, 11th Edition, 72 Hassett, Stephen D., The Risk Premium Factor: A New Model for Understanding the Volatile Forces that Drive Stock Prices, + Website, 30 Hedin, Hans, The Handbook of Market Intelligence: Understand, Compete and Grow in Global Markets, 47

Jones, Michael, Creative Accounting, Fraud and International Accounting Scandals, 4 Jones, Michael, Accounting, 3rd Edition, 5 Jones, Stephanie, BRICs and Beyond: Lessons on Emerging Markets, 48 Jorion, Philippe, Financial Risk Manager Handbook + Test Bank: FRM Part I / Part II, 6th Edition, 23

K Kantor, David, Reading the Room: Group Dynamics for Coaches and Leaders, 54

Heldman, Kim, Project Management JumpStart, 3rd Edition, 84

Kaplan, Jack M., Patterns of Entrepreneurship Management, 4th Edition, 15

Hitt, Michael A., Organizational Behavior, 3rd Edition International Student Version, 65

Kaplan, Paul D., Frontiers of Modern Asset Allocation, 33

Hoerl, Roger, Statistical Thinking: Improving Business Performance, 2nd Edition, 12

Kerzner, Harold, Project Management Metrics, KPIs, and Dashboards: A Guide to Measuring and Monitoring Project Performance, 82

Holloman, Christer, The Social Media MBA: Your Competitive Edge in Social Media Strategy Development and Delivery, 90

Kerzner, Harold, Project Management: A Systems Approach to Planning, Scheduling, and Controlling, 11th Edition, 85

Hope, Jeremy, The Leaderâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Dilemma: How to Build an Empowered and Adaptive Organization Without Losing Control, 54 Horton, William, e-Learning by Design, 2nd Edition, 98 Hubbert, Simon, Essential Mathematics for Market Risk Management, 38 Hull, John, Risk Management and Financial Institutions, + Web Site, 3rd Edition, 35

Kerzner, Harold, Project Management: Case Studies, 4th Edition, 85 Kets de Vries, Manfred F. R., Global Executive Leadership Inventory (GELI), Observer, Observer, 55 Kets de Vries, Manfred F. R., Global Executive Leadership Inventory (GELI), Facilitatorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Guide Set, 55 Kets de Vries, Manfred F. R., Global Executive Leadership Inventory (GELI), Participant Workbook, 55 Kets de Vries, Manfred F. R., Global Executive Leadership Inventory (GELI), Self Assessment, Self, 55 King, Sara N., Discovering the Leader in You: How to Realize Your Leadership Potential, New and Revised, 57

King, Sara N., Discovering the Leader in You Workbook, 57

Iacus, Stefano M., Option Pricing and Estimation of Financial Models with R, 26

Klugman, Stuart A., Loss Models: From Data to Decisions, 4th Edition, 12

International Institute for Learning, Harold, Managing Complex Projects, 83

Kolb, Robert, Financial Derivatives: Pricing and Risk Management , 18

Iqbal, Zamir, Risk Sharing in Finance: The Islamic Finance Alternative, 37

Kolb, Robert W., Sovereign Debt: From Safety to Default, 24

Iqbal, Zamir, An Introduction to Islamic Finance: Theory and Practice, 2nd Edition, 37

J James, Jessica, Handbook of Exchange Rates, 48

MBA Catalogue 2013

Johnson, R. Stafford, Bond Evaluation, Selection, and Management, + Website, 2nd Edition, 21

Heldman, Kim, PMP Project Management Professional Exam Study Guide, 6th Edition, 83

Holloman, Christer, The Social Media MBA in Practice: An Essential Collection of Inspirational Case Studies to Influence your Social Media Strategy, 90

102

Jiambalvo, James, Managerial Accounting, 4th Edition International Student Version, 4

Kolb, Robert W., Financial Contagion: The Viral Threat to the Wealth of Nations, 24 Kotabe, Masaaki (Mike), Global Marketing Management, 5th Edition International Student Version, 71 Kouvelis, Panos, Handbook of Integrated Risk Management in Global Supply Chains, 63

inDeX

Kouzes, James M., The Leadership Challenge: How to Make Extraordinary Things Happen in Organizations, 5th Edition, 56 Krebsz, Markus, Securitization and Structured Finance Post Credit Crunch: A Best Practice Deal Lifecycle Guide, 26 Krippendorff, Kaihan, Outthink the Competition: How a New Generation of Strategists Sees Options Others Ignore, 89 Kuhn, Robert Lawrence, How China’s Leaders Think: The Inside Story of China’s Past, Current and Future Leaders, Revised Paperback, 46

l Landy, Frank J., Work in the 21st Century: An Introduction to Industrial and Organizational Psychology, 4th Edition, 61 Lau, J. Y. F., An Introduction to Critical Thinking and Creativity: Think More, Think Better, 10 Lawler, Edward E., Management Reset: Organizing for Sustainable Effectiveness, 42 Lawrence, Peter, Enterprise in Action: A Guide To Entrepreneurship, 16 Lawrence, Paul R., Driven to Lead: Good, Bad, and Misguided Leadership, 60 Lawson, Karen, The Trainer’s Handbook of Leadership Development: Tools, Techniques, and Activities, 44 Leibowitz, Martin L., The Endowment Model of Investing: Return, Risk, and Diversification, 20

Martellini, Lionel, Fixed-Income Securities: Valuation, Risk Management and Portfolio Strategies, 26 Maxton, Graeme, The End of Progress: How Modern Economics Has Failed Us, 14 Mayer, Bernard, The Dynamics of Conflict: A Guide to Engagement and Intervention, 2nd Edition, 43 Mazin, Rebecca, The Employee Benefits Answer Book: An Indispensable Guide for Managers and Business Owners, 44 McDaniel, Carl, Marketing Research Essentials, 8th Edition, 72 McDaniel, Carl, Marketing Research, 9th Edition International Student Version, 72 McDonald, Malcolm, Marketing Plans for Services: A Complete Guide, 3rd Edition, 68 McDonald, Malcolm, Marketing Plans: How to Prepare Them, How to Use Them, 7th Edition, 70 McGoff, Chris, The Primes: How Any Group Can Solve Any Problem, 66 McKinsey & Company Inc., Tim, Valuation: Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies, University Edition, 5th Edition, 21 McKinsey & Company Inc., Valuation Workbook: Step-byStep Exercises and Tests to Help You Master Valuation, 5th Edition, 21

Lempereur, Alain, The First Move: A Negotiator’s Companion, 66

McMillan, Michael G., Investments Workbook: Principles of Portfolio and Equity Analysis (CFA Institute Investment Series), 23

Lencioni, Patrick M., The Advantage: Why Organizational Health Trumps Everything Else In Business, 67

Meredith, Jack R., Operations Management, 5th Edition International Student Version, 79

Lloyd, Chris J., Data Driven Business Decisions, 9

Meredith, Jack R., Project Management: A Managerial Approach, 8th Edition International Student Version, 82

Lovett, John, Social Media Metrics Secrets, 93 Lowitt, Eric, The Future of Value: How Sustainability Creates Value Through Competitive Differentiation, 94

Merna, Tony, Corporate Risk Management, 2nd Edition, 20

Lucas, Peter, Trillions: Thriving in the Emerging Information Ecology, 97

Miles, David, Macroeconomics: Understanding the Global Economy, 3rd Edition, 14

Miles, Jeffrey A., Management and Organization Theory: A Jossey-Bass Reader, 63

Magal, Simha R., Essentials of Business Processes and Information Systems, 77 Magal, Simha R., Integrated Business Processes with ERP Systems, 78 Mahajan, Vijay, The Arab World Unbound: Tapping into the Power of 350 Million Consumers, 49 Malz, Allan M., Financial Risk Management: Models, History, and Institutions, 30 Mangan, John, Global Logistics and Supply Chain Management, 2nd Edition, 76 Mantel, Samuel J., Project Management in Practice, 4th Edition International Student Version, 82

Merrill, M. David, First Principles of Instruction, 95

Monger, Rod, Financial Accounting: A Global Perspective, 4 Monks, Robert A. G., Corporate Governance, 5th Edition, 67 Morgan, John, Brand Against the Machine: How to Build Your Brand, Cut Through the Marketing Noise, and Stand Out from the Competition, 72 Morgan, Mark, Executing Your Business Transformation: How to Engage Sweeping Change Without Killing Yourself Or Your Business, 87 Mun, Johnathan, Modeling Risk: Applying Monte Carlo Risk Simulation, Strategic Real Options, Stochastic Forecasting, and Portfolio Optimization, + DVD, 2nd Edition, 20

Marston, Richard C., Portfolio Design: A Modern Approach to Asset Allocation, 24 www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

103

inDeX

Nevel Thomas, Maura, Personal Productivity Secrets: Do what you never thought possible with your time and attention... and regain control of your life, 97

Qualman, Erik, Socialnomics: How Social Media Transforms the Way We Live and Do Business, Revised and Updated Edition, 93

Nicholson, Nigel, The I of Leadership: Strategies for Seeing, Being and Doing, 58

Quinn, Robert E., Becoming a Master Manager: A Competing Values Approach, 5th Edition, 61

Nigrini, Mark, Benfordâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Law: Applications for Forensic Accounting, Auditing, and Fraud Detection, 5

Quiry, Pascal, Corporate Finance: Theory and Practice, 3rd Edition, 17

Nutt, Paul C., Handbook of Decision Making, 9

Rachev, Svetlozar T., Financial Models with Levy Processes and Volatility Clustering, 23

Padilla, Art, Leadership, 56 Panik, Michael J., Statistical Inference: A Short Course, 10 Parameswaran, Sunil, Fundamentals of Financial Instruments: An Introduction to Stocks, Bonds, Foreign Exchange,and Derivatives, 29 Pardoe, Iain, Applied Regression Modeling, 2nd Edition, 12 Pearlson, Keri E., Strategic Management of Information Systems, 5th Edition International Student Version, 77 Peck, Sarah, Investment Ethics, 22 Peck, Dave, Think Before You Engage: 100 Questions to Ask Before Starting a Social Media Marketing Campaign, 91

Rainer, R. Kelly, Introduction to Information Systems, 4th Edition International Student Version, 77 Rainer, R. Kelly, Management Information Systems, Moving Business Forward, 78 Reed, Sandra M., PHR / SPHR: Professional in Human Resources Certification Study Guide, 4th Edition, 43 Reid, R. Dan, Operations Management: An Integrated Approach, 5th Edition International Student Version, 78 Rencher, Alvin C., Methods of Multivariate Analysis, 3rd Edition, 12

Peery, Gordon F., The Post-Reform Guide to Derivatives and Futures, 33

Ritti, R. Richard, The Ropes to Skip and the Ropes to Know: Studies in Organizational Theory and Behavior, 8th Edition, 65

Peppers, Don, Managing Customer Relationships: A Strategic Framework, 2nd Edition, 70

Robinson, Thomas R., International Financial Statement Analysis (CFA Institute Investment Series), 2nd Edition, 36

Perrey, Jesko, Retail Marketing and Branding: A Definitive Guide to Maximizing ROI, 2nd Edition, 75

Robinson, Thomas R., International Financial Statement Analysis Workbook (CFA Institute Investment Series), 2nd Edition, 36

Phillips, Jack J., Project Management ROI: A Step-by-Step Guide for Measuring the Impact and ROI for Projects, 82 Piccoli, Gabe, Information Systems for Managers: Text and Cases, 2nd Edition, 81 Piccoli, Gabe, Essentials of Information Systems for Managers: Text Only, 81 Pinto, Jerald E., Equity Asset Valuation, 2nd Edition, 19 Pinto, Jerald E., Equity Asset Valuation Workbook, 2nd Edition, 19 Pompian, Michael, Behavioral Finance and Wealth Management: How to Build Optimal Portfolios That Account for Investor Biases, 2nd Edition, 33 Powell, Warren B., Optimal Learning, 10 Powell, Stephen G., Management Science: The Art of Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3rd Edition, 11 Poynter, Ray, The Handbook of Online and Social Media Research: Tools and Techniques for Market Researchers, 90 Promislow, S. David, Fundamentals of Actuarial Mathematics, 2nd Edition, 23

Rosenbaum, Joshua, Investment Banking: Valuation, Leveraged Buyouts, and Mergers and Acquisitions, 18 Russell, Roberta S., Operations Management: Creating Value Along the Supply Chain, 7th Edition International Student Version, 79 Ruta, D., Leading Teams: Tools and Techniques for Successful Team Leadership from the Sports World, 58

s Sanders, Nada R., Supply Chain Management: A Global Perspective, 78 Saunders, Anthony, Credit Risk Management In and Out of the Financial Crisis: New Approaches to Value at Risk and Other Paradigms, 3rd Edition, 20 Sawik, Tadeusz, Scheduling in Supply Chains Using Mixed Integer Programming, 62 Schein, Edgar H., Organizational Culture and Leadership, 4th Edition, 56 Schermerhorn, John R., Introduction to Management, 12th Edition International Student Version, 64 Schermerhorn, John R., Organizational Behavior, 12th Edition International Student Version, 65

104

MBA Catalogue 2013

inDeX

Schmidt, Anatoly B., Financial Markets and Trading: An Introduction to Market Microstructure and Trading Strategies, 28 Schneier, Bruce, Liars and Outliers: Enabling the Trust that Society Needs to Thrive, 97 Scott, David Meerman, The New Rules of Marketing & PR: How to Use Social Media, Online Video, Mobile Applications, Blogs, News Releases, and Viral Marketing to Reach Buyers Directly, 3rd Edition, 74 Scott, David Meerman, Real-Time Marketing and PR: How to Instantly Engage Your Market, Connect with Customers, and Create Products that Grow Your Business Now, Revised and Updated Edition, 74 Scudder, Virgil, World Class Communication: How great CEO’s win with the public, shareholders, employees, and the media, 8 Sengupta, Chandan, Financial Analysis and Modeling Using Excel and VBA, 2nd Edition, 19 Shein, James B., Reversing the Slide: A Strategic Guide to Turnarounds and Corporate Renewal, 17 Shmueli, Galit, Data Mining for Business Intelligence: Concepts, Techniques, and Applications in Microsoft Office Excel with XLMiner, 2nd Edition, 79 Shriberg, Arthur, Practicing Leadership Principles and Applications, 4th Edition, 55 SIFMA, The Fundamentals of Municipal Bonds, 6th Edition, 32 Silvia, John, Dynamic Economic Decision Making: Strategies for Financial Risk, Capital Markets, and Monetary Policy, 28 Smith, Donald J., Bond Math: The Theory Behind the Formulas, 27

Stock, Wendy A., Introduction to Economics: Social Issues and Economic Thinking, 41 Stowell, Frank, The Manager’s Guide to Systems Practice: Making Sense of Complex Problems, 80 Sullivan, Luke, Hey, Whipple, Squeeze This: The Classic Guide to Creating Great Ads, 4th Edition, 73

T Talmor, Eli, International Private Equity, 35 Thain, Greg, Store Wars: The Worldwide Battle for Mindspace and Shelfspace, Online and In-store, 2nd Edition, 75 Topus, David, Talk to Strangers: How Everyday, Random Encounters Can Expand Your Business, Career, Income, and Life, 8 Tovstiga, George, Strategy in Practice: A Practitioner’s Guide to Strategic Thinking, 2nd Edition, 88 Tsay, Ruey S., An Introduction to Analysis of Financial Data with R, 13 Tsay, Ruey S., Analysis of Financial Time Series, 3rd Edition, 49 Tselichtchev, Ivan, China Versus the West: The Global Power Shift of the 21st Century, 46 Tuckman, Bruce, Fixed Income Securities: Tools for Today’s Markets, 3rd Edition, University Edition, 31 Tuckman, Bruce, Fixed Income Securities: Tools for Today’s Markets, 3rd Edition, 32 Turban, Efraim, Information Technology Management, 8th Edition International Student Version, 80

Smith, David M., Institutional Money Management: An Inside Look at Strategies, Players, and Practices, 32

van Winkelen, Christine, Knowledge Works: The Handbook of Practical Ways to Identify and Solve Common Organizational Problems for Better Performance, 84

Smith, Diana McLain, Elephant in the Room: How Relationships Make or Break the Success of Leaders and Organizations, 57

Verzuh, Eric, The Fast Forward MBA in Project Management, 4th Edition, 83

Snyder, Lawrence V., Fundamentals of Supply Chain Theory, 63

Viens, Frederi G., Handbook of Modeling High-Frequency Data in Finance, 48

Solis, Brian, Engage!: The Complete Guide for Brands and Businesses to Build, Cultivate, and Measure Success in the New Web, Revised and Updated, 73

Visser, Wayne, The A to Z of Corporate Social Responsibility, 2nd, Revised and Updated Edition, 94

Solis, Brian, The End of Business As Usual: Rewire the Way You Work to Succeed in the Consumer Revolution, 73 Solomon, Jill, Corporate Governance and Accountability, 4th Edition, 67 Sower, V. E., Essentials of Quality with Cases and Experiential Exercises, 11

Visser, Wayne, The Age of Responsibility: CSR 2.0 and the New DNA of Business, 98

W Wade, Woody, Scenario Planning: A Field Guide to the Future, 89

Sower, V.E., Essentials of Quality with Cases and Experiential Exercises, Premier Edition, 79

Walter, Carl, Red Capitalism: The Fragile Financial Foundation of China’s Extraordinary Rise, Revised Edition, 46

Stewart, Greg L., Human Resource Management, 2nd Edition, 43

Ward, John, Benefits Management: How to Increase the Business Value of Your IT Projects, 2nd Edition, 80

www.wiley.com/go/mbacatalogue

105

inDeX

Ward, Stephen, How to Manage Project Opportunity and Risk: Why Uncertainty Management can be a Much Better Approach than Risk Management, 3rd Edition, 84 Waring, M. Barton, Pension Finance: Putting the Risks and Costs of Defined Benefit Plans Back Under Your Control, 31 Webber, Nick, Implementing Models of Financial Derivatives: Object Oriented Applications with VBA, with CD-ROM, 25 Weisbord, Marvin R., Productive Workplaces: Dignity, Meaning, and Community in the 21st Century, 3rd Edition, 25 Year Anniversary, 67 Wells, John, Strategic IQ: Creating Smarter Corporations, 88 Weybrecht, Giselle, The Sustainable MBA: The Managerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Guide to Green Business, 94 Weygandt, Jerry J., Financial Accounting, IFRS Edition, 2nd Edition, 5 Wick, Calhoun W., The Six Disciplines of Breakthrough Learning: How to Turn Training and Development into Business Results, 2nd Edition, 95 Wildflower, Leni, The Handbook of Knowledge-Based Coaching: From Theory to Practice, 60 Wiley, Jack, Strategic Employee Surveys: Evidence-based Guidelines for Driving Organizational Success, 44 Wollan, Robert, The Social Media Management Handbook: Everything You Need To Know To Get Social Media Working In Your Business, 93 Woodburn, Diana, Key Account Management: The Definitive Guide, 3rd Edition, Revised and Updated, 70 Wright, Patrick M., The Chief HR Officer: Defining the New Role of Human Resource Leaders, 42 Wysocki, Robert K., Effective Project Management: Traditional, Agile, Extreme, 6th Edition, 85

Y Yau, Nathan, Visualize This: The FlowingData Guide to Design, Visualization, and Statistics, 10

106

MBA Catalogue 2013

W i l e y A C A D e M i C R e P R e S e N tAt i o N To find your Academic Account Manager, please use our handy, online ‘Who’s my Rep’ facility: www.wiley.com/go/whosmyrep We would welcome the opportunity to show you our products and how we can tailor this for your individual needs. Please contact us at the following email address: businessschools@wiley.com